summaryrefslogtreecommitdiffstats
path: root/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet')
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/3c509.rst249
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/vortex.rst459
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/altera/altera_tse.rst286
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/amazon/ena.rst317
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/aquantia/atlantic.rst556
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/chelsio/cxgb.rst393
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/cirrus/cs89x0.rst647
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/davicom/dm9000.rst171
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/dmfe.rst71
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dlink/dl2k.rst314
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa.rst269
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst161
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst186
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst12
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/mac-phy-support.rst191
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst406
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/switch-driver.rst217
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/gianfar.rst51
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/google/gve.rst166
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/huawei/hinic.rst128
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/index.rst62
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e100.rst188
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000.rst463
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000e.rst383
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/fm10k.rst142
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/i40e.rst771
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/iavf.rst331
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ice.rst1040
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igb.rst213
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igbvf.rst65
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgb.rst468
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbe.rst557
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbevf.rst67
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeon_ep.rst35
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeontx2.rst289
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/mellanox/mlx5.rst762
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/microsoft/netvsc.rst120
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/s2io.rst196
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/netronome/nfp.rst249
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/pensando/ionic.rst274
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/smsc/smc9.rst48
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/stmicro/stmmac.rst700
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/am65_nuss_cpsw_switchdev.rst143
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw.rst587
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw_switchdev.rst242
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/tlan.rst140
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/toshiba/spider_net.rst202
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/ngbe.rst14
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/txgbe.rst20
49 files changed, 14021 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/3c509.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/3c509.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..47f706bac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/3c509.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,249 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=============================================================================
+Linux and the 3Com EtherLink III Series Ethercards (driver v1.18c and higher)
+=============================================================================
+
+This file contains the instructions and caveats for v1.18c and higher versions
+of the 3c509 driver. You should not use the driver without reading this file.
+
+release 1.0
+
+28 February 2002
+
+Current maintainer (corrections to):
+ David Ruggiero <jdr@farfalle.com>
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+The following are notes and information on using the 3Com EtherLink III series
+ethercards in Linux. These cards are commonly known by the most widely-used
+card's 3Com model number, 3c509. They are all 10mb/s ISA-bus cards and shouldn't
+be (but sometimes are) confused with the similarly-numbered PCI-bus "3c905"
+(aka "Vortex" or "Boomerang") series. Kernel support for the 3c509 family is
+provided by the module 3c509.c, which has code to support all of the following
+models:
+
+ - 3c509 (original ISA card)
+ - 3c509B (later revision of the ISA card; supports full-duplex)
+ - 3c589 (PCMCIA)
+ - 3c589B (later revision of the 3c589; supports full-duplex)
+ - 3c579 (EISA)
+
+Large portions of this documentation were heavily borrowed from the guide
+written the original author of the 3c509 driver, Donald Becker. The master
+copy of that document, which contains notes on older versions of the driver,
+currently resides on Scyld web server: http://www.scyld.com/.
+
+
+Special Driver Features
+=======================
+
+Overriding card settings
+
+The driver allows boot- or load-time overriding of the card's detected IOADDR,
+IRQ, and transceiver settings, although this capability shouldn't generally be
+needed except to enable full-duplex mode (see below). An example of the syntax
+for LILO parameters for doing this::
+
+ ether=10,0x310,3,0x3c509,eth0
+
+This configures the first found 3c509 card for IRQ 10, base I/O 0x310, and
+transceiver type 3 (10base2). The flag "0x3c509" must be set to avoid conflicts
+with other card types when overriding the I/O address. When the driver is
+loaded as a module, only the IRQ may be overridden. For example,
+setting two cards to IRQ10 and IRQ11 is done by using the irq module
+option::
+
+ options 3c509 irq=10,11
+
+
+Full-duplex mode
+================
+
+The v1.18c driver added support for the 3c509B's full-duplex capabilities.
+In order to enable and successfully use full-duplex mode, three conditions
+must be met:
+
+(a) You must have a Etherlink III card model whose hardware supports full-
+duplex operations. Currently, the only members of the 3c509 family that are
+positively known to support full-duplex are the 3c509B (ISA bus) and 3c589B
+(PCMCIA) cards. Cards without the "B" model designation do *not* support
+full-duplex mode; these include the original 3c509 (no "B"), the original
+3c589, the 3c529 (MCA bus), and the 3c579 (EISA bus).
+
+(b) You must be using your card's 10baseT transceiver (i.e., the RJ-45
+connector), not its AUI (thick-net) or 10base2 (thin-net/coax) interfaces.
+AUI and 10base2 network cabling is physically incapable of full-duplex
+operation.
+
+(c) Most importantly, your 3c509B must be connected to a link partner that is
+itself full-duplex capable. This is almost certainly one of two things: a full-
+duplex-capable Ethernet switch (*not* a hub), or a full-duplex-capable NIC on
+another system that's connected directly to the 3c509B via a crossover cable.
+
+Full-duplex mode can be enabled using 'ethtool'.
+
+.. warning::
+
+ Extremely important caution concerning full-duplex mode
+
+ Understand that the 3c509B's hardware's full-duplex support is much more
+ limited than that provide by more modern network interface cards. Although
+ at the physical layer of the network it fully supports full-duplex operation,
+ the card was designed before the current Ethernet auto-negotiation (N-way)
+ spec was written. This means that the 3c509B family ***cannot and will not
+ auto-negotiate a full-duplex connection with its link partner under any
+ circumstances, no matter how it is initialized***. If the full-duplex mode
+ of the 3c509B is enabled, its link partner will very likely need to be
+ independently _forced_ into full-duplex mode as well; otherwise various nasty
+ failures will occur - at the very least, you'll see massive numbers of packet
+ collisions. This is one of very rare circumstances where disabling auto-
+ negotiation and forcing the duplex mode of a network interface card or switch
+ would ever be necessary or desirable.
+
+
+Available Transceiver Types
+===========================
+
+For versions of the driver v1.18c and above, the available transceiver types are:
+
+== =========================================================================
+0 transceiver type from EEPROM config (normally 10baseT); force half-duplex
+1 AUI (thick-net / DB15 connector)
+2 (undefined)
+3 10base2 (thin-net == coax / BNC connector)
+4 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force half-duplex mode
+8 transceiver type and duplex mode taken from card's EEPROM config settings
+12 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force full-duplex mode
+== =========================================================================
+
+Prior to driver version 1.18c, only transceiver codes 0-4 were supported. Note
+that the new transceiver codes 8 and 12 are the *only* ones that will enable
+full-duplex mode, no matter what the card's detected EEPROM settings might be.
+This insured that merely upgrading the driver from an earlier version would
+never automatically enable full-duplex mode in an existing installation;
+it must always be explicitly enabled via one of these code in order to be
+activated.
+
+The transceiver type can be changed using 'ethtool'.
+
+
+Interpretation of error messages and common problems
+----------------------------------------------------
+
+Error Messages
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+eth0: Infinite loop in interrupt, status 2011.
+These are "mostly harmless" message indicating that the driver had too much
+work during that interrupt cycle. With a status of 0x2011 you are receiving
+packets faster than they can be removed from the card. This should be rare
+or impossible in normal operation. Possible causes of this error report are:
+
+ - a "green" mode enabled that slows the processor down when there is no
+ keyboard activity.
+
+ - some other device or device driver hogging the bus or disabling interrupts.
+ Check /proc/interrupts for excessive interrupt counts. The timer tick
+ interrupt should always be incrementing faster than the others.
+
+No received packets
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+If a 3c509, 3c562 or 3c589 can successfully transmit packets, but never
+receives packets (as reported by /proc/net/dev or 'ifconfig') you likely
+have an interrupt line problem. Check /proc/interrupts to verify that the
+card is actually generating interrupts. If the interrupt count is not
+increasing you likely have a physical conflict with two devices trying to
+use the same ISA IRQ line. The common conflict is with a sound card on IRQ10
+or IRQ5, and the easiest solution is to move the 3c509 to a different
+interrupt line. If the device is receiving packets but 'ping' doesn't work,
+you have a routing problem.
+
+Tx Carrier Errors Reported in /proc/net/dev
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+
+If an EtherLink III appears to transmit packets, but the "Tx carrier errors"
+field in /proc/net/dev increments as quickly as the Tx packet count, you
+likely have an unterminated network or the incorrect media transceiver selected.
+
+3c509B card is not detected on machines with an ISA PnP BIOS.
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+While the updated driver works with most PnP BIOS programs, it does not work
+with all. This can be fixed by disabling PnP support using the 3Com-supplied
+setup program.
+
+3c509 card is not detected on overclocked machines
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Increase the delay time in id_read_eeprom() from the current value, 500,
+to an absurdly high value, such as 5000.
+
+
+Decoding Status and Error Messages
+----------------------------------
+
+
+The bits in the main status register are:
+
+===== ======================================
+value description
+===== ======================================
+0x01 Interrupt latch
+0x02 Tx overrun, or Rx underrun
+0x04 Tx complete
+0x08 Tx FIFO room available
+0x10 A complete Rx packet has arrived
+0x20 A Rx packet has started to arrive
+0x40 The driver has requested an interrupt
+0x80 Statistics counter nearly full
+===== ======================================
+
+The bits in the transmit (Tx) status word are:
+
+===== ============================================
+value description
+===== ============================================
+0x02 Out-of-window collision.
+0x04 Status stack overflow (normally impossible).
+0x08 16 collisions.
+0x10 Tx underrun (not enough PCI bus bandwidth).
+0x20 Tx jabber.
+0x40 Tx interrupt requested.
+0x80 Status is valid (this should always be set).
+===== ============================================
+
+
+When a transmit error occurs the driver produces a status message such as::
+
+ eth0: Transmit error, Tx status register 82
+
+The two values typically seen here are:
+
+0x82
+^^^^
+
+Out of window collision. This typically occurs when some other Ethernet
+host is incorrectly set to full duplex on a half duplex network.
+
+0x88
+^^^^
+
+16 collisions. This typically occurs when the network is exceptionally busy
+or when another host doesn't correctly back off after a collision. If this
+error is mixed with 0x82 errors it is the result of a host incorrectly set
+to full duplex (see above).
+
+Both of these errors are the result of network problems that should be
+corrected. They do not represent driver malfunction.
+
+
+Revision history (this file)
+============================
+
+28Feb02 v1.0 DR New; major portions based on Becker original 3c509 docs
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/vortex.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/vortex.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e89e4192a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/vortex.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,459 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=========================
+3Com Vortex device driver
+=========================
+
+Andrew Morton
+
+30 April 2000
+
+
+This document describes the usage and errata of the 3Com "Vortex" device
+driver for Linux, 3c59x.c.
+
+The driver was written by Donald Becker <becker@scyld.com>
+
+Don is no longer the prime maintainer of this version of the driver.
+Please report problems to one or more of:
+
+- Andrew Morton
+- Netdev mailing list <netdev@vger.kernel.org>
+- Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org>
+
+Please note the 'Reporting and Diagnosing Problems' section at the end
+of this file.
+
+
+Since kernel 2.3.99-pre6, this driver incorporates the support for the
+3c575-series Cardbus cards which used to be handled by 3c575_cb.c.
+
+This driver supports the following hardware:
+
+ - 3c590 Vortex 10Mbps
+ - 3c592 EISA 10Mbps Demon/Vortex
+ - 3c597 EISA Fast Demon/Vortex
+ - 3c595 Vortex 100baseTx
+ - 3c595 Vortex 100baseT4
+ - 3c595 Vortex 100base-MII
+ - 3c900 Boomerang 10baseT
+ - 3c900 Boomerang 10Mbps Combo
+ - 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps TPO
+ - 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps Combo
+ - 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps TPC
+ - 3c900B-FL Cyclone 10base-FL
+ - 3c905 Boomerang 100baseTx
+ - 3c905 Boomerang 100baseT4
+ - 3c905B Cyclone 100baseTx
+ - 3c905B Cyclone 10/100/BNC
+ - 3c905B-FX Cyclone 100baseFx
+ - 3c905C Tornado
+ - 3c920B-EMB-WNM (ATI Radeon 9100 IGP)
+ - 3c980 Cyclone
+ - 3c980C Python-T
+ - 3cSOHO100-TX Hurricane
+ - 3c555 Laptop Hurricane
+ - 3c556 Laptop Tornado
+ - 3c556B Laptop Hurricane
+ - 3c575 [Megahertz] 10/100 LAN CardBus
+ - 3c575 Boomerang CardBus
+ - 3CCFE575BT Cyclone CardBus
+ - 3CCFE575CT Tornado CardBus
+ - 3CCFE656 Cyclone CardBus
+ - 3CCFEM656B Cyclone+Winmodem CardBus
+ - 3CXFEM656C Tornado+Winmodem CardBus
+ - 3c450 HomePNA Tornado
+ - 3c920 Tornado
+ - 3c982 Hydra Dual Port A
+ - 3c982 Hydra Dual Port B
+ - 3c905B-T4
+ - 3c920B-EMB-WNM Tornado
+
+Module parameters
+=================
+
+There are several parameters which may be provided to the driver when
+its module is loaded. These are usually placed in ``/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf``
+configuration files. Example::
+
+ options 3c59x debug=3 rx_copybreak=300
+
+If you are using the PCMCIA tools (cardmgr) then the options may be
+placed in /etc/pcmcia/config.opts::
+
+ module "3c59x" opts "debug=3 rx_copybreak=300"
+
+
+The supported parameters are:
+
+debug=N
+
+ Where N is a number from 0 to 7. Anything above 3 produces a lot
+ of output in your system logs. debug=1 is default.
+
+options=N1,N2,N3,...
+
+ Each number in the list provides an option to the corresponding
+ network card. So if you have two 3c905's and you wish to provide
+ them with option 0x204 you would use::
+
+ options=0x204,0x204
+
+ The individual options are composed of a number of bitfields which
+ have the following meanings:
+
+ Possible media type settings
+
+ == =================================
+ 0 10baseT
+ 1 10Mbs AUI
+ 2 undefined
+ 3 10base2 (BNC)
+ 4 100base-TX
+ 5 100base-FX
+ 6 MII (Media Independent Interface)
+ 7 Use default setting from EEPROM
+ 8 Autonegotiate
+ 9 External MII
+ 10 Use default setting from EEPROM
+ == =================================
+
+ When generating a value for the 'options' setting, the above media
+ selection values may be OR'ed (or added to) the following:
+
+ ====== =============================================
+ 0x8000 Set driver debugging level to 7
+ 0x4000 Set driver debugging level to 2
+ 0x0400 Enable Wake-on-LAN
+ 0x0200 Force full duplex mode.
+ 0x0010 Bus-master enable bit (Old Vortex cards only)
+ ====== =============================================
+
+ For example::
+
+ insmod 3c59x options=0x204
+
+ will force full-duplex 100base-TX, rather than allowing the usual
+ autonegotiation.
+
+global_options=N
+
+ Sets the ``options`` parameter for all 3c59x NICs in the machine.
+ Entries in the ``options`` array above will override any setting of
+ this.
+
+full_duplex=N1,N2,N3...
+
+ Similar to bit 9 of 'options'. Forces the corresponding card into
+ full-duplex mode. Please use this in preference to the ``options``
+ parameter.
+
+ In fact, please don't use this at all! You're better off getting
+ autonegotiation working properly.
+
+global_full_duplex=N1
+
+ Sets full duplex mode for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. Entries
+ in the ``full_duplex`` array above will override any setting of this.
+
+flow_ctrl=N1,N2,N3...
+
+ Use 802.3x MAC-layer flow control. The 3com cards only support the
+ PAUSE command, which means that they will stop sending packets for a
+ short period if they receive a PAUSE frame from the link partner.
+
+ The driver only allows flow control on a link which is operating in
+ full duplex mode.
+
+ This feature does not appear to work on the 3c905 - only 3c905B and
+ 3c905C have been tested.
+
+ The 3com cards appear to only respond to PAUSE frames which are
+ sent to the reserved destination address of 01:80:c2:00:00:01. They
+ do not honour PAUSE frames which are sent to the station MAC address.
+
+rx_copybreak=M
+
+ The driver preallocates 32 full-sized (1536 byte) network buffers
+ for receiving. When a packet arrives, the driver has to decide
+ whether to leave the packet in its full-sized buffer, or to allocate
+ a smaller buffer and copy the packet across into it.
+
+ This is a speed/space tradeoff.
+
+ The value of rx_copybreak is used to decide when to make the copy.
+ If the packet size is less than rx_copybreak, the packet is copied.
+ The default value for rx_copybreak is 200 bytes.
+
+max_interrupt_work=N
+
+ The driver's interrupt service routine can handle many receive and
+ transmit packets in a single invocation. It does this in a loop.
+ The value of max_interrupt_work governs how many times the interrupt
+ service routine will loop. The default value is 32 loops. If this
+ is exceeded the interrupt service routine gives up and generates a
+ warning message "eth0: Too much work in interrupt".
+
+hw_checksums=N1,N2,N3,...
+
+ Recent 3com NICs are able to generate IPv4, TCP and UDP checksums
+ in hardware. Linux has used the Rx checksumming for a long time.
+ The "zero copy" patch which is planned for the 2.4 kernel series
+ allows you to make use of the NIC's DMA scatter/gather and transmit
+ checksumming as well.
+
+ The driver is set up so that, when the zerocopy patch is applied,
+ all Tornado and Cyclone devices will use S/G and Tx checksums.
+
+ This module parameter has been provided so you can override this
+ decision. If you think that Tx checksums are causing a problem, you
+ may disable the feature with ``hw_checksums=0``.
+
+ If you think your NIC should be performing Tx checksumming and the
+ driver isn't enabling it, you can force the use of hardware Tx
+ checksumming with ``hw_checksums=1``.
+
+ The driver drops a message in the logfiles to indicate whether or
+ not it is using hardware scatter/gather and hardware Tx checksums.
+
+ Scatter/gather and hardware checksums provide considerable
+ performance improvement for the sendfile() system call, but a small
+ decrease in throughput for send(). There is no effect upon receive
+ efficiency.
+
+compaq_ioaddr=N,
+compaq_irq=N,
+compaq_device_id=N
+
+ "Variables to work-around the Compaq PCI BIOS32 problem"....
+
+watchdog=N
+
+ Sets the time duration (in milliseconds) after which the kernel
+ decides that the transmitter has become stuck and needs to be reset.
+ This is mainly for debugging purposes, although it may be advantageous
+ to increase this value on LANs which have very high collision rates.
+ The default value is 5000 (5.0 seconds).
+
+enable_wol=N1,N2,N3,...
+
+ Enable Wake-on-LAN support for the relevant interface. Donald
+ Becker's ``ether-wake`` application may be used to wake suspended
+ machines.
+
+ Also enables the NIC's power management support.
+
+global_enable_wol=N
+
+ Sets enable_wol mode for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. Entries in
+ the ``enable_wol`` array above will override any setting of this.
+
+Media selection
+---------------
+
+A number of the older NICs such as the 3c590 and 3c900 series have
+10base2 and AUI interfaces.
+
+Prior to January, 2001 this driver would autoeselect the 10base2 or AUI
+port if it didn't detect activity on the 10baseT port. It would then
+get stuck on the 10base2 port and a driver reload was necessary to
+switch back to 10baseT. This behaviour could not be prevented with a
+module option override.
+
+Later (current) versions of the driver _do_ support locking of the
+media type. So if you load the driver module with
+
+ modprobe 3c59x options=0
+
+it will permanently select the 10baseT port. Automatic selection of
+other media types does not occur.
+
+
+Transmit error, Tx status register 82
+-------------------------------------
+
+This is a common error which is almost always caused by another host on
+the same network being in full-duplex mode, while this host is in
+half-duplex mode. You need to find that other host and make it run in
+half-duplex mode or fix this host to run in full-duplex mode.
+
+As a last resort, you can force the 3c59x driver into full-duplex mode
+with
+
+ options 3c59x full_duplex=1
+
+but this has to be viewed as a workaround for broken network gear and
+should only really be used for equipment which cannot autonegotiate.
+
+
+Additional resources
+--------------------
+
+Details of the device driver implementation are at the top of the source file.
+
+Additional documentation is available at Don Becker's Linux Drivers site:
+
+ http://www.scyld.com/vortex.html
+
+Donald Becker's driver development site:
+
+ http://www.scyld.com/network.html
+
+Donald's vortex-diag program is useful for inspecting the NIC's state:
+
+ http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html
+
+Donald's mii-diag program may be used for inspecting and manipulating
+the NIC's Media Independent Interface subsystem:
+
+ http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html#mii-diag
+
+Donald's wake-on-LAN page:
+
+ http://www.scyld.com/wakeonlan.html
+
+3Com's DOS-based application for setting up the NICs EEPROMs:
+
+ ftp://ftp.3com.com/pub/nic/3c90x/3c90xx2.exe
+
+
+Autonegotiation notes
+---------------------
+
+ The driver uses a one-minute heartbeat for adapting to changes in
+ the external LAN environment if link is up and 5 seconds if link is down.
+ This means that when, for example, a machine is unplugged from a hubbed
+ 10baseT LAN plugged into a switched 100baseT LAN, the throughput
+ will be quite dreadful for up to sixty seconds. Be patient.
+
+ Cisco interoperability note from Walter Wong <wcw+@CMU.EDU>:
+
+ On a side note, adding HAS_NWAY seems to share a problem with the
+ Cisco 6509 switch. Specifically, you need to change the spanning
+ tree parameter for the port the machine is plugged into to 'portfast'
+ mode. Otherwise, the negotiation fails. This has been an issue
+ we've noticed for a while but haven't had the time to track down.
+
+ Cisco switches (Jeff Busch <jbusch@deja.com>)
+
+ My "standard config" for ports to which PC's/servers connect directly::
+
+ interface FastEthernet0/N
+ description machinename
+ load-interval 30
+ spanning-tree portfast
+
+ If autonegotiation is a problem, you may need to specify "speed
+ 100" and "duplex full" as well (or "speed 10" and "duplex half").
+
+ WARNING: DO NOT hook up hubs/switches/bridges to these
+ specially-configured ports! The switch will become very confused.
+
+
+Reporting and diagnosing problems
+---------------------------------
+
+Maintainers find that accurate and complete problem reports are
+invaluable in resolving driver problems. We are frequently not able to
+reproduce problems and must rely on your patience and efforts to get to
+the bottom of the problem.
+
+If you believe you have a driver problem here are some of the
+steps you should take:
+
+- Is it really a driver problem?
+
+ Eliminate some variables: try different cards, different
+ computers, different cables, different ports on the switch/hub,
+ different versions of the kernel or of the driver, etc.
+
+- OK, it's a driver problem.
+
+ You need to generate a report. Typically this is an email to the
+ maintainer and/or netdev@vger.kernel.org. The maintainer's
+ email address will be in the driver source or in the MAINTAINERS file.
+
+- The contents of your report will vary a lot depending upon the
+ problem. If it's a kernel crash then you should refer to
+ 'Documentation/admin-guide/reporting-issues.rst'.
+
+ But for most problems it is useful to provide the following:
+
+ - Kernel version, driver version
+
+ - A copy of the banner message which the driver generates when
+ it is initialised. For example:
+
+ eth0: 3Com PCI 3c905C Tornado at 0xa400, 00:50:da:6a:88:f0, IRQ 19
+ 8K byte-wide RAM 5:3 Rx:Tx split, autoselect/Autonegotiate interface.
+ MII transceiver found at address 24, status 782d.
+ Enabling bus-master transmits and whole-frame receives.
+
+ NOTE: You must provide the ``debug=2`` modprobe option to generate
+ a full detection message. Please do this::
+
+ modprobe 3c59x debug=2
+
+ - If it is a PCI device, the relevant output from 'lspci -vx', eg::
+
+ 00:09.0 Ethernet controller: 3Com Corporation 3c905C-TX [Fast Etherlink] (rev 74)
+ Subsystem: 3Com Corporation: Unknown device 9200
+ Flags: bus master, medium devsel, latency 32, IRQ 19
+ I/O ports at a400 [size=128]
+ Memory at db000000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=128]
+ Expansion ROM at <unassigned> [disabled] [size=128K]
+ Capabilities: [dc] Power Management version 2
+ 00: b7 10 00 92 07 00 10 02 74 00 00 02 08 20 00 00
+ 10: 01 a4 00 00 00 00 00 db 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
+ 20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 b7 10 00 10
+ 30: 00 00 00 00 dc 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 01 0a 0a
+
+ - A description of the environment: 10baseT? 100baseT?
+ full/half duplex? switched or hubbed?
+
+ - Any additional module parameters which you may be providing to the driver.
+
+ - Any kernel logs which are produced. The more the merrier.
+ If this is a large file and you are sending your report to a
+ mailing list, mention that you have the logfile, but don't send
+ it. If you're reporting direct to the maintainer then just send
+ it.
+
+ To ensure that all kernel logs are available, add the
+ following line to /etc/syslog.conf::
+
+ kern.* /var/log/messages
+
+ Then restart syslogd with::
+
+ /etc/rc.d/init.d/syslog restart
+
+ (The above may vary, depending upon which Linux distribution you use).
+
+ - If your problem is reproducible then that's great. Try the
+ following:
+
+ 1) Increase the debug level. Usually this is done via:
+
+ a) modprobe driver debug=7
+ b) In /etc/modprobe.d/driver.conf:
+ options driver debug=7
+
+ 2) Recreate the problem with the higher debug level,
+ send all logs to the maintainer.
+
+ 3) Download you card's diagnostic tool from Donald
+ Becker's website <http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html>.
+ Download mii-diag.c as well. Build these.
+
+ a) Run 'vortex-diag -aaee' and 'mii-diag -v' when the card is
+ working correctly. Save the output.
+
+ b) Run the above commands when the card is malfunctioning. Send
+ both sets of output.
+
+Finally, please be patient and be prepared to do some work. You may
+end up working on this problem for a week or more as the maintainer
+asks more questions, asks for more tests, asks for patches to be
+applied, etc. At the end of it all, the problem may even remain
+unresolved.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/altera/altera_tse.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/altera/altera_tse.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7a7040072
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/altera/altera_tse.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,286 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+=======================================
+Altera Triple-Speed Ethernet MAC driver
+=======================================
+
+Copyright |copy| 2008-2014 Altera Corporation
+
+This is the driver for the Altera Triple-Speed Ethernet (TSE) controllers
+using the SGDMA and MSGDMA soft DMA IP components. The driver uses the
+platform bus to obtain component resources. The designs used to test this
+driver were built for a Cyclone(R) V SOC FPGA board, a Cyclone(R) V FPGA board,
+and tested with ARM and NIOS processor hosts separately. The anticipated use
+cases are simple communications between an embedded system and an external peer
+for status and simple configuration of the embedded system.
+
+For more information visit www.altera.com and www.rocketboards.org. Support
+forums for the driver may be found on www.rocketboards.org, and a design used
+to test this driver may be found there as well. Support is also available from
+the maintainer of this driver, found in MAINTAINERS.
+
+The Triple-Speed Ethernet, SGDMA, and MSGDMA components are all soft IP
+components that can be assembled and built into an FPGA using the Altera
+Quartus toolchain. Quartus 13.1 and 14.0 were used to build the design that
+this driver was tested against. The sopc2dts tool is used to create the
+device tree for the driver, and may be found at rocketboards.org.
+
+The driver probe function examines the device tree and determines if the
+Triple-Speed Ethernet instance is using an SGDMA or MSGDMA component. The
+probe function then installs the appropriate set of DMA routines to
+initialize, setup transmits, receives, and interrupt handling primitives for
+the respective configurations.
+
+The SGDMA component is to be deprecated in the near future (over the next 1-2
+years as of this writing in early 2014) in favor of the MSGDMA component.
+SGDMA support is included for existing designs and reference in case a
+developer wishes to support their own soft DMA logic and driver support. Any
+new designs should not use the SGDMA.
+
+The SGDMA supports only a single transmit or receive operation at a time, and
+therefore will not perform as well compared to the MSGDMA soft IP. Please
+visit www.altera.com for known, documented SGDMA errata.
+
+Scatter-gather DMA is not supported by the SGDMA or MSGDMA at this time.
+Scatter-gather DMA will be added to a future maintenance update to this
+driver.
+
+Jumbo frames are not supported at this time.
+
+The driver limits PHY operations to 10/100Mbps, and has not yet been fully
+tested for 1Gbps. This support will be added in a future maintenance update.
+
+1. Kernel Configuration
+=======================
+
+The kernel configuration option is ALTERA_TSE:
+
+ Device Drivers ---> Network device support ---> Ethernet driver support --->
+ Altera Triple-Speed Ethernet MAC support (ALTERA_TSE)
+
+2. Driver parameters list
+=========================
+
+ - debug: message level (0: no output, 16: all);
+ - dma_rx_num: Number of descriptors in the RX list (default is 64);
+ - dma_tx_num: Number of descriptors in the TX list (default is 64).
+
+3. Command line options
+=======================
+
+Driver parameters can be also passed in command line by using::
+
+ altera_tse=dma_rx_num:128,dma_tx_num:512
+
+4. Driver information and notes
+===============================
+
+4.1. Transmit process
+---------------------
+When the driver's transmit routine is called by the kernel, it sets up a
+transmit descriptor by calling the underlying DMA transmit routine (SGDMA or
+MSGDMA), and initiates a transmit operation. Once the transmit is complete, an
+interrupt is driven by the transmit DMA logic. The driver handles the transmit
+completion in the context of the interrupt handling chain by recycling
+resource required to send and track the requested transmit operation.
+
+4.2. Receive process
+--------------------
+The driver will post receive buffers to the receive DMA logic during driver
+initialization. Receive buffers may or may not be queued depending upon the
+underlying DMA logic (MSGDMA is able queue receive buffers, SGDMA is not able
+to queue receive buffers to the SGDMA receive logic). When a packet is
+received, the DMA logic generates an interrupt. The driver handles a receive
+interrupt by obtaining the DMA receive logic status, reaping receive
+completions until no more receive completions are available.
+
+4.3. Interrupt Mitigation
+-------------------------
+The driver is able to mitigate the number of its DMA interrupts
+using NAPI for receive operations. Interrupt mitigation is not yet supported
+for transmit operations, but will be added in a future maintenance release.
+
+4.4) Ethtool support
+--------------------
+Ethtool is supported. Driver statistics and internal errors can be taken using:
+ethtool -S ethX command. It is possible to dump registers etc.
+
+4.5) PHY Support
+----------------
+The driver is compatible with PAL to work with PHY and GPHY devices.
+
+4.7) List of source files:
+--------------------------
+ - Kconfig
+ - Makefile
+ - altera_tse_main.c: main network device driver
+ - altera_tse_ethtool.c: ethtool support
+ - altera_tse.h: private driver structure and common definitions
+ - altera_msgdma.h: MSGDMA implementation function definitions
+ - altera_sgdma.h: SGDMA implementation function definitions
+ - altera_msgdma.c: MSGDMA implementation
+ - altera_sgdma.c: SGDMA implementation
+ - altera_sgdmahw.h: SGDMA register and descriptor definitions
+ - altera_msgdmahw.h: MSGDMA register and descriptor definitions
+ - altera_utils.c: Driver utility functions
+ - altera_utils.h: Driver utility function definitions
+
+5. Debug Information
+====================
+
+The driver exports debug information such as internal statistics,
+debug information, MAC and DMA registers etc.
+
+A user may use the ethtool support to get statistics:
+e.g. using: ethtool -S ethX (that shows the statistics counters)
+or sees the MAC registers: e.g. using: ethtool -d ethX
+
+The developer can also use the "debug" module parameter to get
+further debug information.
+
+6. Statistics Support
+=====================
+
+The controller and driver support a mix of IEEE standard defined statistics,
+RFC defined statistics, and driver or Altera defined statistics. The four
+specifications containing the standard definitions for these statistics are
+as follows:
+
+ - IEEE 802.3-2012 - IEEE Standard for Ethernet.
+ - RFC 2863 found at http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2863.txt.
+ - RFC 2819 found at http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2819.txt.
+ - Altera Triple Speed Ethernet User Guide, found at http://www.altera.com
+
+The statistics supported by the TSE and the device driver are as follows:
+
+"tx_packets" is equivalent to aFramesTransmittedOK defined in IEEE 802.3-2012,
+Section 5.2.2.1.2. This statistics is the count of frames that are successfully
+transmitted.
+
+"rx_packets" is equivalent to aFramesReceivedOK defined in IEEE 802.3-2012,
+Section 5.2.2.1.5. This statistic is the count of frames that are successfully
+received. This count does not include any error packets such as CRC errors,
+length errors, or alignment errors.
+
+"rx_crc_errors" is equivalent to aFrameCheckSequenceErrors defined in IEEE
+802.3-2012, Section 5.2.2.1.6. This statistic is the count of frames that are
+an integral number of bytes in length and do not pass the CRC test as the frame
+is received.
+
+"rx_align_errors" is equivalent to aAlignmentErrors defined in IEEE 802.3-2012,
+Section 5.2.2.1.7. This statistic is the count of frames that are not an
+integral number of bytes in length and do not pass the CRC test as the frame is
+received.
+
+"tx_bytes" is equivalent to aOctetsTransmittedOK defined in IEEE 802.3-2012,
+Section 5.2.2.1.8. This statistic is the count of data and pad bytes
+successfully transmitted from the interface.
+
+"rx_bytes" is equivalent to aOctetsReceivedOK defined in IEEE 802.3-2012,
+Section 5.2.2.1.14. This statistic is the count of data and pad bytes
+successfully received by the controller.
+
+"tx_pause" is equivalent to aPAUSEMACCtrlFramesTransmitted defined in IEEE
+802.3-2012, Section 30.3.4.2. This statistic is a count of PAUSE frames
+transmitted from the network controller.
+
+"rx_pause" is equivalent to aPAUSEMACCtrlFramesReceived defined in IEEE
+802.3-2012, Section 30.3.4.3. This statistic is a count of PAUSE frames
+received by the network controller.
+
+"rx_errors" is equivalent to ifInErrors defined in RFC 2863. This statistic is
+a count of the number of packets received containing errors that prevented the
+packet from being delivered to a higher level protocol.
+
+"tx_errors" is equivalent to ifOutErrors defined in RFC 2863. This statistic
+is a count of the number of packets that could not be transmitted due to errors.
+
+"rx_unicast" is equivalent to ifInUcastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic is a count of the number of packets received that were not addressed
+to the broadcast address or a multicast group.
+
+"rx_multicast" is equivalent to ifInMulticastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic is a count of the number of packets received that were addressed to
+a multicast address group.
+
+"rx_broadcast" is equivalent to ifInBroadcastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic is a count of the number of packets received that were addressed to
+the broadcast address.
+
+"tx_discards" is equivalent to ifOutDiscards defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic is the number of outbound packets not transmitted even though an
+error was not detected. An example of a reason this might occur is to free up
+internal buffer space.
+
+"tx_unicast" is equivalent to ifOutUcastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic counts the number of packets transmitted that were not addressed to
+a multicast group or broadcast address.
+
+"tx_multicast" is equivalent to ifOutMulticastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic counts the number of packets transmitted that were addressed to a
+multicast group.
+
+"tx_broadcast" is equivalent to ifOutBroadcastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic counts the number of packets transmitted that were addressed to a
+broadcast address.
+
+"ether_drops" is equivalent to etherStatsDropEvents defined in RFC 2819.
+This statistic counts the number of packets dropped due to lack of internal
+controller resources.
+
+"rx_total_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsOctets defined in RFC 2819.
+This statistic counts the total number of bytes received by the controller,
+including error and discarded packets.
+
+"rx_total_packets" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts defined in RFC 2819.
+This statistic counts the total number of packets received by the controller,
+including error, discarded, unicast, multicast, and broadcast packets.
+
+"rx_undersize" is equivalent to etherStatsUndersizePkts defined in RFC 2819.
+This statistic counts the number of correctly formed packets received less
+than 64 bytes long.
+
+"rx_oversize" is equivalent to etherStatsOversizePkts defined in RFC 2819.
+This statistic counts the number of correctly formed packets greater than 1518
+bytes long.
+
+"rx_64_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts64Octets defined in RFC 2819.
+This statistic counts the total number of packets received that were 64 octets
+in length.
+
+"rx_65_127_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts65to127Octets defined in RFC
+2819. This statistic counts the total number of packets received that were
+between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive.
+
+"rx_128_255_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts128to255Octets defined in
+RFC 2819. This statistic is the total number of packets received that were
+between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive.
+
+"rx_256_511_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts256to511Octets defined in
+RFC 2819. This statistic is the total number of packets received that were
+between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive.
+
+"rx_512_1023_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets defined in
+RFC 2819. This statistic is the total number of packets received that were
+between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive.
+
+"rx_1024_1518_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets define
+in RFC 2819. This statistic is the total number of packets received that were
+between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive.
+
+"rx_gte_1519_bytes" is a statistic defined specific to the behavior of the
+Altera TSE. This statistics counts the number of received good and errored
+frames between the length of 1519 and the maximum frame length configured
+in the frm_length register. See the Altera TSE User Guide for More details.
+
+"rx_jabbers" is equivalent to etherStatsJabbers defined in RFC 2819. This
+statistic is the total number of packets received that were longer than 1518
+octets, and had either a bad CRC with an integral number of octets (CRC Error)
+or a bad CRC with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
+
+"rx_runts" is equivalent to etherStatsFragments defined in RFC 2819. This
+statistic is the total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets
+in length and had either a bad CRC with an integral number of octets (CRC
+error) or a bad CRC with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/amazon/ena.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/amazon/ena.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8bcb173e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/amazon/ena.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,317 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============================================================
+Linux kernel driver for Elastic Network Adapter (ENA) family
+============================================================
+
+Overview
+========
+
+ENA is a networking interface designed to make good use of modern CPU
+features and system architectures.
+
+The ENA device exposes a lightweight management interface with a
+minimal set of memory mapped registers and extendible command set
+through an Admin Queue.
+
+The driver supports a range of ENA devices, is link-speed independent
+(i.e., the same driver is used for 10GbE, 25GbE, 40GbE, etc), and has
+a negotiated and extendible feature set.
+
+Some ENA devices support SR-IOV. This driver is used for both the
+SR-IOV Physical Function (PF) and Virtual Function (VF) devices.
+
+ENA devices enable high speed and low overhead network traffic
+processing by providing multiple Tx/Rx queue pairs (the maximum number
+is advertised by the device via the Admin Queue), a dedicated MSI-X
+interrupt vector per Tx/Rx queue pair, adaptive interrupt moderation,
+and CPU cacheline optimized data placement.
+
+The ENA driver supports industry standard TCP/IP offload features such as
+checksum offload. Receive-side scaling (RSS) is supported for multi-core
+scaling.
+
+The ENA driver and its corresponding devices implement health
+monitoring mechanisms such as watchdog, enabling the device and driver
+to recover in a manner transparent to the application, as well as
+debug logs.
+
+Some of the ENA devices support a working mode called Low-latency
+Queue (LLQ), which saves several more microseconds.
+ENA Source Code Directory Structure
+===================================
+
+================= ======================================================
+ena_com.[ch] Management communication layer. This layer is
+ responsible for the handling all the management
+ (admin) communication between the device and the
+ driver.
+ena_eth_com.[ch] Tx/Rx data path.
+ena_admin_defs.h Definition of ENA management interface.
+ena_eth_io_defs.h Definition of ENA data path interface.
+ena_common_defs.h Common definitions for ena_com layer.
+ena_regs_defs.h Definition of ENA PCI memory-mapped (MMIO) registers.
+ena_netdev.[ch] Main Linux kernel driver.
+ena_ethtool.c ethtool callbacks.
+ena_pci_id_tbl.h Supported device IDs.
+================= ======================================================
+
+Management Interface:
+=====================
+
+ENA management interface is exposed by means of:
+
+- PCIe Configuration Space
+- Device Registers
+- Admin Queue (AQ) and Admin Completion Queue (ACQ)
+- Asynchronous Event Notification Queue (AENQ)
+
+ENA device MMIO Registers are accessed only during driver
+initialization and are not used during further normal device
+operation.
+
+AQ is used for submitting management commands, and the
+results/responses are reported asynchronously through ACQ.
+
+ENA introduces a small set of management commands with room for
+vendor-specific extensions. Most of the management operations are
+framed in a generic Get/Set feature command.
+
+The following admin queue commands are supported:
+
+- Create I/O submission queue
+- Create I/O completion queue
+- Destroy I/O submission queue
+- Destroy I/O completion queue
+- Get feature
+- Set feature
+- Configure AENQ
+- Get statistics
+
+Refer to ena_admin_defs.h for the list of supported Get/Set Feature
+properties.
+
+The Asynchronous Event Notification Queue (AENQ) is a uni-directional
+queue used by the ENA device to send to the driver events that cannot
+be reported using ACQ. AENQ events are subdivided into groups. Each
+group may have multiple syndromes, as shown below
+
+The events are:
+
+==================== ===============
+Group Syndrome
+==================== ===============
+Link state change **X**
+Fatal error **X**
+Notification Suspend traffic
+Notification Resume traffic
+Keep-Alive **X**
+==================== ===============
+
+ACQ and AENQ share the same MSI-X vector.
+
+Keep-Alive is a special mechanism that allows monitoring the device's health.
+A Keep-Alive event is delivered by the device every second.
+The driver maintains a watchdog (WD) handler which logs the current state and
+statistics. If the keep-alive events aren't delivered as expected the WD resets
+the device and the driver.
+
+Data Path Interface
+===================
+
+I/O operations are based on Tx and Rx Submission Queues (Tx SQ and Rx
+SQ correspondingly). Each SQ has a completion queue (CQ) associated
+with it.
+
+The SQs and CQs are implemented as descriptor rings in contiguous
+physical memory.
+
+The ENA driver supports two Queue Operation modes for Tx SQs:
+
+- **Regular mode:**
+ In this mode the Tx SQs reside in the host's memory. The ENA
+ device fetches the ENA Tx descriptors and packet data from host
+ memory.
+
+- **Low Latency Queue (LLQ) mode or "push-mode":**
+ In this mode the driver pushes the transmit descriptors and the
+ first 96 bytes of the packet directly to the ENA device memory
+ space. The rest of the packet payload is fetched by the
+ device. For this operation mode, the driver uses a dedicated PCI
+ device memory BAR, which is mapped with write-combine capability.
+
+ **Note that** not all ENA devices support LLQ, and this feature is negotiated
+ with the device upon initialization. If the ENA device does not
+ support LLQ mode, the driver falls back to the regular mode.
+
+The Rx SQs support only the regular mode.
+
+The driver supports multi-queue for both Tx and Rx. This has various
+benefits:
+
+- Reduced CPU/thread/process contention on a given Ethernet interface.
+- Cache miss rate on completion is reduced, particularly for data
+ cache lines that hold the sk_buff structures.
+- Increased process-level parallelism when handling received packets.
+- Increased data cache hit rate, by steering kernel processing of
+ packets to the CPU, where the application thread consuming the
+ packet is running.
+- In hardware interrupt re-direction.
+
+Interrupt Modes
+===============
+
+The driver assigns a single MSI-X vector per queue pair (for both Tx
+and Rx directions). The driver assigns an additional dedicated MSI-X vector
+for management (for ACQ and AENQ).
+
+Management interrupt registration is performed when the Linux kernel
+probes the adapter, and it is de-registered when the adapter is
+removed. I/O queue interrupt registration is performed when the Linux
+interface of the adapter is opened, and it is de-registered when the
+interface is closed.
+
+The management interrupt is named::
+
+ ena-mgmnt@pci:<PCI domain:bus:slot.function>
+
+and for each queue pair, an interrupt is named::
+
+ <interface name>-Tx-Rx-<queue index>
+
+The ENA device operates in auto-mask and auto-clear interrupt
+modes. That is, once MSI-X is delivered to the host, its Cause bit is
+automatically cleared and the interrupt is masked. The interrupt is
+unmasked by the driver after NAPI processing is complete.
+
+Interrupt Moderation
+====================
+
+ENA driver and device can operate in conventional or adaptive interrupt
+moderation mode.
+
+**In conventional mode** the driver instructs device to postpone interrupt
+posting according to static interrupt delay value. The interrupt delay
+value can be configured through `ethtool(8)`. The following `ethtool`
+parameters are supported by the driver: ``tx-usecs``, ``rx-usecs``
+
+**In adaptive interrupt** moderation mode the interrupt delay value is
+updated by the driver dynamically and adjusted every NAPI cycle
+according to the traffic nature.
+
+Adaptive coalescing can be switched on/off through `ethtool(8)`'s
+:code:`adaptive_rx on|off` parameter.
+
+More information about Adaptive Interrupt Moderation (DIM) can be found in
+Documentation/networking/net_dim.rst
+
+RX copybreak
+============
+The rx_copybreak is initialized by default to ENA_DEFAULT_RX_COPYBREAK
+and can be configured by the ETHTOOL_STUNABLE command of the
+SIOCETHTOOL ioctl.
+
+Statistics
+==========
+
+The user can obtain ENA device and driver statistics using `ethtool`.
+The driver can collect regular or extended statistics (including
+per-queue stats) from the device.
+
+In addition the driver logs the stats to syslog upon device reset.
+
+MTU
+===
+
+The driver supports an arbitrarily large MTU with a maximum that is
+negotiated with the device. The driver configures MTU using the
+SetFeature command (ENA_ADMIN_MTU property). The user can change MTU
+via `ip(8)` and similar legacy tools.
+
+Stateless Offloads
+==================
+
+The ENA driver supports:
+
+- IPv4 header checksum offload
+- TCP/UDP over IPv4/IPv6 checksum offloads
+
+RSS
+===
+
+- The ENA device supports RSS that allows flexible Rx traffic
+ steering.
+- Toeplitz and CRC32 hash functions are supported.
+- Different combinations of L2/L3/L4 fields can be configured as
+ inputs for hash functions.
+- The driver configures RSS settings using the AQ SetFeature command
+ (ENA_ADMIN_RSS_HASH_FUNCTION, ENA_ADMIN_RSS_HASH_INPUT and
+ ENA_ADMIN_RSS_INDIRECTION_TABLE_CONFIG properties).
+- If the NETIF_F_RXHASH flag is set, the 32-bit result of the hash
+ function delivered in the Rx CQ descriptor is set in the received
+ SKB.
+- The user can provide a hash key, hash function, and configure the
+ indirection table through `ethtool(8)`.
+
+DATA PATH
+=========
+
+Tx
+--
+
+:code:`ena_start_xmit()` is called by the stack. This function does the following:
+
+- Maps data buffers (``skb->data`` and frags).
+- Populates ``ena_buf`` for the push buffer (if the driver and device are
+ in push mode).
+- Prepares ENA bufs for the remaining frags.
+- Allocates a new request ID from the empty ``req_id`` ring. The request
+ ID is the index of the packet in the Tx info. This is used for
+ out-of-order Tx completions.
+- Adds the packet to the proper place in the Tx ring.
+- Calls :code:`ena_com_prepare_tx()`, an ENA communication layer that converts
+ the ``ena_bufs`` to ENA descriptors (and adds meta ENA descriptors as
+ needed).
+
+ * This function also copies the ENA descriptors and the push buffer
+ to the Device memory space (if in push mode).
+
+- Writes a doorbell to the ENA device.
+- When the ENA device finishes sending the packet, a completion
+ interrupt is raised.
+- The interrupt handler schedules NAPI.
+- The :code:`ena_clean_tx_irq()` function is called. This function handles the
+ completion descriptors generated by the ENA, with a single
+ completion descriptor per completed packet.
+
+ * ``req_id`` is retrieved from the completion descriptor. The ``tx_info`` of
+ the packet is retrieved via the ``req_id``. The data buffers are
+ unmapped and ``req_id`` is returned to the empty ``req_id`` ring.
+ * The function stops when the completion descriptors are completed or
+ the budget is reached.
+
+Rx
+--
+
+- When a packet is received from the ENA device.
+- The interrupt handler schedules NAPI.
+- The :code:`ena_clean_rx_irq()` function is called. This function calls
+ :code:`ena_com_rx_pkt()`, an ENA communication layer function, which returns the
+ number of descriptors used for a new packet, and zero if
+ no new packet is found.
+- :code:`ena_rx_skb()` checks packet length:
+
+ * If the packet is small (len < rx_copybreak), the driver allocates
+ a SKB for the new packet, and copies the packet payload into the
+ SKB data buffer.
+
+ - In this way the original data buffer is not passed to the stack
+ and is reused for future Rx packets.
+
+ * Otherwise the function unmaps the Rx buffer, sets the first
+ descriptor as `skb`'s linear part and the other descriptors as the
+ `skb`'s frags.
+
+- The new SKB is updated with the necessary information (protocol,
+ checksum hw verify result, etc), and then passed to the network
+ stack, using the NAPI interface function :code:`napi_gro_receive()`.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/aquantia/atlantic.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/aquantia/atlantic.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..595ddef1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/aquantia/atlantic.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,556 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+===============================
+Marvell(Aquantia) AQtion Driver
+===============================
+
+For the aQuantia Multi-Gigabit PCI Express Family of Ethernet Adapters
+
+.. Contents
+
+ - Identifying Your Adapter
+ - Configuration
+ - Supported ethtool options
+ - Command Line Parameters
+ - Config file parameters
+ - Support
+ - License
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+The driver in this release is compatible with AQC-100, AQC-107, AQC-108
+based ethernet adapters.
+
+
+SFP+ Devices (for AQC-100 based adapters)
+-----------------------------------------
+
+This release tested with passive Direct Attach Cables (DAC) and SFP+/LC
+Optical Transceiver.
+
+Configuration
+=============
+
+Viewing Link Messages
+---------------------
+ Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is
+ restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on
+ your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following::
+
+ dmesg -n 8
+
+ .. note::
+
+ This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+ The driver supports Jumbo Frames for all adapters. Jumbo Frames support is
+ enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than the default of 1500.
+ The maximum value for the MTU is 16000. Use the `ip` command to
+ increase the MTU size. For example::
+
+ ip link set mtu 16000 dev enp1s0
+
+ethtool
+-------
+ The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+ diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest
+ ethtool version is required for this functionality.
+
+NAPI
+----
+ NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the atlantic driver.
+
+Supported ethtool options
+=========================
+
+Viewing adapter settings
+------------------------
+
+ ::
+
+ ethtool <ethX>
+
+ Output example::
+
+ Settings for enp1s0:
+ Supported ports: [ TP ]
+ Supported link modes: 100baseT/Full
+ 1000baseT/Full
+ 10000baseT/Full
+ 2500baseT/Full
+ 5000baseT/Full
+ Supported pause frame use: Symmetric
+ Supports auto-negotiation: Yes
+ Supported FEC modes: Not reported
+ Advertised link modes: 100baseT/Full
+ 1000baseT/Full
+ 10000baseT/Full
+ 2500baseT/Full
+ 5000baseT/Full
+ Advertised pause frame use: Symmetric
+ Advertised auto-negotiation: Yes
+ Advertised FEC modes: Not reported
+ Speed: 10000Mb/s
+ Duplex: Full
+ Port: Twisted Pair
+ PHYAD: 0
+ Transceiver: internal
+ Auto-negotiation: on
+ MDI-X: Unknown
+ Supports Wake-on: g
+ Wake-on: d
+ Link detected: yes
+
+
+ .. note::
+
+ AQrate speeds (2.5/5 Gb/s) will be displayed only with linux kernels > 4.10.
+ But you can still use these speeds::
+
+ ethtool -s eth0 autoneg off speed 2500
+
+Viewing adapter information
+---------------------------
+
+ ::
+
+ ethtool -i <ethX>
+
+ Output example::
+
+ driver: atlantic
+ version: 5.2.0-050200rc5-generic-kern
+ firmware-version: 3.1.78
+ expansion-rom-version:
+ bus-info: 0000:01:00.0
+ supports-statistics: yes
+ supports-test: no
+ supports-eeprom-access: no
+ supports-register-dump: yes
+ supports-priv-flags: no
+
+
+Viewing Ethernet adapter statistics
+-----------------------------------
+
+ ::
+
+ ethtool -S <ethX>
+
+ Output example::
+
+ NIC statistics:
+ InPackets: 13238607
+ InUCast: 13293852
+ InMCast: 52
+ InBCast: 3
+ InErrors: 0
+ OutPackets: 23703019
+ OutUCast: 23704941
+ OutMCast: 67
+ OutBCast: 11
+ InUCastOctects: 213182760
+ OutUCastOctects: 22698443
+ InMCastOctects: 6600
+ OutMCastOctects: 8776
+ InBCastOctects: 192
+ OutBCastOctects: 704
+ InOctects: 2131839552
+ OutOctects: 226938073
+ InPacketsDma: 95532300
+ OutPacketsDma: 59503397
+ InOctetsDma: 1137102462
+ OutOctetsDma: 2394339518
+ InDroppedDma: 0
+ Queue[0] InPackets: 23567131
+ Queue[0] OutPackets: 20070028
+ Queue[0] InJumboPackets: 0
+ Queue[0] InLroPackets: 0
+ Queue[0] InErrors: 0
+ Queue[1] InPackets: 45428967
+ Queue[1] OutPackets: 11306178
+ Queue[1] InJumboPackets: 0
+ Queue[1] InLroPackets: 0
+ Queue[1] InErrors: 0
+ Queue[2] InPackets: 3187011
+ Queue[2] OutPackets: 13080381
+ Queue[2] InJumboPackets: 0
+ Queue[2] InLroPackets: 0
+ Queue[2] InErrors: 0
+ Queue[3] InPackets: 23349136
+ Queue[3] OutPackets: 15046810
+ Queue[3] InJumboPackets: 0
+ Queue[3] InLroPackets: 0
+ Queue[3] InErrors: 0
+
+Interrupt coalescing support
+----------------------------
+
+ ITR mode, TX/RX coalescing timings could be viewed with::
+
+ ethtool -c <ethX>
+
+ and changed with::
+
+ ethtool -C <ethX> tx-usecs <usecs> rx-usecs <usecs>
+
+ To disable coalescing::
+
+ ethtool -C <ethX> tx-usecs 0 rx-usecs 0 tx-max-frames 1 tx-max-frames 1
+
+Wake on LAN support
+-------------------
+
+ WOL support by magic packet::
+
+ ethtool -s <ethX> wol g
+
+ To disable WOL::
+
+ ethtool -s <ethX> wol d
+
+Set and check the driver message level
+--------------------------------------
+
+ Set message level
+
+ ::
+
+ ethtool -s <ethX> msglvl <level>
+
+ Level values:
+
+ ====== =============================
+ 0x0001 general driver status.
+ 0x0002 hardware probing.
+ 0x0004 link state.
+ 0x0008 periodic status check.
+ 0x0010 interface being brought down.
+ 0x0020 interface being brought up.
+ 0x0040 receive error.
+ 0x0080 transmit error.
+ 0x0200 interrupt handling.
+ 0x0400 transmit completion.
+ 0x0800 receive completion.
+ 0x1000 packet contents.
+ 0x2000 hardware status.
+ 0x4000 Wake-on-LAN status.
+ ====== =============================
+
+ By default, the level of debugging messages is set 0x0001(general driver status).
+
+ Check message level
+
+ ::
+
+ ethtool <ethX> | grep "Current message level"
+
+ If you want to disable the output of messages::
+
+ ethtool -s <ethX> msglvl 0
+
+RX flow rules (ntuple filters)
+------------------------------
+
+ There are separate rules supported, that applies in that order:
+
+ 1. 16 VLAN ID rules
+ 2. 16 L2 EtherType rules
+ 3. 8 L3/L4 5-Tuple rules
+
+
+ The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for configuring ntuple filters,
+ via ``ethtool -N <device> <filter>``.
+
+ To enable or disable the RX flow rules::
+
+ ethtool -K ethX ntuple <on|off>
+
+ When disabling ntuple filters, all the user programed filters are
+ flushed from the driver cache and hardware. All needed filters must
+ be re-added when ntuple is re-enabled.
+
+ Because of the fixed order of the rules, the location of filters is also fixed:
+
+ - Locations 0 - 15 for VLAN ID filters
+ - Locations 16 - 31 for L2 EtherType filters
+ - Locations 32 - 39 for L3/L4 5-tuple filters (locations 32, 36 for IPv6)
+
+ The L3/L4 5-tuple (protocol, source and destination IP address, source and
+ destination TCP/UDP/SCTP port) is compared against 8 filters. For IPv4, up to
+ 8 source and destination addresses can be matched. For IPv6, up to 2 pairs of
+ addresses can be supported. Source and destination ports are only compared for
+ TCP/UDP/SCTP packets.
+
+ To add a filter that directs packet to queue 5, use
+ ``<-N|-U|--config-nfc|--config-ntuple>`` switch::
+
+ ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type udp4 src-ip 10.0.0.1 dst-ip 10.0.0.2 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 action 5 <loc 32>
+
+ - action is the queue number.
+ - loc is the rule number.
+
+ For ``flow-type ip4|udp4|tcp4|sctp4|ip6|udp6|tcp6|sctp6`` you must set the loc
+ number within 32 - 39.
+ For ``flow-type ip4|udp4|tcp4|sctp4|ip6|udp6|tcp6|sctp6`` you can set 8 rules
+ for traffic IPv4 or you can set 2 rules for traffic IPv6. Loc number traffic
+ IPv6 is 32 and 36.
+ At the moment you can not use IPv4 and IPv6 filters at the same time.
+
+ Example filter for IPv6 filter traffic::
+
+ sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type tcp6 src-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::1 dst-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::2 action 1 loc 32
+ sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ip6 src-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::2 dst-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::5 action -1 loc 36
+
+ Example filter for IPv4 filter traffic::
+
+ sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type udp4 src-ip 10.0.0.4 dst-ip 10.0.0.7 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 loc 32
+ sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type tcp4 src-ip 10.0.0.3 dst-ip 10.0.0.9 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 loc 33
+ sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ip4 src-ip 10.0.0.6 dst-ip 10.0.0.4 loc 34
+
+ If you set action -1, then all traffic corresponding to the filter will be discarded.
+
+ The maximum value action is 31.
+
+
+ The VLAN filter (VLAN id) is compared against 16 filters.
+ VLAN id must be accompanied by mask 0xF000. That is to distinguish VLAN filter
+ from L2 Ethertype filter with UserPriority since both User Priority and VLAN ID
+ are passed in the same 'vlan' parameter.
+
+ To add a filter that directs packets from VLAN 2001 to queue 5::
+
+ ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ip4 vlan 2001 m 0xF000 action 1 loc 0
+
+
+ L2 EtherType filters allows filter packet by EtherType field or both EtherType
+ and User Priority (PCP) field of 802.1Q.
+ UserPriority (vlan) parameter must be accompanied by mask 0x1FFF. That is to
+ distinguish VLAN filter from L2 Ethertype filter with UserPriority since both
+ User Priority and VLAN ID are passed in the same 'vlan' parameter.
+
+ To add a filter that directs IP4 packess of priority 3 to queue 3::
+
+ ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ether proto 0x800 vlan 0x600 m 0x1FFF action 3 loc 16
+
+ To see the list of filters currently present::
+
+ ethtool <-u|-n|--show-nfc|--show-ntuple> <ethX>
+
+ Rules may be deleted from the table itself. This is done using::
+
+ sudo ethtool <-N|-U|--config-nfc|--config-ntuple> <ethX> delete <loc>
+
+ - loc is the rule number to be deleted.
+
+ Rx filters is an interface to load the filter table that funnels all flow
+ into queue 0 unless an alternative queue is specified using "action". In that
+ case, any flow that matches the filter criteria will be directed to the
+ appropriate queue. RX filters is supported on all kernels 2.6.30 and later.
+
+RSS for UDP
+-----------
+
+ Currently, NIC does not support RSS for fragmented IP packets, which leads to
+ incorrect working of RSS for fragmented UDP traffic. To disable RSS for UDP the
+ RX Flow L3/L4 rule may be used.
+
+ Example::
+
+ ethtool -N eth0 flow-type udp4 action 0 loc 32
+
+UDP GSO hardware offload
+------------------------
+
+ UDP GSO allows to boost UDP tx rates by offloading UDP headers allocation
+ into hardware. A special userspace socket option is required for this,
+ could be validated with /kernel/tools/testing/selftests/net/::
+
+ udpgso_bench_tx -u -4 -D 10.0.1.1 -s 6300 -S 100
+
+ Will cause sending out of 100 byte sized UDP packets formed from single
+ 6300 bytes user buffer.
+
+ UDP GSO is configured by::
+
+ ethtool -K eth0 tx-udp-segmentation on
+
+Private flags (testing)
+-----------------------
+
+ Atlantic driver supports private flags for hardware custom features::
+
+ $ ethtool --show-priv-flags ethX
+
+ Private flags for ethX:
+ DMASystemLoopback : off
+ PKTSystemLoopback : off
+ DMANetworkLoopback : off
+ PHYInternalLoopback: off
+ PHYExternalLoopback: off
+
+ Example::
+
+ $ ethtool --set-priv-flags ethX DMASystemLoopback on
+
+ DMASystemLoopback: DMA Host loopback.
+ PKTSystemLoopback: Packet buffer host loopback.
+ DMANetworkLoopback: Network side loopback on DMA block.
+ PHYInternalLoopback: Internal loopback on Phy.
+ PHYExternalLoopback: External loopback on Phy (with loopback ethernet cable).
+
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+The following command line parameters are available on atlantic driver:
+
+aq_itr -Interrupt throttling mode
+---------------------------------
+Accepted values: 0, 1, 0xFFFF
+
+Default value: 0xFFFF
+
+====== ==============================================================
+0 Disable interrupt throttling.
+1 Enable interrupt throttling and use specified tx and rx rates.
+0xFFFF Auto throttling mode. Driver will choose the best RX and TX
+ interrupt throtting settings based on link speed.
+====== ==============================================================
+
+aq_itr_tx - TX interrupt throttle rate
+--------------------------------------
+
+Accepted values: 0 - 0x1FF
+
+Default value: 0
+
+TX side throttling in microseconds. Adapter will setup maximum interrupt delay
+to this value. Minimum interrupt delay will be a half of this value
+
+aq_itr_rx - RX interrupt throttle rate
+--------------------------------------
+
+Accepted values: 0 - 0x1FF
+
+Default value: 0
+
+RX side throttling in microseconds. Adapter will setup maximum interrupt delay
+to this value. Minimum interrupt delay will be a half of this value
+
+.. note::
+
+ ITR settings could be changed in runtime by ethtool -c means (see below)
+
+Config file parameters
+======================
+
+For some fine tuning and performance optimizations,
+some parameters can be changed in the {source_dir}/aq_cfg.h file.
+
+AQ_CFG_RX_PAGEORDER
+-------------------
+
+Default value: 0
+
+RX page order override. Thats a power of 2 number of RX pages allocated for
+each descriptor. Received descriptor size is still limited by
+AQ_CFG_RX_FRAME_MAX.
+
+Increasing pageorder makes page reuse better (actual on iommu enabled systems).
+
+AQ_CFG_RX_REFILL_THRES
+----------------------
+
+Default value: 32
+
+RX refill threshold. RX path will not refill freed descriptors until the
+specified number of free descriptors is observed. Larger values may help
+better page reuse but may lead to packet drops as well.
+
+AQ_CFG_VECS_DEF
+---------------
+
+Number of queues
+
+Valid Range: 0 - 8 (up to AQ_CFG_VECS_MAX)
+
+Default value: 8
+
+Notice this value will be capped by the number of cores available on the system.
+
+AQ_CFG_IS_RSS_DEF
+-----------------
+
+Enable/disable Receive Side Scaling
+
+This feature allows the adapter to distribute receive processing
+across multiple CPU-cores and to prevent from overloading a single CPU core.
+
+Valid values
+
+== ========
+0 disabled
+1 enabled
+== ========
+
+Default value: 1
+
+AQ_CFG_NUM_RSS_QUEUES_DEF
+-------------------------
+
+Number of queues for Receive Side Scaling
+
+Valid Range: 0 - 8 (up to AQ_CFG_VECS_DEF)
+
+Default value: AQ_CFG_VECS_DEF
+
+AQ_CFG_IS_LRO_DEF
+-----------------
+
+Enable/disable Large Receive Offload
+
+This offload enables the adapter to coalesce multiple TCP segments and indicate
+them as a single coalesced unit to the OS networking subsystem.
+
+The system consumes less energy but it also introduces more latency in packets
+processing.
+
+Valid values
+
+== ========
+0 disabled
+1 enabled
+== ========
+
+Default value: 1
+
+AQ_CFG_TX_CLEAN_BUDGET
+----------------------
+
+Maximum descriptors to cleanup on TX at once.
+
+Default value: 256
+
+After the aq_cfg.h file changed the driver must be rebuilt to take effect.
+
+Support
+=======
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported
+kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related
+to the issue to aqn_support@marvell.com
+
+License
+=======
+
+aQuantia Corporation Network Driver
+
+Copyright |copy| 2014 - 2019 aQuantia Corporation.
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+under the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License,
+version 2, as published by the Free Software Foundation.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/chelsio/cxgb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/chelsio/cxgb.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..435dce5fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/chelsio/cxgb.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,393 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+=============================================
+Chelsio N210 10Gb Ethernet Network Controller
+=============================================
+
+Driver Release Notes for Linux
+
+Version 2.1.1
+
+June 20, 2005
+
+.. Contents
+
+ INTRODUCTION
+ FEATURES
+ PERFORMANCE
+ DRIVER MESSAGES
+ KNOWN ISSUES
+ SUPPORT
+
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+ This document describes the Linux driver for Chelsio 10Gb Ethernet Network
+ Controller. This driver supports the Chelsio N210 NIC and is backward
+ compatible with the Chelsio N110 model 10Gb NICs.
+
+
+Features
+========
+
+Adaptive Interrupts (adaptive-rx)
+---------------------------------
+
+ This feature provides an adaptive algorithm that adjusts the interrupt
+ coalescing parameters, allowing the driver to dynamically adapt the latency
+ settings to achieve the highest performance during various types of network
+ load.
+
+ The interface used to control this feature is ethtool. Please see the
+ ethtool manpage for additional usage information.
+
+ By default, adaptive-rx is disabled.
+ To enable adaptive-rx::
+
+ ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx on
+
+ To disable adaptive-rx, use ethtool::
+
+ ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off
+
+ After disabling adaptive-rx, the timer latency value will be set to 50us.
+ You may set the timer latency after disabling adaptive-rx::
+
+ ethtool -C <interface> rx-usecs <microseconds>
+
+ An example to set the timer latency value to 100us on eth0::
+
+ ethtool -C eth0 rx-usecs 100
+
+ You may also provide a timer latency value while disabling adaptive-rx::
+
+ ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off rx-usecs <microseconds>
+
+ If adaptive-rx is disabled and a timer latency value is specified, the timer
+ will be set to the specified value until changed by the user or until
+ adaptive-rx is enabled.
+
+ To view the status of the adaptive-rx and timer latency values::
+
+ ethtool -c <interface>
+
+
+TCP Segmentation Offloading (TSO) Support
+-----------------------------------------
+
+ This feature, also known as "large send", enables a system's protocol stack
+ to offload portions of outbound TCP processing to a network interface card
+ thereby reducing system CPU utilization and enhancing performance.
+
+ The interface used to control this feature is ethtool version 1.8 or higher.
+ Please see the ethtool manpage for additional usage information.
+
+ By default, TSO is enabled.
+ To disable TSO::
+
+ ethtool -K <interface> tso off
+
+ To enable TSO::
+
+ ethtool -K <interface> tso on
+
+ To view the status of TSO::
+
+ ethtool -k <interface>
+
+
+Performance
+===========
+
+ The following information is provided as an example of how to change system
+ parameters for "performance tuning" an what value to use. You may or may not
+ want to change these system parameters, depending on your server/workstation
+ application. Doing so is not warranted in any way by Chelsio Communications,
+ and is done at "YOUR OWN RISK". Chelsio will not be held responsible for loss
+ of data or damage to equipment.
+
+ Your distribution may have a different way of doing things, or you may prefer
+ a different method. These commands are shown only to provide an example of
+ what to do and are by no means definitive.
+
+ Making any of the following system changes will only last until you reboot
+ your system. You may want to write a script that runs at boot-up which
+ includes the optimal settings for your system.
+
+ Setting PCI Latency Timer::
+
+ setpci -d 1425::
+
+* 0x0c.l=0x0000F800
+
+ Disabling TCP timestamp::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_timestamps=0
+
+ Disabling SACK::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_sack=0
+
+ Setting large number of incoming connection requests::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_max_syn_backlog=3000
+
+ Setting maximum receive socket buffer size::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.rmem_max=1024000
+
+ Setting maximum send socket buffer size::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.wmem_max=1024000
+
+ Set smp_affinity (on a multiprocessor system) to a single CPU::
+
+ echo 1 > /proc/irq/<interrupt_number>/smp_affinity
+
+ Setting default receive socket buffer size::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.rmem_default=524287
+
+ Setting default send socket buffer size::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.wmem_default=524287
+
+ Setting maximum option memory buffers::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.optmem_max=524287
+
+ Setting maximum backlog (# of unprocessed packets before kernel drops)::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.netdev_max_backlog=300000
+
+ Setting TCP read buffers (min/default/max)::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="10000000 10000000 10000000"
+
+ Setting TCP write buffers (min/pressure/max)::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="10000000 10000000 10000000"
+
+ Setting TCP buffer space (min/pressure/max)::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_mem="10000000 10000000 10000000"
+
+ TCP window size for single connections:
+
+ The receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size must be at least as large as the
+ Bandwidth-Delay Product of the communication link between the sender and
+ receiver. Due to the variations of RTT, you may want to increase the buffer
+ size up to 2 times the Bandwidth-Delay Product. Reference page 289 of
+ "TCP/IP Illustrated, Volume 1, The Protocols" by W. Richard Stevens.
+
+ At 10Gb speeds, use the following formula::
+
+ RX_WINDOW >= 1.25MBytes * RTT(in milliseconds)
+ Example for RTT with 100us: RX_WINDOW = (1,250,000 * 0.1) = 125,000
+
+ RX_WINDOW sizes of 256KB - 512KB should be sufficient.
+
+ Setting the min, max, and default receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="<min> <default> <max>"
+
+ TCP window size for multiple connections:
+ The receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size may be calculated the same as single
+ connections, but should be divided by the number of connections. The
+ smaller window prevents congestion and facilitates better pacing,
+ especially if/when MAC level flow control does not work well or when it is
+ not supported on the machine. Experimentation may be necessary to attain
+ the correct value. This method is provided as a starting point for the
+ correct receive buffer size.
+
+ Setting the min, max, and default receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size is
+ performed in the same manner as single connection.
+
+
+Driver Messages
+===============
+
+ The following messages are the most common messages logged by syslog. These
+ may be found in /var/log/messages.
+
+ Driver up::
+
+ Chelsio Network Driver - version 2.1.1
+
+ NIC detected::
+
+ eth#: Chelsio N210 1x10GBaseX NIC (rev #), PCIX 133MHz/64-bit
+
+ Link up::
+
+ eth#: link is up at 10 Gbps, full duplex
+
+ Link down::
+
+ eth#: link is down
+
+
+Known Issues
+============
+
+ These issues have been identified during testing. The following information
+ is provided as a workaround to the problem. In some cases, this problem is
+ inherent to Linux or to a particular Linux Distribution and/or hardware
+ platform.
+
+ 1. Large number of TCP retransmits on a multiprocessor (SMP) system.
+
+ On a system with multiple CPUs, the interrupt (IRQ) for the network
+ controller may be bound to more than one CPU. This will cause TCP
+ retransmits if the packet data were to be split across different CPUs
+ and re-assembled in a different order than expected.
+
+ To eliminate the TCP retransmits, set smp_affinity on the particular
+ interrupt to a single CPU. You can locate the interrupt (IRQ) used on
+ the N110/N210 by using ifconfig::
+
+ ifconfig <dev_name> | grep Interrupt
+
+ Set the smp_affinity to a single CPU::
+
+ echo 1 > /proc/irq/<interrupt_number>/smp_affinity
+
+ It is highly suggested that you do not run the irqbalance daemon on your
+ system, as this will change any smp_affinity setting you have applied.
+ The irqbalance daemon runs on a 10 second interval and binds interrupts
+ to the least loaded CPU determined by the daemon. To disable this daemon::
+
+ chkconfig --level 2345 irqbalance off
+
+ By default, some Linux distributions enable the kernel feature,
+ irqbalance, which performs the same function as the daemon. To disable
+ this feature, add the following line to your bootloader::
+
+ noirqbalance
+
+ Example using the Grub bootloader::
+
+ title Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (2.4.21-27.ELsmp)
+ root (hd0,0)
+ kernel /vmlinuz-2.4.21-27.ELsmp ro root=/dev/hda3 noirqbalance
+ initrd /initrd-2.4.21-27.ELsmp.img
+
+ 2. After running insmod, the driver is loaded and the incorrect network
+ interface is brought up without running ifup.
+
+ When using 2.4.x kernels, including RHEL kernels, the Linux kernel
+ invokes a script named "hotplug". This script is primarily used to
+ automatically bring up USB devices when they are plugged in, however,
+ the script also attempts to automatically bring up a network interface
+ after loading the kernel module. The hotplug script does this by scanning
+ the ifcfg-eth# config files in /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts, looking
+ for HWADDR=<mac_address>.
+
+ If the hotplug script does not find the HWADDRR within any of the
+ ifcfg-eth# files, it will bring up the device with the next available
+ interface name. If this interface is already configured for a different
+ network card, your new interface will have incorrect IP address and
+ network settings.
+
+ To solve this issue, you can add the HWADDR=<mac_address> key to the
+ interface config file of your network controller.
+
+ To disable this "hotplug" feature, you may add the driver (module name)
+ to the "blacklist" file located in /etc/hotplug. It has been noted that
+ this does not work for network devices because the net.agent script
+ does not use the blacklist file. Simply remove, or rename, the net.agent
+ script located in /etc/hotplug to disable this feature.
+
+ 3. Transport Protocol (TP) hangs when running heavy multi-connection traffic
+ on an AMD Opteron system with HyperTransport PCI-X Tunnel chipset.
+
+ If your AMD Opteron system uses the AMD-8131 HyperTransport PCI-X Tunnel
+ chipset, you may experience the "133-Mhz Mode Split Completion Data
+ Corruption" bug identified by AMD while using a 133Mhz PCI-X card on the
+ bus PCI-X bus.
+
+ AMD states, "Under highly specific conditions, the AMD-8131 PCI-X Tunnel
+ can provide stale data via split completion cycles to a PCI-X card that
+ is operating at 133 Mhz", causing data corruption.
+
+ AMD's provides three workarounds for this problem, however, Chelsio
+ recommends the first option for best performance with this bug:
+
+ For 133Mhz secondary bus operation, limit the transaction length and
+ the number of outstanding transactions, via BIOS configuration
+ programming of the PCI-X card, to the following:
+
+ Data Length (bytes): 1k
+
+ Total allowed outstanding transactions: 2
+
+ Please refer to AMD 8131-HT/PCI-X Errata 26310 Rev 3.08 August 2004,
+ section 56, "133-MHz Mode Split Completion Data Corruption" for more
+ details with this bug and workarounds suggested by AMD.
+
+ It may be possible to work outside AMD's recommended PCI-X settings, try
+ increasing the Data Length to 2k bytes for increased performance. If you
+ have issues with these settings, please revert to the "safe" settings
+ and duplicate the problem before submitting a bug or asking for support.
+
+ .. note::
+
+ The default setting on most systems is 8 outstanding transactions
+ and 2k bytes data length.
+
+ 4. On multiprocessor systems, it has been noted that an application which
+ is handling 10Gb networking can switch between CPUs causing degraded
+ and/or unstable performance.
+
+ If running on an SMP system and taking performance measurements, it
+ is suggested you either run the latest netperf-2.4.0+ or use a binding
+ tool such as Tim Hockin's procstate utilities (runon)
+ <http://www.hockin.org/~thockin/procstate/>.
+
+ Binding netserver and netperf (or other applications) to particular
+ CPUs will have a significant difference in performance measurements.
+ You may need to experiment which CPU to bind the application to in
+ order to achieve the best performance for your system.
+
+ If you are developing an application designed for 10Gb networking,
+ please keep in mind you may want to look at kernel functions
+ sched_setaffinity & sched_getaffinity to bind your application.
+
+ If you are just running user-space applications such as ftp, telnet,
+ etc., you may want to try the runon tool provided by Tim Hockin's
+ procstate utility. You could also try binding the interface to a
+ particular CPU: runon 0 ifup eth0
+
+
+Support
+=======
+
+ If you have problems with the software or hardware, please contact our
+ customer support team via email at support@chelsio.com or check our website
+ at http://www.chelsio.com
+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+::
+
+ Chelsio Communications
+ 370 San Aleso Ave.
+ Suite 100
+ Sunnyvale, CA 94085
+ http://www.chelsio.com
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+it under the terms of the GNU General Public License, version 2, as
+published by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS`` AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
+WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+Copyright |copy| 2003-2005 Chelsio Communications. All rights reserved.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/cirrus/cs89x0.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/cirrus/cs89x0.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e5c283940
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/cirrus/cs89x0.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,647 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+================================================
+Cirrus Logic LAN CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapters
+================================================
+
+.. note::
+
+ This document was contributed by Cirrus Logic for kernel 2.2.5. This version
+ has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton.
+
+ Still, this is too outdated! A major cleanup is needed here.
+
+Cirrus make a copy of this driver available at their website, as
+described below. In general, you should use the driver version which
+comes with your Linux distribution.
+
+
+Linux Network Interface Driver ver. 2.00 <kernel 2.3.48>
+
+
+.. TABLE OF CONTENTS
+
+ 1.0 CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS
+ 1.1 Product Overview
+ 1.2 Driver Description
+ 1.2.1 Driver Name
+ 1.2.2 File in the Driver Package
+ 1.3 System Requirements
+ 1.4 Licensing Information
+
+ 2.0 ADAPTER INSTALLATION and CONFIGURATION
+ 2.1 CS8900-based Adapter Configuration
+ 2.2 CS8920-based Adapter Configuration
+
+ 3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE
+
+ 4.0 COMPILING THE DRIVER
+ 4.1 Compiling the Driver as a Loadable Module
+ 4.2 Compiling the driver to support memory mode
+ 4.3 Compiling the driver to support Rx DMA
+
+ 5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
+ 5.1 Known Defects and Limitations
+ 5.2 Testing the Adapter
+ 5.2.1 Diagnostic Self-Test
+ 5.2.2 Diagnostic Network Test
+ 5.3 Using the Adapter's LEDs
+ 5.4 Resolving I/O Conflicts
+
+ 6.0 TECHNICAL SUPPORT
+ 6.1 Contacting Cirrus Logic's Technical Support
+ 6.2 Information Required Before Contacting Technical Support
+ 6.3 Obtaining the Latest Driver Version
+ 6.4 Current maintainer
+ 6.5 Kernel boot parameters
+
+
+1. Cirrus Logic LAN CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapters
+===================================================
+
+
+1.1. Product Overview
+=====================
+
+The CS8900-based ISA Ethernet Adapters from Cirrus Logic follow
+IEEE 802.3 standards and support half or full-duplex operation in ISA bus
+computers on 10 Mbps Ethernet networks. The adapters are designed for operation
+in 16-bit ISA or EISA bus expansion slots and are available in
+10BaseT-only or 3-media configurations (10BaseT, 10Base2, and AUI for 10Base-5
+or fiber networks).
+
+CS8920-based adapters are similar to the CS8900-based adapter with additional
+features for Plug and Play (PnP) support and Wakeup Frame recognition. As
+such, the configuration procedures differ somewhat between the two types of
+adapters. Refer to the "Adapter Configuration" section for details on
+configuring both types of adapters.
+
+
+1.2. Driver Description
+=======================
+
+The CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapter driver for Linux supports the Linux
+v2.3.48 or greater kernel. It can be compiled directly into the kernel
+or loaded at run-time as a device driver module.
+
+1.2.1 Driver Name: cs89x0
+
+1.2.2 Files in the Driver Archive:
+
+The files in the driver at Cirrus' website include:
+
+ =================== ====================================================
+ readme.txt this file
+ build batch file to compile cs89x0.c.
+ cs89x0.c driver C code
+ cs89x0.h driver header file
+ cs89x0.o pre-compiled module (for v2.2.5 kernel)
+ config/Config.in sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel.
+ config/Makefile sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel.
+ config/Space.c sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel.
+ =================== ====================================================
+
+
+
+1.3. System Requirements
+------------------------
+
+The following hardware is required:
+
+ * Cirrus Logic LAN (CS8900/20-based) Ethernet ISA Adapter
+
+ * IBM or IBM-compatible PC with:
+ * An 80386 or higher processor
+ * 16 bytes of contiguous IO space available between 210h - 370h
+ * One available IRQ (5,10,11,or 12 for the CS8900, 3-7,9-15 for CS8920).
+
+ * Appropriate cable (and connector for AUI, 10BASE-2) for your network
+ topology.
+
+The following software is required:
+
+* LINUX kernel version 2.3.48 or higher
+
+ * CS8900/20 Setup Utility (DOS-based)
+
+ * LINUX kernel sources for your kernel (if compiling into kernel)
+
+ * GNU Toolkit (gcc and make) v2.6 or above (if compiling into kernel
+ or a module)
+
+
+
+1.4. Licensing Information
+--------------------------
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
+the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+Foundation, version 1.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
+ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for
+more details.
+
+For a full copy of the GNU General Public License, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+
+
+
+2. Adapter Installation and Configuration
+=========================================
+
+Both the CS8900 and CS8920-based adapters can be configured using parameters
+stored in an on-board EEPROM. You must use the DOS-based CS8900/20 Setup
+Utility if you want to change the adapter's configuration in EEPROM.
+
+When loading the driver as a module, you can specify many of the adapter's
+configuration parameters on the command-line to override the EEPROM's settings
+or for interface configuration when an EEPROM is not used. (CS8920-based
+adapters must use an EEPROM.) See Section 3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE.
+
+Since the CS8900/20 Setup Utility is a DOS-based application, you must install
+and configure the adapter in a DOS-based system using the CS8900/20 Setup
+Utility before installation in the target LINUX system. (Not required if
+installing a CS8900-based adapter and the default configuration is acceptable.)
+
+
+2.1. CS8900-based Adapter Configuration
+---------------------------------------
+
+CS8900-based adapters shipped from Cirrus Logic have been configured
+with the following "default" settings::
+
+ Operation Mode: Memory Mode
+ IRQ: 10
+ Base I/O Address: 300
+ Memory Base Address: D0000
+ Optimization: DOS Client
+ Transmission Mode: Half-duplex
+ BootProm: None
+ Media Type: Autodetect (3-media cards) or
+ 10BASE-T (10BASE-T only adapter)
+
+You should only change the default configuration settings if conflicts with
+another adapter exists. To change the adapter's configuration, run the
+CS8900/20 Setup Utility.
+
+
+2.2. CS8920-based Adapter Configuration
+---------------------------------------
+
+CS8920-based adapters are shipped from Cirrus Logic configured as Plug
+and Play (PnP) enabled. However, since the cs89x0 driver does NOT
+support PnP, you must install the CS8920 adapter in a DOS-based PC and
+run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility to disable PnP and configure the
+adapter before installation in the target Linux system. Failure to do
+this will leave the adapter inactive and the driver will be unable to
+communicate with the adapter.
+
+::
+
+ ****************************************************************
+ * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS: *
+ * *
+ * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS ARE PLUG and PLAY ENABLED BY DEFAULT. *
+ * THE CS89X0 DRIVER DOES NOT SUPPORT PnP. THEREFORE, YOU MUST *
+ * RUN THE CS8900/20 SETUP UTILITY TO DISABLE PnP SUPPORT AND *
+ * TO ACTIVATE THE ADAPTER. *
+ ****************************************************************
+
+
+
+
+3. Loading the Driver as a Module
+=================================
+
+If the driver is compiled as a loadable module, you can load the driver module
+with the 'modprobe' command. Many of the adapter's configuration parameters can
+be specified as command-line arguments to the load command. This facility
+provides a means to override the EEPROM's settings or for interface
+configuration when an EEPROM is not used.
+
+Example::
+
+ insmod cs89x0.o io=0x200 irq=0xA media=aui
+
+This example loads the module and configures the adapter to use an IO port base
+address of 200h, interrupt 10, and use the AUI media connection. The following
+configuration options are available on the command line::
+
+ io=### - specify IO address (200h-360h)
+ irq=## - specify interrupt level
+ use_dma=1 - Enable DMA
+ dma=# - specify dma channel (Driver is compiled to support
+ Rx DMA only)
+ dmasize=# (16 or 64) - DMA size 16K or 64K. Default value is set to 16.
+ media=rj45 - specify media type
+ or media=bnc
+ or media=aui
+ or media=auto
+ duplex=full - specify forced half/full/autonegotiate duplex
+ or duplex=half
+ or duplex=auto
+ debug=# - debug level (only available if the driver was compiled
+ for debugging)
+
+**Notes:**
+
+a) If an EEPROM is present, any specified command-line parameter
+ will override the corresponding configuration value stored in
+ EEPROM.
+
+b) The "io" parameter must be specified on the command-line.
+
+c) The driver's hardware probe routine is designed to avoid
+ writing to I/O space until it knows that there is a cs89x0
+ card at the written addresses. This could cause problems
+ with device probing. To avoid this behaviour, add one
+ to the ``io=`` module parameter. This doesn't actually change
+ the I/O address, but it is a flag to tell the driver
+ to partially initialise the hardware before trying to
+ identify the card. This could be dangerous if you are
+ not sure that there is a cs89x0 card at the provided address.
+
+ For example, to scan for an adapter located at IO base 0x300,
+ specify an IO address of 0x301.
+
+d) The "duplex=auto" parameter is only supported for the CS8920.
+
+e) The minimum command-line configuration required if an EEPROM is
+ not present is:
+
+ io
+ irq
+ media type (no autodetect)
+
+f) The following additional parameters are CS89XX defaults (values
+ used with no EEPROM or command-line argument).
+
+ * DMA Burst = enabled
+ * IOCHRDY Enabled = enabled
+ * UseSA = enabled
+ * CS8900 defaults to half-duplex if not specified on command-line
+ * CS8920 defaults to autoneg if not specified on command-line
+ * Use reset defaults for other config parameters
+ * dma_mode = 0
+
+g) You can use ifconfig to set the adapter's Ethernet address.
+
+h) Many Linux distributions use the 'modprobe' command to load
+ modules. This program uses the '/etc/conf.modules' file to
+ determine configuration information which is passed to a driver
+ module when it is loaded. All the configuration options which are
+ described above may be placed within /etc/conf.modules.
+
+ For example::
+
+ > cat /etc/conf.modules
+ ...
+ alias eth0 cs89x0
+ options cs89x0 io=0x0200 dma=5 use_dma=1
+ ...
+
+ In this example we are telling the module system that the
+ ethernet driver for this machine should use the cs89x0 driver. We
+ are asking 'modprobe' to pass the 'io', 'dma' and 'use_dma'
+ arguments to the driver when it is loaded.
+
+i) Cirrus recommend that the cs89x0 use the ISA DMA channels 5, 6 or
+ 7. You will probably find that other DMA channels will not work.
+
+j) The cs89x0 supports DMA for receiving only. DMA mode is
+ significantly more efficient. Flooding a 400 MHz Celeron machine
+ with large ping packets consumes 82% of its CPU capacity in non-DMA
+ mode. With DMA this is reduced to 45%.
+
+k) If your Linux kernel was compiled with inbuilt plug-and-play
+ support you will be able to find information about the cs89x0 card
+ with the command::
+
+ cat /proc/isapnp
+
+l) If during DMA operation you find erratic behavior or network data
+ corruption you should use your PC's BIOS to slow the EISA bus clock.
+
+m) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel
+ (non-modular) then its I/O address is automatically determined by
+ ISA bus probing. The IRQ number, media options, etc are determined
+ from the card's EEPROM.
+
+n) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel, DMA
+ mode may be selected by providing the kernel with a boot option
+ 'cs89x0_dma=N' where 'N' is the desired DMA channel number (5, 6 or 7).
+
+ Kernel boot options may be provided on the LILO command line::
+
+ LILO boot: linux cs89x0_dma=5
+
+ or they may be placed in /etc/lilo.conf::
+
+ image=/boot/bzImage-2.3.48
+ append="cs89x0_dma=5"
+ label=linux
+ root=/dev/hda5
+ read-only
+
+ The DMA Rx buffer size is hardwired to 16 kbytes in this mode.
+ (64k mode is not available).
+
+
+4. Compiling the Driver
+=======================
+
+The cs89x0 driver can be compiled directly into the kernel or compiled into
+a loadable device driver module.
+
+Just use the standard way to configure the driver and compile the Kernel.
+
+
+4.1. Compiling the Driver to Support Rx DMA
+-------------------------------------------
+
+The compile-time optionality for DMA was removed in the 2.3 kernel
+series. DMA support is now unconditionally part of the driver. It is
+enabled by the 'use_dma=1' module option.
+
+
+5. Testing and Troubleshooting
+==============================
+
+5.1. Known Defects and Limitations
+----------------------------------
+
+Refer to the RELEASE.TXT file distributed as part of this archive for a list of
+known defects, driver limitations, and work arounds.
+
+
+5.2. Testing the Adapter
+------------------------
+
+Once the adapter has been installed and configured, the diagnostic option of
+the CS8900/20 Setup Utility can be used to test the functionality of the
+adapter and its network connection. Use the diagnostics 'Self Test' option to
+test the functionality of the adapter with the hardware configuration you have
+assigned. You can use the diagnostics 'Network Test' to test the ability of the
+adapter to communicate across the Ethernet with another PC equipped with a
+CS8900/20-based adapter card (it must also be running the CS8900/20 Setup
+Utility).
+
+.. note::
+
+ The Setup Utility's diagnostics are designed to run in a
+ DOS-only operating system environment. DO NOT run the diagnostics
+ from a DOS or command prompt session under Windows 95, Windows NT,
+ OS/2, or other operating system.
+
+To run the diagnostics tests on the CS8900/20 adapter:
+
+ 1. Boot DOS on the PC and start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility.
+
+ 2. The adapter's current configuration is displayed. Hit the ENTER key to
+ get to the main menu.
+
+ 4. Select 'Diagnostics' (ALT-G) from the main menu.
+ * Select 'Self-Test' to test the adapter's basic functionality.
+ * Select 'Network Test' to test the network connection and cabling.
+
+
+5.2.1. Diagnostic Self-test
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+The diagnostic self-test checks the adapter's basic functionality as well as
+its ability to communicate across the ISA bus based on the system resources
+assigned during hardware configuration. The following tests are performed:
+
+ * IO Register Read/Write Test
+
+ The IO Register Read/Write test insures that the CS8900/20 can be
+ accessed in IO mode, and that the IO base address is correct.
+
+ * Shared Memory Test
+
+ The Shared Memory test insures the CS8900/20 can be accessed in memory
+ mode and that the range of memory addresses assigned does not conflict
+ with other devices in the system.
+
+ * Interrupt Test
+
+ The Interrupt test insures there are no conflicts with the assigned IRQ
+ signal.
+
+ * EEPROM Test
+
+ The EEPROM test insures the EEPROM can be read.
+
+ * Chip RAM Test
+
+ The Chip RAM test insures the 4K of memory internal to the CS8900/20 is
+ working properly.
+
+ * Internal Loop-back Test
+
+ The Internal Loop Back test insures the adapter's transmitter and
+ receiver are operating properly. If this test fails, make sure the
+ adapter's cable is connected to the network (check for LED activity for
+ example).
+
+ * Boot PROM Test
+
+ The Boot PROM test insures the Boot PROM is present, and can be read.
+ Failure indicates the Boot PROM was not successfully read due to a
+ hardware problem or due to a conflicts on the Boot PROM address
+ assignment. (Test only applies if the adapter is configured to use the
+ Boot PROM option.)
+
+Failure of a test item indicates a possible system resource conflict with
+another device on the ISA bus. In this case, you should use the Manual Setup
+option to reconfigure the adapter by selecting a different value for the system
+resource that failed.
+
+
+5.2.2. Diagnostic Network Test
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+The Diagnostic Network Test verifies a working network connection by
+transferring data between two CS8900/20 adapters installed in different PCs
+on the same network. (Note: the diagnostic network test should not be run
+between two nodes across a router.)
+
+This test requires that each of the two PCs have a CS8900/20-based adapter
+installed and have the CS8900/20 Setup Utility running. The first PC is
+configured as a Responder and the other PC is configured as an Initiator.
+Once the Initiator is started, it sends data frames to the Responder which
+returns the frames to the Initiator.
+
+The total number of frames received and transmitted are displayed on the
+Initiator's display, along with a count of the number of frames received and
+transmitted OK or in error. The test can be terminated anytime by the user at
+either PC.
+
+To setup the Diagnostic Network Test:
+
+ 1. Select a PC with a CS8900/20-based adapter and a known working network
+ connection to act as the Responder. Run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility
+ and select 'Diagnostics -> Network Test -> Responder' from the main
+ menu. Hit ENTER to start the Responder.
+
+ 2. Return to the PC with the CS8900/20-based adapter you want to test and
+ start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility.
+
+ 3. From the main menu, Select 'Diagnostic -> Network Test -> Initiator'.
+ Hit ENTER to start the test.
+
+You may stop the test on the Initiator at any time while allowing the Responder
+to continue running. In this manner, you can move to additional PCs and test
+them by starting the Initiator on another PC without having to stop/start the
+Responder.
+
+
+
+5.3. Using the Adapter's LEDs
+-----------------------------
+
+The 2 and 3-media adapters have two LEDs visible on the back end of the board
+located near the 10Base-T connector.
+
+Link Integrity LED: A "steady" ON of the green LED indicates a valid 10Base-T
+connection. (Only applies to 10Base-T. The green LED has no significance for
+a 10Base-2 or AUI connection.)
+
+TX/RX LED: The yellow LED lights briefly each time the adapter transmits or
+receives data. (The yellow LED will appear to "flicker" on a typical network.)
+
+
+5.4. Resolving I/O Conflicts
+----------------------------
+
+An IO conflict occurs when two or more adapter use the same ISA resource (IO
+address, memory address or IRQ). You can usually detect an IO conflict in one
+of four ways after installing and or configuring the CS8900/20-based adapter:
+
+ 1. The system does not boot properly (or at all).
+
+ 2. The driver cannot communicate with the adapter, reporting an "Adapter
+ not found" error message.
+
+ 3. You cannot connect to the network or the driver will not load.
+
+ 4. If you have configured the adapter to run in memory mode but the driver
+ reports it is using IO mode when loading, this is an indication of a
+ memory address conflict.
+
+If an IO conflict occurs, run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility and perform a
+diagnostic self-test. Normally, the ISA resource in conflict will fail the
+self-test. If so, reconfigure the adapter selecting another choice for the
+resource in conflict. Run the diagnostics again to check for further IO
+conflicts.
+
+In some cases, such as when the PC will not boot, it may be necessary to remove
+the adapter and reconfigure it by installing it in another PC to run the
+CS8900/20 Setup Utility. Once reinstalled in the target system, run the
+diagnostics self-test to ensure the new configuration is free of conflicts
+before loading the driver again.
+
+When manually configuring the adapter, keep in mind the typical ISA system
+resource usage as indicated in the tables below.
+
+::
+
+ I/O Address Device IRQ Device
+ ----------- -------- --- --------
+ 200-20F Game I/O adapter 3 COM2, Bus Mouse
+ 230-23F Bus Mouse 4 COM1
+ 270-27F LPT3: third parallel port 5 LPT2
+ 2F0-2FF COM2: second serial port 6 Floppy Disk controller
+ 320-32F Fixed disk controller 7 LPT1
+ 8 Real-time Clock
+ 9 EGA/VGA display adapter
+ 12 Mouse (PS/2)
+ Memory Address Device 13 Math Coprocessor
+ -------------- --------------------- 14 Hard Disk controller
+ A000-BFFF EGA Graphics Adapter
+ A000-C7FF VGA Graphics Adapter
+ B000-BFFF Mono Graphics Adapter
+ B800-BFFF Color Graphics Adapter
+ E000-FFFF AT BIOS
+
+
+
+
+6. Technical Support
+====================
+
+6.1. Contacting Cirrus Logic's Technical Support
+------------------------------------------------
+
+Cirrus Logic's CS89XX Technical Application Support can be reached at::
+
+ Telephone :(800) 888-5016 (from inside U.S. and Canada)
+ :(512) 442-7555 (from outside the U.S. and Canada)
+ Fax :(512) 912-3871
+ Email :ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com
+ WWW :http://www.cirrus.com
+
+
+6.2. Information Required before Contacting Technical Support
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Before contacting Cirrus Logic for technical support, be prepared to provide as
+Much of the following information as possible.
+
+1.) Adapter type (CRD8900, CDB8900, CDB8920, etc.)
+
+2.) Adapter configuration
+
+ * IO Base, Memory Base, IO or memory mode enabled, IRQ, DMA channel
+ * Plug and Play enabled/disabled (CS8920-based adapters only)
+ * Configured for media auto-detect or specific media type (which type).
+
+3.) PC System's Configuration
+
+ * Plug and Play system (yes/no)
+ * BIOS (make and version)
+ * System make and model
+ * CPU (type and speed)
+ * System RAM
+ * SCSI Adapter
+
+4.) Software
+
+ * CS89XX driver and version
+ * Your network operating system and version
+ * Your system's OS version
+ * Version of all protocol support files
+
+5.) Any Error Message displayed.
+
+
+
+6.3 Obtaining the Latest Driver Version
+---------------------------------------
+
+You can obtain the latest CS89XX drivers and support software from Cirrus Logic's
+Web site. You can also contact Cirrus Logic's Technical Support (email:
+ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com) and request that you be registered for automatic
+software-update notification.
+
+Cirrus Logic maintains a web page at http://www.cirrus.com with the
+latest drivers and technical publications.
+
+
+6.4. Current maintainer
+-----------------------
+
+In February 2000 the maintenance of this driver was assumed by Andrew
+Morton.
+
+6.5 Kernel module parameters
+----------------------------
+
+For use in embedded environments with no cs89x0 EEPROM, the kernel boot
+parameter ``cs89x0_media=`` has been implemented. Usage is::
+
+ cs89x0_media=rj45 or
+ cs89x0_media=aui or
+ cs89x0_media=bnc
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/davicom/dm9000.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/davicom/dm9000.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..14eb0a4d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/davicom/dm9000.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================
+DM9000 Network driver
+=====================
+
+Copyright 2008 Simtec Electronics,
+
+ Ben Dooks <ben@simtec.co.uk> <ben-linux@fluff.org>
+
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+This file describes how to use the DM9000 platform-device based network driver
+that is contained in the files drivers/net/dm9000.c and drivers/net/dm9000.h.
+
+The driver supports three DM9000 variants, the DM9000E which is the first chip
+supported as well as the newer DM9000A and DM9000B devices. It is currently
+maintained and tested by Ben Dooks, who should be CC: to any patches for this
+driver.
+
+
+Defining the platform device
+----------------------------
+
+The minimum set of resources attached to the platform device are as follows:
+
+ 1) The physical address of the address register
+ 2) The physical address of the data register
+ 3) The IRQ line the device's interrupt pin is connected to.
+
+These resources should be specified in that order, as the ordering of the
+two address regions is important (the driver expects these to be address
+and then data).
+
+An example from arch/arm/mach-s3c/mach-bast.c is::
+
+ static struct resource bast_dm9k_resource[] = {
+ [0] = {
+ .start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000,
+ .end = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 3,
+ .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM,
+ },
+ [1] = {
+ .start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40,
+ .end = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40 + 0x3f,
+ .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM,
+ },
+ [2] = {
+ .start = IRQ_DM9000,
+ .end = IRQ_DM9000,
+ .flags = IORESOURCE_IRQ | IORESOURCE_IRQ_HIGHLEVEL,
+ }
+ };
+
+ static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = {
+ .name = "dm9000",
+ .id = 0,
+ .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource),
+ .resource = bast_dm9k_resource,
+ };
+
+Note the setting of the IRQ trigger flag in bast_dm9k_resource[2].flags,
+as this will generate a warning if it is not present. The trigger from
+the flags field will be passed to request_irq() when registering the IRQ
+handler to ensure that the IRQ is setup correctly.
+
+This shows a typical platform device, without the optional configuration
+platform data supplied. The next example uses the same resources, but adds
+the optional platform data to pass extra configuration data::
+
+ static struct dm9000_plat_data bast_dm9k_platdata = {
+ .flags = DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY,
+ };
+
+ static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = {
+ .name = "dm9000",
+ .id = 0,
+ .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource),
+ .resource = bast_dm9k_resource,
+ .dev = {
+ .platform_data = &bast_dm9k_platdata,
+ }
+ };
+
+The platform data is defined in include/linux/dm9000.h and described below.
+
+
+Platform data
+-------------
+
+Extra platform data for the DM9000 can describe the IO bus width to the
+device, whether or not an external PHY is attached to the device and
+the availability of an external configuration EEPROM.
+
+The flags for the platform data .flags field are as follows:
+
+DM9000_PLATF_8BITONLY
+
+ The IO should be done with 8bit operations.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY
+
+ The IO should be done with 16bit operations.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_32BITONLY
+
+ The IO should be done with 32bit operations.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_EXT_PHY
+
+ The chip is connected to an external PHY.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_NO_EEPROM
+
+ This can be used to signify that the board does not have an
+ EEPROM, or that the EEPROM should be hidden from the user.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY
+
+ Switch to using the simpler PHY polling method which does not
+ try and read the MII PHY state regularly. This is only available
+ when using the internal PHY. See the section on link state polling
+ for more information.
+
+ The config symbol DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL, Kconfig entry
+ "Force simple NSR based PHY polling" allows this flag to be
+ forced on at build time.
+
+
+PHY Link state polling
+----------------------
+
+The driver keeps track of the link state and informs the network core
+about link (carrier) availability. This is managed by several methods
+depending on the version of the chip and on which PHY is being used.
+
+For the internal PHY, the original (and currently default) method is
+to read the MII state, either when the status changes if we have the
+necessary interrupt support in the chip or every two seconds via a
+periodic timer.
+
+To reduce the overhead for the internal PHY, there is now the option
+of using the DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL config, or DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY
+platform data option to read the summary information without the
+expensive MII accesses. This method is faster, but does not print
+as much information.
+
+When using an external PHY, the driver currently has to poll the MII
+link status as there is no method for getting an interrupt on link change.
+
+
+DM9000A / DM9000B
+-----------------
+
+These chips are functionally similar to the DM9000E and are supported easily
+by the same driver. The features are:
+
+ 1) Interrupt on internal PHY state change. This means that the periodic
+ polling of the PHY status may be disabled on these devices when using
+ the internal PHY.
+
+ 2) TCP/UDP checksum offloading, which the driver does not currently support.
+
+
+ethtool
+-------
+
+The driver supports the ethtool interface for access to the driver
+state information, the PHY state and the EEPROM.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/dmfe.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/dmfe.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c4cf809ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/dmfe.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==============================================================
+Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver for Linux
+==============================================================
+
+Note: This driver doesn't have a maintainer.
+
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+
+This driver provides kernel support for Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 ethernet cards ( CNET
+10/100 ethernet cards uses Davicom chipset too, so this driver supports CNET cards too ).If you
+didn't compile this driver as a module, it will automatically load itself on boot and print a
+line similar to::
+
+ dmfe: Davicom DM9xxx net driver, version 1.36.4 (2002-01-17)
+
+If you compiled this driver as a module, you have to load it on boot.You can load it with command::
+
+ insmod dmfe
+
+This way it will autodetect the device mode.This is the suggested way to load the module.Or you can pass
+a mode= setting to module while loading, like::
+
+ insmod dmfe mode=0 # Force 10M Half Duplex
+ insmod dmfe mode=1 # Force 100M Half Duplex
+ insmod dmfe mode=4 # Force 10M Full Duplex
+ insmod dmfe mode=5 # Force 100M Full Duplex
+
+Next you should configure your network interface with a command similar to::
+
+ ifconfig eth0 172.22.3.18
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^
+ Your IP Address
+
+Then you may have to modify the default routing table with command::
+
+ route add default eth0
+
+
+Now your ethernet card should be up and running.
+
+
+TODO:
+
+- Implement pci_driver::suspend() and pci_driver::resume() power management methods.
+- Check on 64 bit boxes.
+- Check and fix on big endian boxes.
+- Test and make sure PCI latency is now correct for all cases.
+
+
+Authors:
+
+Sten Wang <sten_wang@davicom.com.tw > : Original Author
+
+Contributors:
+
+- Marcelo Tosatti <marcelo@conectiva.com.br>
+- Alan Cox <alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk>
+- Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
+- Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dlink/dl2k.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dlink/dl2k.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ccdb5d0d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dlink/dl2k.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=========================================================
+D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter Installation
+=========================================================
+
+May 23, 2002
+
+.. Contents
+
+ - Compatibility List
+ - Quick Install
+ - Compiling the Driver
+ - Installing the Driver
+ - Option parameter
+ - Configuration Script Sample
+ - Troubleshooting
+
+
+Compatibility List
+==================
+
+Adapter Support:
+
+- D-Link DGE-550T Gigabit Ethernet Adapter.
+- D-Link DGE-550SX Gigabit Ethernet Adapter.
+- D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter.
+
+
+The driver support Linux kernel 2.4.7 later. We had tested it
+on the environments below.
+
+ . Red Hat v6.2 (update kernel to 2.4.7)
+ . Red Hat v7.0 (update kernel to 2.4.7)
+ . Red Hat v7.1 (kernel 2.4.7)
+ . Red Hat v7.2 (kernel 2.4.7-10)
+
+
+Quick Install
+=============
+Install linux driver as following command::
+
+ 1. make all
+ 2. insmod dl2k.ko
+ 3. ifconfig eth0 up 10.xxx.xxx.xxx netmask 255.0.0.0
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^\ ^^^^^^^^\
+ IP NETMASK
+
+Now eth0 should active, you can test it by "ping" or get more information by
+"ifconfig". If tested ok, continue the next step.
+
+4. ``cp dl2k.ko /lib/modules/`uname -r`/kernel/drivers/net``
+5. Add the following line to /etc/modprobe.d/dl2k.conf::
+
+ alias eth0 dl2k
+
+6. Run ``depmod`` to updated module indexes.
+7. Run ``netconfig`` or ``netconf`` to create configuration script ifcfg-eth0
+ located at /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts or create it manually.
+
+ [see - Configuration Script Sample]
+8. Driver will automatically load and configure at next boot time.
+
+Compiling the Driver
+====================
+In Linux, NIC drivers are most commonly configured as loadable modules.
+The approach of building a monolithic kernel has become obsolete. The driver
+can be compiled as part of a monolithic kernel, but is strongly discouraged.
+The remainder of this section assumes the driver is built as a loadable module.
+In the Linux environment, it is a good idea to rebuild the driver from the
+source instead of relying on a precompiled version. This approach provides
+better reliability since a precompiled driver might depend on libraries or
+kernel features that are not present in a given Linux installation.
+
+The 3 files necessary to build Linux device driver are dl2k.c, dl2k.h and
+Makefile. To compile, the Linux installation must include the gcc compiler,
+the kernel source, and the kernel headers. The Linux driver supports Linux
+Kernels 2.4.7. Copy the files to a directory and enter the following command
+to compile and link the driver:
+
+CD-ROM drive
+------------
+
+::
+
+ [root@XXX /] mkdir cdrom
+ [root@XXX /] mount -r -t iso9660 -o conv=auto /dev/cdrom /cdrom
+ [root@XXX /] cd root
+ [root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k
+ [root@XXX /root] cd dl2k
+ [root@XXX dl2k] cp /cdrom/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k
+ [root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz
+ [root@XXX dl2k] make all
+
+Floppy disc drive
+-----------------
+
+::
+
+ [root@XXX /] cd root
+ [root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k
+ [root@XXX /root] cd dl2k
+ [root@XXX dl2k] mcopy a:/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k
+ [root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz
+ [root@XXX dl2k] make all
+
+Installing the Driver
+=====================
+
+Manual Installation
+-------------------
+
+ Once the driver has been compiled, it must be loaded, enabled, and bound
+ to a protocol stack in order to establish network connectivity. To load a
+ module enter the command::
+
+ insmod dl2k.o
+
+ or::
+
+ insmod dl2k.o <optional parameter> ; add parameter
+
+---------------------------------------------------------
+
+ example::
+
+ insmod dl2k.o media=100mbps_hd
+
+ or::
+
+ insmod dl2k.o media=3
+
+ or::
+
+ insmod dl2k.o media=3,2 ; for 2 cards
+
+---------------------------------------------------------
+
+ Please reference the list of the command line parameters supported by
+ the Linux device driver below.
+
+ The insmod command only loads the driver and gives it a name of the form
+ eth0, eth1, etc. To bring the NIC into an operational state,
+ it is necessary to issue the following command::
+
+ ifconfig eth0 up
+
+ Finally, to bind the driver to the active protocol (e.g., TCP/IP with
+ Linux), enter the following command::
+
+ ifup eth0
+
+ Note that this is meaningful only if the system can find a configuration
+ script that contains the necessary network information. A sample will be
+ given in the next paragraph.
+
+ The commands to unload a driver are as follows::
+
+ ifdown eth0
+ ifconfig eth0 down
+ rmmod dl2k.o
+
+ The following are the commands to list the currently loaded modules and
+ to see the current network configuration::
+
+ lsmod
+ ifconfig
+
+
+Automated Installation
+----------------------
+ This section describes how to install the driver such that it is
+ automatically loaded and configured at boot time. The following description
+ is based on a Red Hat 6.0/7.0 distribution, but it can easily be ported to
+ other distributions as well.
+
+Red Hat v6.x/v7.x
+-----------------
+ 1. Copy dl2k.o to the network modules directory, typically
+ /lib/modules/2.x.x-xx/net or /lib/modules/2.x.x/kernel/drivers/net.
+ 2. Locate the boot module configuration file, most commonly in the
+ /etc/modprobe.d/ directory. Add the following lines::
+
+ alias ethx dl2k
+ options dl2k <optional parameters>
+
+ where ethx will be eth0 if the NIC is the only ethernet adapter, eth1 if
+ one other ethernet adapter is installed, etc. Refer to the table in the
+ previous section for the list of optional parameters.
+ 3. Locate the network configuration scripts, normally the
+ /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts directory, and create a configuration
+ script named ifcfg-ethx that contains network information.
+ 4. Note that for most Linux distributions, Red Hat included, a configuration
+ utility with a graphical user interface is provided to perform steps 2
+ and 3 above.
+
+
+Parameter Description
+=====================
+You can install this driver without any additional parameter. However, if you
+are going to have extensive functions then it is necessary to set extra
+parameter. Below is a list of the command line parameters supported by the
+Linux device
+driver.
+
+
+=============================== ==============================================
+mtu=packet_size Specifies the maximum packet size. default
+ is 1500.
+
+media=media_type Specifies the media type the NIC operates at.
+ autosense Autosensing active media.
+
+ =========== =========================
+ 10mbps_hd 10Mbps half duplex.
+ 10mbps_fd 10Mbps full duplex.
+ 100mbps_hd 100Mbps half duplex.
+ 100mbps_fd 100Mbps full duplex.
+ 1000mbps_fd 1000Mbps full duplex.
+ 1000mbps_hd 1000Mbps half duplex.
+ 0 Autosensing active media.
+ 1 10Mbps half duplex.
+ 2 10Mbps full duplex.
+ 3 100Mbps half duplex.
+ 4 100Mbps full duplex.
+ 5 1000Mbps half duplex.
+ 6 1000Mbps full duplex.
+ =========== =========================
+
+ By default, the NIC operates at autosense.
+ 1000mbps_fd and 1000mbps_hd types are only
+ available for fiber adapter.
+
+vlan=n Specifies the VLAN ID. If vlan=0, the
+ Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) function is
+ disable.
+
+jumbo=[0|1] Specifies the jumbo frame support. If jumbo=1,
+ the NIC accept jumbo frames. By default, this
+ function is disabled.
+ Jumbo frame usually improve the performance
+ int gigabit.
+ This feature need jumbo frame compatible
+ remote.
+
+rx_coalesce=m Number of rx frame handled each interrupt.
+rx_timeout=n Rx DMA wait time for an interrupt.
+ If set rx_coalesce > 0, hardware only assert
+ an interrupt for m frames. Hardware won't
+ assert rx interrupt until m frames received or
+ reach timeout of n * 640 nano seconds.
+ Set proper rx_coalesce and rx_timeout can
+ reduce congestion collapse and overload which
+ has been a bottleneck for high speed network.
+
+ For example, rx_coalesce=10 rx_timeout=800.
+ that is, hardware assert only 1 interrupt
+ for 10 frames received or timeout of 512 us.
+
+tx_coalesce=n Number of tx frame handled each interrupt.
+ Set n > 1 can reduce the interrupts
+ congestion usually lower performance of
+ high speed network card. Default is 16.
+
+tx_flow=[1|0] Specifies the Tx flow control. If tx_flow=0,
+ the Tx flow control disable else driver
+ autodetect.
+rx_flow=[1|0] Specifies the Rx flow control. If rx_flow=0,
+ the Rx flow control enable else driver
+ autodetect.
+=============================== ==============================================
+
+
+Configuration Script Sample
+===========================
+Here is a sample of a simple configuration script::
+
+ DEVICE=eth0
+ USERCTL=no
+ ONBOOT=yes
+ POOTPROTO=none
+ BROADCAST=207.200.5.255
+ NETWORK=207.200.5.0
+ NETMASK=255.255.255.0
+ IPADDR=207.200.5.2
+
+
+Troubleshooting
+===============
+Q1. Source files contain ^ M behind every line.
+
+ Make sure all files are Unix file format (no LF). Try the following
+ shell command to convert files::
+
+ cat dl2k.c | col -b > dl2k.tmp
+ mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c
+
+ OR::
+
+ cat dl2k.c | tr -d "\r" > dl2k.tmp
+ mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c
+
+Q2: Could not find header files (``*.h``)?
+
+ To compile the driver, you need kernel header files. After
+ installing the kernel source, the header files are usually located in
+ /usr/src/linux/include, which is the default include directory configured
+ in Makefile. For some distributions, there is a copy of header files in
+ /usr/src/include/linux and /usr/src/include/asm, that you can change the
+ INCLUDEDIR in Makefile to /usr/include without installing kernel source.
+
+ Note that RH 7.0 didn't provide correct header files in /usr/include,
+ including those files will make a wrong version driver.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..241c6c6f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,269 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==============================
+The QorIQ DPAA Ethernet Driver
+==============================
+
+Authors:
+- Madalin Bucur <madalin.bucur@nxp.com>
+- Camelia Groza <camelia.groza@nxp.com>
+
+.. Contents
+
+ - DPAA Ethernet Overview
+ - DPAA Ethernet Supported SoCs
+ - Configuring DPAA Ethernet in your kernel
+ - DPAA Ethernet Frame Processing
+ - DPAA Ethernet Features
+ - DPAA IRQ Affinity and Receive Side Scaling
+ - Debugging
+
+DPAA Ethernet Overview
+======================
+
+DPAA stands for Data Path Acceleration Architecture and it is a
+set of networking acceleration IPs that are available on several
+generations of SoCs, both on PowerPC and ARM64.
+
+The Freescale DPAA architecture consists of a series of hardware blocks
+that support Ethernet connectivity. The Ethernet driver depends upon the
+following drivers in the Linux kernel:
+
+ - Peripheral Access Memory Unit (PAMU) (* needed only for PPC platforms)
+ drivers/iommu/fsl_*
+ - Frame Manager (FMan)
+ drivers/net/ethernet/freescale/fman
+ - Queue Manager (QMan), Buffer Manager (BMan)
+ drivers/soc/fsl/qbman
+
+A simplified view of the dpaa_eth interfaces mapped to FMan MACs::
+
+ dpaa_eth /eth0\ ... /ethN\
+ driver | | | |
+ ------------- ---- ----------- ---- -------------
+ -Ports / Tx Rx \ ... / Tx Rx \
+ FMan | | | |
+ -MACs | MAC0 | | MACN |
+ / dtsec0 \ ... / dtsecN \ (or tgec)
+ / \ / \(or memac)
+ --------- -------------- --- -------------- ---------
+ FMan, FMan Port, FMan SP, FMan MURAM drivers
+ ---------------------------------------------------------
+ FMan HW blocks: MURAM, MACs, Ports, SP
+ ---------------------------------------------------------
+
+The dpaa_eth relation to the QMan, BMan and FMan::
+
+ ________________________________
+ dpaa_eth / eth0 \
+ driver / \
+ --------- -^- -^- -^- --- ---------
+ QMan driver / \ / \ / \ \ / | BMan |
+ |Rx | |Rx | |Tx | |Tx | | driver |
+ --------- |Dfl| |Err| |Cnf| |FQs| | |
+ QMan HW |FQ | |FQ | |FQs| | | | |
+ / \ / \ / \ \ / | |
+ --------- --- --- --- -v- ---------
+ | FMan QMI | |
+ | FMan HW FMan BMI | BMan HW |
+ ----------------------- --------
+
+where the acronyms used above (and in the code) are:
+
+=============== ===========================================================
+DPAA Data Path Acceleration Architecture
+FMan DPAA Frame Manager
+QMan DPAA Queue Manager
+BMan DPAA Buffers Manager
+QMI QMan interface in FMan
+BMI BMan interface in FMan
+FMan SP FMan Storage Profiles
+MURAM Multi-user RAM in FMan
+FQ QMan Frame Queue
+Rx Dfl FQ default reception FQ
+Rx Err FQ Rx error frames FQ
+Tx Cnf FQ Tx confirmation FQs
+Tx FQs transmission frame queues
+dtsec datapath three speed Ethernet controller (10/100/1000 Mbps)
+tgec ten gigabit Ethernet controller (10 Gbps)
+memac multirate Ethernet MAC (10/100/1000/10000)
+=============== ===========================================================
+
+DPAA Ethernet Supported SoCs
+============================
+
+The DPAA drivers enable the Ethernet controllers present on the following SoCs:
+
+PPC
+- P1023
+- P2041
+- P3041
+- P4080
+- P5020
+- P5040
+- T1023
+- T1024
+- T1040
+- T1042
+- T2080
+- T4240
+- B4860
+
+ARM
+- LS1043A
+- LS1046A
+
+Configuring DPAA Ethernet in your kernel
+========================================
+
+To enable the DPAA Ethernet driver, the following Kconfig options are required::
+
+ # common for arch/arm64 and arch/powerpc platforms
+ CONFIG_FSL_DPAA=y
+ CONFIG_FSL_FMAN=y
+ CONFIG_FSL_DPAA_ETH=y
+ CONFIG_FSL_XGMAC_MDIO=y
+
+ # for arch/powerpc only
+ CONFIG_FSL_PAMU=y
+
+ # common options needed for the PHYs used on the RDBs
+ CONFIG_VITESSE_PHY=y
+ CONFIG_REALTEK_PHY=y
+ CONFIG_AQUANTIA_PHY=y
+
+DPAA Ethernet Frame Processing
+==============================
+
+On Rx, buffers for the incoming frames are retrieved from the buffers found
+in the dedicated interface buffer pool. The driver initializes and seeds these
+with one page buffers.
+
+On Tx, all transmitted frames are returned to the driver through Tx
+confirmation frame queues. The driver is then responsible for freeing the
+buffers. In order to do this properly, a backpointer is added to the buffer
+before transmission that points to the skb. When the buffer returns to the
+driver on a confirmation FQ, the skb can be correctly consumed.
+
+DPAA Ethernet Features
+======================
+
+Currently the DPAA Ethernet driver enables the basic features required for
+a Linux Ethernet driver. The support for advanced features will be added
+gradually.
+
+The driver has Rx and Tx checksum offloading for UDP and TCP. Currently the Rx
+checksum offload feature is enabled by default and cannot be controlled through
+ethtool. Also, rx-flow-hash and rx-hashing was added. The addition of RSS
+provides a big performance boost for the forwarding scenarios, allowing
+different traffic flows received by one interface to be processed by different
+CPUs in parallel.
+
+The driver has support for multiple prioritized Tx traffic classes. Priorities
+range from 0 (lowest) to 3 (highest). These are mapped to HW workqueues with
+strict priority levels. Each traffic class contains NR_CPU TX queues. By
+default, only one traffic class is enabled and the lowest priority Tx queues
+are used. Higher priority traffic classes can be enabled with the mqprio
+qdisc. For example, all four traffic classes are enabled on an interface with
+the following command. Furthermore, skb priority levels are mapped to traffic
+classes as follows:
+
+ * priorities 0 to 3 - traffic class 0 (low priority)
+ * priorities 4 to 7 - traffic class 1 (medium-low priority)
+ * priorities 8 to 11 - traffic class 2 (medium-high priority)
+ * priorities 12 to 15 - traffic class 3 (high priority)
+
+::
+
+ tc qdisc add dev <int> root handle 1: \
+ mqprio num_tc 4 map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 hw 1
+
+DPAA IRQ Affinity and Receive Side Scaling
+==========================================
+
+Traffic coming on the DPAA Rx queues or on the DPAA Tx confirmation
+queues is seen by the CPU as ingress traffic on a certain portal.
+The DPAA QMan portal interrupts are affined each to a certain CPU.
+The same portal interrupt services all the QMan portal consumers.
+
+By default the DPAA Ethernet driver enables RSS, making use of the
+DPAA FMan Parser and Keygen blocks to distribute traffic on 128
+hardware frame queues using a hash on IP v4/v6 source and destination
+and L4 source and destination ports, in present in the received frame.
+When RSS is disabled, all traffic received by a certain interface is
+received on the default Rx frame queue. The default DPAA Rx frame
+queues are configured to put the received traffic into a pool channel
+that allows any available CPU portal to dequeue the ingress traffic.
+The default frame queues have the HOLDACTIVE option set, ensuring that
+traffic bursts from a certain queue are serviced by the same CPU.
+This ensures a very low rate of frame reordering. A drawback of this
+is that only one CPU at a time can service the traffic received by a
+certain interface when RSS is not enabled.
+
+To implement RSS, the DPAA Ethernet driver allocates an extra set of
+128 Rx frame queues that are configured to dedicated channels, in a
+round-robin manner. The mapping of the frame queues to CPUs is now
+hardcoded, there is no indirection table to move traffic for a certain
+FQ (hash result) to another CPU. The ingress traffic arriving on one
+of these frame queues will arrive at the same portal and will always
+be processed by the same CPU. This ensures intra-flow order preservation
+and workload distribution for multiple traffic flows.
+
+RSS can be turned off for a certain interface using ethtool, i.e.::
+
+ # ethtool -N fm1-mac9 rx-flow-hash tcp4 ""
+
+To turn it back on, one needs to set rx-flow-hash for tcp4/6 or udp4/6::
+
+ # ethtool -N fm1-mac9 rx-flow-hash udp4 sfdn
+
+There is no independent control for individual protocols, any command
+run for one of tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6 is
+going to control the rx-flow-hashing for all protocols on that interface.
+
+Besides using the FMan Keygen computed hash for spreading traffic on the
+128 Rx FQs, the DPAA Ethernet driver also sets the skb hash value when
+the NETIF_F_RXHASH feature is on (active by default). This can be turned
+on or off through ethtool, i.e.::
+
+ # ethtool -K fm1-mac9 rx-hashing off
+ # ethtool -k fm1-mac9 | grep hash
+ receive-hashing: off
+ # ethtool -K fm1-mac9 rx-hashing on
+ Actual changes:
+ receive-hashing: on
+ # ethtool -k fm1-mac9 | grep hash
+ receive-hashing: on
+
+Please note that Rx hashing depends upon the rx-flow-hashing being on
+for that interface - turning off rx-flow-hashing will also disable the
+rx-hashing (without ethtool reporting it as off as that depends on the
+NETIF_F_RXHASH feature flag).
+
+Debugging
+=========
+
+The following statistics are exported for each interface through ethtool:
+
+ - interrupt count per CPU
+ - Rx packets count per CPU
+ - Tx packets count per CPU
+ - Tx confirmed packets count per CPU
+ - Tx S/G frames count per CPU
+ - Tx error count per CPU
+ - Rx error count per CPU
+ - Rx error count per type
+ - congestion related statistics:
+
+ - congestion status
+ - time spent in congestion
+ - number of time the device entered congestion
+ - dropped packets count per cause
+
+The driver also exports the following information in sysfs:
+
+ - the FQ IDs for each FQ type
+ /sys/devices/platform/soc/<addr>.fman/<addr>.ethernet/dpaa-ethernet.<id>/net/fm<nr>-mac<nr>/fqids
+
+ - the ID of the buffer pool in use
+ /sys/devices/platform/soc/<addr>.fman/<addr>.ethernet/dpaa-ethernet.<id>/net/fm<nr>-mac<nr>/bpids
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e4ebfe62a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+===================================
+DPAA2 DPIO (Data Path I/O) Overview
+===================================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2016-2018 NXP
+
+This document provides an overview of the Freescale DPAA2 DPIO
+drivers
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+A DPAA2 DPIO (Data Path I/O) is a hardware object that provides
+interfaces to enqueue and dequeue frames to/from network interfaces
+and other accelerators. A DPIO also provides hardware buffer
+pool management for network interfaces.
+
+This document provides an overview the Linux DPIO driver, its
+subcomponents, and its APIs.
+
+See
+Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst
+for a general overview of DPAA2 and the general DPAA2 driver architecture
+in Linux.
+
+Driver Overview
+---------------
+
+The DPIO driver is bound to DPIO objects discovered on the fsl-mc bus and
+provides services that:
+
+ A. allow other drivers, such as the Ethernet driver, to enqueue and dequeue
+ frames for their respective objects
+ B. allow drivers to register callbacks for data availability notifications
+ when data becomes available on a queue or channel
+ C. allow drivers to manage hardware buffer pools
+
+The Linux DPIO driver consists of 3 primary components--
+ DPIO object driver-- fsl-mc driver that manages the DPIO object
+
+ DPIO service-- provides APIs to other Linux drivers for services
+
+ QBman portal interface-- sends portal commands, gets responses::
+
+ fsl-mc other
+ bus drivers
+ | |
+ +---+----+ +------+-----+
+ |DPIO obj| |DPIO service|
+ | driver |---| (DPIO) |
+ +--------+ +------+-----+
+ |
+ +------+-----+
+ | QBman |
+ | portal i/f |
+ +------------+
+ |
+ hardware
+
+
+The diagram below shows how the DPIO driver components fit with the other
+DPAA2 Linux driver components::
+
+ +------------+
+ | OS Network |
+ | Stack |
+ +------------+ +------------+
+ | Allocator |. . . . . . . | Ethernet |
+ |(DPMCP,DPBP)| | (DPNI) |
+ +-.----------+ +---+---+----+
+ . . ^ |
+ . . <data avail, | |<enqueue,
+ . . tx confirm> | | dequeue>
+ +-------------+ . | |
+ | DPRC driver | . +--------+ +------------+
+ | (DPRC) | . . |DPIO obj| |DPIO service|
+ +----------+--+ | driver |-| (DPIO) |
+ | +--------+ +------+-----+
+ |<dev add/remove> +------|-----+
+ | | QBman |
+ +----+--------------+ | portal i/f |
+ | MC-bus driver | +------------+
+ | | |
+ | /soc/fsl-mc | |
+ +-------------------+ |
+ |
+ =========================================|=========|========================
+ +-+--DPIO---|-----------+
+ | | |
+ | QBman Portal |
+ +-----------------------+
+
+ ============================================================================
+
+
+DPIO Object Driver (dpio-driver.c)
+----------------------------------
+
+ The dpio-driver component registers with the fsl-mc bus to handle objects of
+ type "dpio". The implementation of probe() handles basic initialization
+ of the DPIO including mapping of the DPIO regions (the QBman SW portal)
+ and initializing interrupts and registering irq handlers. The dpio-driver
+ registers the probed DPIO with dpio-service.
+
+DPIO service (dpio-service.c, dpaa2-io.h)
+------------------------------------------
+
+ The dpio service component provides queuing, notification, and buffers
+ management services to DPAA2 drivers, such as the Ethernet driver. A system
+ will typically allocate 1 DPIO object per CPU to allow queuing operations
+ to happen simultaneously across all CPUs.
+
+ Notification handling
+ dpaa2_io_service_register()
+
+ dpaa2_io_service_deregister()
+
+ dpaa2_io_service_rearm()
+
+ Queuing
+ dpaa2_io_service_pull_fq()
+
+ dpaa2_io_service_pull_channel()
+
+ dpaa2_io_service_enqueue_fq()
+
+ dpaa2_io_service_enqueue_qd()
+
+ dpaa2_io_store_create()
+
+ dpaa2_io_store_destroy()
+
+ dpaa2_io_store_next()
+
+ Buffer pool management
+ dpaa2_io_service_release()
+
+ dpaa2_io_service_acquire()
+
+QBman portal interface (qbman-portal.c)
+---------------------------------------
+
+ The qbman-portal component provides APIs to do the low level hardware
+ bit twiddling for operations such as:
+
+ - initializing Qman software portals
+ - building and sending portal commands
+ - portal interrupt configuration and processing
+
+ The qbman-portal APIs are not public to other drivers, and are
+ only used by dpio-service.
+
+Other (dpaa2-fd.h, dpaa2-global.h)
+----------------------------------
+
+ Frame descriptor and scatter-gather definitions and the APIs used to
+ manipulate them are defined in dpaa2-fd.h.
+
+ Dequeue result struct and parsing APIs are defined in dpaa2-global.h.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..682f3986c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,186 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+===============================
+DPAA2 Ethernet driver
+===============================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2017-2018 NXP
+
+This file provides documentation for the Freescale DPAA2 Ethernet driver.
+
+Supported Platforms
+===================
+This driver provides networking support for Freescale DPAA2 SoCs, e.g.
+LS2080A, LS2088A, LS1088A.
+
+
+Architecture Overview
+=====================
+Unlike regular NICs, in the DPAA2 architecture there is no single hardware block
+representing network interfaces; instead, several separate hardware resources
+concur to provide the networking functionality:
+
+- network interfaces
+- queues, channels
+- buffer pools
+- MAC/PHY
+
+All hardware resources are allocated and configured through the Management
+Complex (MC) portals. MC abstracts most of these resources as DPAA2 objects
+and exposes ABIs through which they can be configured and controlled. A few
+hardware resources, like queues, do not have a corresponding MC object and
+are treated as internal resources of other objects.
+
+For a more detailed description of the DPAA2 architecture and its object
+abstractions see
+*Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst*.
+
+Each Linux net device is built on top of a Datapath Network Interface (DPNI)
+object and uses Buffer Pools (DPBPs), I/O Portals (DPIOs) and Concentrators
+(DPCONs).
+
+Configuration interface::
+
+ -----------------------
+ | DPAA2 Ethernet Driver |
+ -----------------------
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ . . . . . . . . . . . .
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ ---------- ---------- -----------
+ | DPBP API | | DPNI API | | DPCON API |
+ ---------- ---------- -----------
+ . . . software
+ ======= . ========== . ============ . ===================
+ . . . hardware
+ ------------------------------------------
+ | MC hardware portals |
+ ------------------------------------------
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ ------ ------ -------
+ | DPBP | | DPNI | | DPCON |
+ ------ ------ -------
+
+The DPNIs are network interfaces without a direct one-on-one mapping to PHYs.
+DPBPs represent hardware buffer pools. Packet I/O is performed in the context
+of DPCON objects, using DPIO portals for managing and communicating with the
+hardware resources.
+
+Datapath (I/O) interface::
+
+ -----------------------------------------------
+ | DPAA2 Ethernet Driver |
+ -----------------------------------------------
+ | ^ ^ | |
+ | | | | |
+ enqueue| dequeue| data | dequeue| seed |
+ (Tx) | (Rx, TxC)| avail.| request| buffers|
+ | | notify| | |
+ | | | | |
+ V | | V V
+ -----------------------------------------------
+ | DPIO Driver |
+ -----------------------------------------------
+ | | | | | software
+ | | | | | ================
+ | | | | | hardware
+ -----------------------------------------------
+ | I/O hardware portals |
+ -----------------------------------------------
+ | ^ ^ | |
+ | | | | |
+ | | | V |
+ V | ================ V
+ ---------------------- | -------------
+ queues ---------------------- | | Buffer pool |
+ ---------------------- | -------------
+ =======================
+ Channel
+
+Datapath I/O (DPIO) portals provide enqueue and dequeue services, data
+availability notifications and buffer pool management. DPIOs are shared between
+all DPAA2 objects (and implicitly all DPAA2 kernel drivers) that work with data
+frames, but must be affine to the CPUs for the purpose of traffic distribution.
+
+Frames are transmitted and received through hardware frame queues, which can be
+grouped in channels for the purpose of hardware scheduling. The Ethernet driver
+enqueues TX frames on egress queues and after transmission is complete a TX
+confirmation frame is sent back to the CPU.
+
+When frames are available on ingress queues, a data availability notification
+is sent to the CPU; notifications are raised per channel, so even if multiple
+queues in the same channel have available frames, only one notification is sent.
+After a channel fires a notification, is must be explicitly rearmed.
+
+Each network interface can have multiple Rx, Tx and confirmation queues affined
+to CPUs, and one channel (DPCON) for each CPU that services at least one queue.
+DPCONs are used to distribute ingress traffic to different CPUs via the cores'
+affine DPIOs.
+
+The role of hardware buffer pools is storage of ingress frame data. Each network
+interface has a privately owned buffer pool which it seeds with kernel allocated
+buffers.
+
+
+DPNIs are decoupled from PHYs; a DPNI can be connected to a PHY through a DPMAC
+object or to another DPNI through an internal link, but the connection is
+managed by MC and completely transparent to the Ethernet driver.
+
+::
+
+ --------- --------- ---------
+ | eth if1 | | eth if2 | | eth ifn |
+ --------- --------- ---------
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ ---------------------------
+ | DPAA2 Ethernet Driver |
+ ---------------------------
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ ------ ------ ------ -------
+ | DPNI | | DPNI | | DPNI | | DPMAC |----+
+ ------ ------ ------ ------- |
+ | | | | |
+ | | | | -----
+ =========== ================== | PHY |
+ -----
+
+Creating a Network Interface
+============================
+A net device is created for each DPNI object probed on the MC bus. Each DPNI has
+a number of properties which determine the network interface configuration
+options and associated hardware resources.
+
+DPNI objects (and the other DPAA2 objects needed for a network interface) can be
+added to a container on the MC bus in one of two ways: statically, through a
+Datapath Layout Binary file (DPL) that is parsed by MC at boot time; or created
+dynamically at runtime, via the DPAA2 objects APIs.
+
+
+Features & Offloads
+===================
+Hardware checksum offloading is supported for TCP and UDP over IPv4/6 frames.
+The checksum offloads can be independently configured on RX and TX through
+ethtool.
+
+Hardware offload of unicast and multicast MAC filtering is supported on the
+ingress path and permanently enabled.
+
+Scatter-gather frames are supported on both RX and TX paths. On TX, SG support
+is configurable via ethtool; on RX it is always enabled.
+
+The DPAA2 hardware can process jumbo Ethernet frames of up to 10K bytes.
+
+The Ethernet driver defines a static flow hashing scheme that distributes
+traffic based on a 5-tuple key: src IP, dst IP, IP proto, L4 src port,
+L4 dst port. No user configuration is supported for now.
+
+Hardware specific statistics for the network interface as well as some
+non-standard driver stats can be consulted through ethtool -S option.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..62f4a4aff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+===================
+DPAA2 Documentation
+===================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ overview
+ dpio-driver
+ ethernet-driver
+ mac-phy-support
+ switch-driver
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/mac-phy-support.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/mac-phy-support.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..51e6624fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/mac-phy-support.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+=======================
+DPAA2 MAC / PHY support
+=======================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2019 NXP
+
+Overview
+--------
+
+The DPAA2 MAC / PHY support consists of a set of APIs that help DPAA2 network
+drivers (dpaa2-eth, dpaa2-ethsw) interract with the PHY library.
+
+DPAA2 Software Architecture
+---------------------------
+
+Among other DPAA2 objects, the fsl-mc bus exports DPNI objects (abstracting a
+network interface) and DPMAC objects (abstracting a MAC). The dpaa2-eth driver
+probes on the DPNI object and connects to and configures a DPMAC object with
+the help of phylink.
+
+Data connections may be established between a DPNI and a DPMAC, or between two
+DPNIs. Depending on the connection type, the netif_carrier_[on/off] is handled
+directly by the dpaa2-eth driver or by phylink.
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+ Sources of abstracted link state information presented by the MC firmware
+
+ +--------------------------------------+
+ +------------+ +---------+ | xgmac_mdio |
+ | net_device | | phylink |--| +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ |
+ +------------+ +---------+ | | PHY | | PHY | | PHY | | PHY | |
+ | | | +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ |
+ +------------------------------------+ | External MDIO bus |
+ | dpaa2-eth | +--------------------------------------+
+ +------------------------------------+
+ | | Linux
+ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ | | MC firmware
+ | /| V
+ +----------+ / | +----------+
+ | | / | | |
+ | | | | | |
+ | DPNI |<------| |<------| DPMAC |
+ | | | | | |
+ | | \ |<---+ | |
+ +----------+ \ | | +----------+
+ \| |
+ |
+ +--------------------------------------+
+ | MC firmware polling MAC PCS for link |
+ | +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ |
+ | | PCS | | PCS | | PCS | | PCS | |
+ | +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ |
+ | Internal MDIO bus |
+ +--------------------------------------+
+
+
+Depending on an MC firmware configuration setting, each MAC may be in one of two modes:
+
+- DPMAC_LINK_TYPE_FIXED: the link state management is handled exclusively by
+ the MC firmware by polling the MAC PCS. Without the need to register a
+ phylink instance, the dpaa2-eth driver will not bind to the connected dpmac
+ object at all.
+
+- DPMAC_LINK_TYPE_PHY: The MC firmware is left waiting for link state update
+ events, but those are in fact passed strictly between the dpaa2-mac (based on
+ phylink) and its attached net_device driver (dpaa2-eth, dpaa2-ethsw),
+ effectively bypassing the firmware.
+
+Implementation
+--------------
+
+At probe time or when a DPNI's endpoint is dynamically changed, the dpaa2-eth
+is responsible to find out if the peer object is a DPMAC and if this is the
+case, to integrate it with PHYLINK using the dpaa2_mac_connect() API, which
+will do the following:
+
+ - look up the device tree for PHYLINK-compatible of binding (phy-handle)
+ - will create a PHYLINK instance associated with the received net_device
+ - connect to the PHY using phylink_of_phy_connect()
+
+The following phylink_mac_ops callback are implemented:
+
+ - .validate() will populate the supported linkmodes with the MAC capabilities
+ only when the phy_interface_t is RGMII_* (at the moment, this is the only
+ link type supported by the driver).
+
+ - .mac_config() will configure the MAC in the new configuration using the
+ dpmac_set_link_state() MC firmware API.
+
+ - .mac_link_up() / .mac_link_down() will update the MAC link using the same
+ API described above.
+
+At driver unbind() or when the DPNI object is disconnected from the DPMAC, the
+dpaa2-eth driver calls dpaa2_mac_disconnect() which will, in turn, disconnect
+from the PHY and destroy the PHYLINK instance.
+
+In case of a DPNI-DPMAC connection, an 'ip link set dev eth0 up' would start
+the following sequence of operations:
+
+(1) phylink_start() called from .dev_open().
+(2) The .mac_config() and .mac_link_up() callbacks are called by PHYLINK.
+(3) In order to configure the HW MAC, the MC Firmware API
+ dpmac_set_link_state() is called.
+(4) The firmware will eventually setup the HW MAC in the new configuration.
+(5) A netif_carrier_on() call is made directly from PHYLINK on the associated
+ net_device.
+(6) The dpaa2-eth driver handles the LINK_STATE_CHANGE irq in order to
+ enable/disable Rx taildrop based on the pause frame settings.
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ | PHYLINK |-------------->| eth0 |
+ +---------+ (5) +---------+
+ (1) ^ |
+ | |
+ | v (2)
+ +-----------------------------------+
+ | dpaa2-eth |
+ +-----------------------------------+
+ | ^ (6)
+ | |
+ v (3) |
+ +---------+---------------+---------+
+ | DPMAC | | DPNI |
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ | MC Firmware |
+ +-----------------------------------+
+ |
+ |
+ v (4)
+ +-----------------------------------+
+ | HW MAC |
+ +-----------------------------------+
+
+In case of a DPNI-DPNI connection, a usual sequence of operations looks like
+the following:
+
+(1) ip link set dev eth0 up
+(2) The dpni_enable() MC API called on the associated fsl_mc_device.
+(3) ip link set dev eth1 up
+(4) The dpni_enable() MC API called on the associated fsl_mc_device.
+(5) The LINK_STATE_CHANGED irq is received by both instances of the dpaa2-eth
+ driver because now the operational link state is up.
+(6) The netif_carrier_on() is called on the exported net_device from
+ link_state_update().
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ | eth0 | | eth1 |
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ | ^ ^ |
+ | | | |
+ (1) v | (6) (6) | v (3)
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ |dpaa2-eth| |dpaa2-eth|
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ | ^ ^ |
+ | | | |
+ (2) v | (5) (5) | v (4)
+ +---------+---------------+---------+
+ | DPNI | | DPNI |
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ | MC Firmware |
+ +-----------------------------------+
+
+
+Exported API
+------------
+
+Any DPAA2 driver that drivers endpoints of DPMAC objects should service its
+_EVENT_ENDPOINT_CHANGED irq and connect/disconnect from the associated DPMAC
+when necessary using the below listed API::
+
+ - int dpaa2_mac_connect(struct dpaa2_mac *mac);
+ - void dpaa2_mac_disconnect(struct dpaa2_mac *mac);
+
+A phylink integration is necessary only when the partner DPMAC is not of TYPE_FIXED.
+One can check for this condition using the below API::
+
+ - bool dpaa2_mac_is_type_fixed(struct fsl_mc_device *dpmac_dev,struct fsl_mc_io *mc_io);
+
+Before connection to a MAC, the caller must allocate and populate the
+dpaa2_mac structure with the associated net_device, a pointer to the MC portal
+to be used and the actual fsl_mc_device structure of the DPMAC.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..199647729
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,406 @@
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+=========================================================
+DPAA2 (Data Path Acceleration Architecture Gen2) Overview
+=========================================================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2015 Freescale Semiconductor Inc.
+:Copyright: |copy| 2018 NXP
+
+This document provides an overview of the Freescale DPAA2 architecture
+and how it is integrated into the Linux kernel.
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+DPAA2 is a hardware architecture designed for high-speeed network
+packet processing. DPAA2 consists of sophisticated mechanisms for
+processing Ethernet packets, queue management, buffer management,
+autonomous L2 switching, virtual Ethernet bridging, and accelerator
+(e.g. crypto) sharing.
+
+A DPAA2 hardware component called the Management Complex (or MC) manages the
+DPAA2 hardware resources. The MC provides an object-based abstraction for
+software drivers to use the DPAA2 hardware.
+The MC uses DPAA2 hardware resources such as queues, buffer pools, and
+network ports to create functional objects/devices such as network
+interfaces, an L2 switch, or accelerator instances.
+The MC provides memory-mapped I/O command interfaces (MC portals)
+which DPAA2 software drivers use to operate on DPAA2 objects.
+
+The diagram below shows an overview of the DPAA2 resource management
+architecture::
+
+ +--------------------------------------+
+ | OS |
+ | DPAA2 drivers |
+ | | |
+ +-----------------------------|--------+
+ |
+ | (create,discover,connect
+ | config,use,destroy)
+ |
+ DPAA2 |
+ +------------------------| mc portal |-+
+ | | |
+ | +- - - - - - - - - - - - -V- - -+ |
+ | | | |
+ | | Management Complex (MC) | |
+ | | | |
+ | +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -+ |
+ | |
+ | Hardware Hardware |
+ | Resources Objects |
+ | --------- ------- |
+ | -queues -DPRC |
+ | -buffer pools -DPMCP |
+ | -Eth MACs/ports -DPIO |
+ | -network interface -DPNI |
+ | profiles -DPMAC |
+ | -queue portals -DPBP |
+ | -MC portals ... |
+ | ... |
+ | |
+ +--------------------------------------+
+
+
+The MC mediates operations such as create, discover,
+connect, configuration, and destroy. Fast-path operations
+on data, such as packet transmit/receive, are not mediated by
+the MC and are done directly using memory mapped regions in
+DPIO objects.
+
+Overview of DPAA2 Objects
+=========================
+
+The section provides a brief overview of some key DPAA2 objects.
+A simple scenario is described illustrating the objects involved
+in creating a network interfaces.
+
+DPRC (Datapath Resource Container)
+----------------------------------
+
+A DPRC is a container object that holds all the other
+types of DPAA2 objects. In the example diagram below there
+are 8 objects of 5 types (DPMCP, DPIO, DPBP, DPNI, and DPMAC)
+in the container.
+
+::
+
+ +---------------------------------------------------------+
+ | DPRC |
+ | |
+ | +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ |
+ | | DPMCP | | DPIO | | DPBP | | DPNI | | DPMAC | |
+ | +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +---+---+ +---+---+ |
+ | | DPMCP | | DPIO | |
+ | +-------+ +-------+ |
+ | | DPMCP | |
+ | +-------+ |
+ | |
+ +---------------------------------------------------------+
+
+From the point of view of an OS, a DPRC behaves similar to a plug and
+play bus, like PCI. DPRC commands can be used to enumerate the contents
+of the DPRC, discover the hardware objects present (including mappable
+regions and interrupts).
+
+::
+
+ DPRC.1 (bus)
+ |
+ +--+--------+-------+-------+-------+
+ | | | | |
+ DPMCP.1 DPIO.1 DPBP.1 DPNI.1 DPMAC.1
+ DPMCP.2 DPIO.2
+ DPMCP.3
+
+Hardware objects can be created and destroyed dynamically, providing
+the ability to hot plug/unplug objects in and out of the DPRC.
+
+A DPRC has a mappable MMIO region (an MC portal) that can be used
+to send MC commands. It has an interrupt for status events (like
+hotplug).
+All objects in a container share the same hardware "isolation context".
+This means that with respect to an IOMMU the isolation granularity
+is at the DPRC (container) level, not at the individual object
+level.
+
+DPRCs can be defined statically and populated with objects
+via a config file passed to the MC when firmware starts it.
+
+DPAA2 Objects for an Ethernet Network Interface
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+A typical Ethernet NIC is monolithic-- the NIC device contains TX/RX
+queuing mechanisms, configuration mechanisms, buffer management,
+physical ports, and interrupts. DPAA2 uses a more granular approach
+utilizing multiple hardware objects. Each object provides specialized
+functions. Groups of these objects are used by software to provide
+Ethernet network interface functionality. This approach provides
+efficient use of finite hardware resources, flexibility, and
+performance advantages.
+
+The diagram below shows the objects needed for a simple
+network interface configuration on a system with 2 CPUs.
+
+::
+
+ +---+---+ +---+---+
+ CPU0 CPU1
+ +---+---+ +---+---+
+ | |
+ +---+---+ +---+---+
+ DPIO DPIO
+ +---+---+ +---+---+
+ \ /
+ \ /
+ \ /
+ +---+---+
+ DPNI --- DPBP,DPMCP
+ +---+---+
+ |
+ |
+ +---+---+
+ DPMAC
+ +---+---+
+ |
+ port/PHY
+
+Below the objects are described. For each object a brief description
+is provided along with a summary of the kinds of operations the object
+supports and a summary of key resources of the object (MMIO regions
+and IRQs).
+
+DPMAC (Datapath Ethernet MAC)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Represents an Ethernet MAC, a hardware device that connects to an Ethernet
+PHY and allows physical transmission and reception of Ethernet frames.
+
+- MMIO regions: none
+- IRQs: DPNI link change
+- commands: set link up/down, link config, get stats,
+ IRQ config, enable, reset
+
+DPNI (Datapath Network Interface)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Contains TX/RX queues, network interface configuration, and RX buffer pool
+configuration mechanisms. The TX/RX queues are in memory and are identified
+by queue number.
+
+- MMIO regions: none
+- IRQs: link state
+- commands: port config, offload config, queue config,
+ parse/classify config, IRQ config, enable, reset
+
+DPIO (Datapath I/O)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Provides interfaces to enqueue and dequeue
+packets and do hardware buffer pool management operations. The DPAA2
+architecture separates the mechanism to access queues (the DPIO object)
+from the queues themselves. The DPIO provides an MMIO interface to
+enqueue/dequeue packets. To enqueue something a descriptor is written
+to the DPIO MMIO region, which includes the target queue number.
+There will typically be one DPIO assigned to each CPU. This allows all
+CPUs to simultaneously perform enqueue/dequeued operations. DPIOs are
+expected to be shared by different DPAA2 drivers.
+
+- MMIO regions: queue operations, buffer management
+- IRQs: data availability, congestion notification, buffer
+ pool depletion
+- commands: IRQ config, enable, reset
+
+DPBP (Datapath Buffer Pool)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Represents a hardware buffer pool.
+
+- MMIO regions: none
+- IRQs: none
+- commands: enable, reset
+
+DPMCP (Datapath MC Portal)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Provides an MC command portal.
+Used by drivers to send commands to the MC to manage
+objects.
+
+- MMIO regions: MC command portal
+- IRQs: command completion
+- commands: IRQ config, enable, reset
+
+Object Connections
+==================
+Some objects have explicit relationships that must
+be configured:
+
+- DPNI <--> DPMAC
+- DPNI <--> DPNI
+- DPNI <--> L2-switch-port
+
+ A DPNI must be connected to something such as a DPMAC,
+ another DPNI, or L2 switch port. The DPNI connection
+ is made via a DPRC command.
+
+::
+
+ +-------+ +-------+
+ | DPNI | | DPMAC |
+ +---+---+ +---+---+
+ | |
+ +==========+
+
+- DPNI <--> DPBP
+
+ A network interface requires a 'buffer pool' (DPBP
+ object) which provides a list of pointers to memory
+ where received Ethernet data is to be copied. The
+ Ethernet driver configures the DPBPs associated with
+ the network interface.
+
+Interrupts
+==========
+All interrupts generated by DPAA2 objects are message
+interrupts. At the hardware level message interrupts
+generated by devices will normally have 3 components--
+1) a non-spoofable 'device-id' expressed on the hardware
+bus, 2) an address, 3) a data value.
+
+In the case of DPAA2 devices/objects, all objects in the
+same container/DPRC share the same 'device-id'.
+For ARM-based SoC this is the same as the stream ID.
+
+
+DPAA2 Linux Drivers Overview
+============================
+
+This section provides an overview of the Linux kernel drivers for
+DPAA2-- 1) the bus driver and associated "DPAA2 infrastructure"
+drivers and 2) functional object drivers (such as Ethernet).
+
+As described previously, a DPRC is a container that holds the other
+types of DPAA2 objects. It is functionally similar to a plug-and-play
+bus controller.
+Each object in the DPRC is a Linux "device" and is bound to a driver.
+The diagram below shows the Linux drivers involved in a networking
+scenario and the objects bound to each driver. A brief description
+of each driver follows.
+
+::
+
+ +------------+
+ | OS Network |
+ | Stack |
+ +------------+ +------------+
+ | Allocator |. . . . . . . | Ethernet |
+ |(DPMCP,DPBP)| | (DPNI) |
+ +-.----------+ +---+---+----+
+ . . ^ |
+ . . <data avail, | | <enqueue,
+ . . tx confirm> | | dequeue>
+ +-------------+ . | |
+ | DPRC driver | . +---+---V----+ +---------+
+ | (DPRC) | . . . . . .| DPIO driver| | MAC |
+ +----------+--+ | (DPIO) | | (DPMAC) |
+ | +------+-----+ +-----+---+
+ |<dev add/remove> | |
+ | | |
+ +--------+----------+ | +--+---+
+ | MC-bus driver | | | PHY |
+ | | | |driver|
+ | /bus/fsl-mc | | +--+---+
+ +-------------------+ | |
+ | |
+ ========================= HARDWARE =========|=================|======
+ DPIO |
+ | |
+ DPNI---DPBP |
+ | |
+ DPMAC |
+ | |
+ PHY ---------------+
+ ============================================|========================
+
+A brief description of each driver is provided below.
+
+MC-bus driver
+-------------
+The MC-bus driver is a platform driver and is probed from a
+node in the device tree (compatible "fsl,qoriq-mc") passed in by boot
+firmware. It is responsible for bootstrapping the DPAA2 kernel
+infrastructure.
+Key functions include:
+
+- registering a new bus type named "fsl-mc" with the kernel,
+ and implementing bus call-backs (e.g. match/uevent/dev_groups)
+- implementing APIs for DPAA2 driver registration and for device
+ add/remove
+- creates an MSI IRQ domain
+- doing a 'device add' to expose the 'root' DPRC, in turn triggering
+ a bind of the root DPRC to the DPRC driver
+
+The binding for the MC-bus device-tree node can be consulted at
+*Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/fsl,qoriq-mc.txt*.
+The sysfs bind/unbind interfaces for the MC-bus can be consulted at
+*Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-fsl-mc*.
+
+DPRC driver
+-----------
+The DPRC driver is bound to DPRC objects and does runtime management
+of a bus instance. It performs the initial bus scan of the DPRC
+and handles interrupts for container events such as hot plug by
+re-scanning the DPRC.
+
+Allocator
+---------
+Certain objects such as DPMCP and DPBP are generic and fungible,
+and are intended to be used by other drivers. For example,
+the DPAA2 Ethernet driver needs:
+
+- DPMCPs to send MC commands, to configure network interfaces
+- DPBPs for network buffer pools
+
+The allocator driver registers for these allocatable object types
+and those objects are bound to the allocator when the bus is probed.
+The allocator maintains a pool of objects that are available for
+allocation by other DPAA2 drivers.
+
+DPIO driver
+-----------
+The DPIO driver is bound to DPIO objects and provides services that allow
+other drivers such as the Ethernet driver to enqueue and dequeue data for
+their respective objects.
+Key services include:
+
+- data availability notifications
+- hardware queuing operations (enqueue and dequeue of data)
+- hardware buffer pool management
+
+To transmit a packet the Ethernet driver puts data on a queue and
+invokes a DPIO API. For receive, the Ethernet driver registers
+a data availability notification callback. To dequeue a packet
+a DPIO API is used.
+There is typically one DPIO object per physical CPU for optimum
+performance, allowing different CPUs to simultaneously enqueue
+and dequeue data.
+
+The DPIO driver operates on behalf of all DPAA2 drivers
+active in the kernel-- Ethernet, crypto, compression,
+etc.
+
+Ethernet driver
+---------------
+The Ethernet driver is bound to a DPNI and implements the kernel
+interfaces needed to connect the DPAA2 network interface to
+the network stack.
+Each DPNI corresponds to a Linux network interface.
+
+MAC driver
+----------
+An Ethernet PHY is an off-chip, board specific component and is managed
+by the appropriate PHY driver via an mdio bus. The MAC driver
+plays a role of being a proxy between the PHY driver and the
+MC. It does this proxy via the MC commands to a DPMAC object.
+If the PHY driver signals a link change, the MAC driver notifies
+the MC via a DPMAC command. If a network interface is brought
+up or down, the MC notifies the DPMAC driver via an interrupt and
+the driver can take appropriate action.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/switch-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/switch-driver.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8bf411b85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/switch-driver.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+===================
+DPAA2 Switch driver
+===================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2021 NXP
+
+The DPAA2 Switch driver probes on the Datapath Switch (DPSW) object which can
+be instantiated on the following DPAA2 SoCs and their variants: LS2088A and
+LX2160A.
+
+The driver uses the switch device driver model and exposes each switch port as
+a network interface, which can be included in a bridge or used as a standalone
+interface. Traffic switched between ports is offloaded into the hardware.
+
+The DPSW can have ports connected to DPNIs or to DPMACs for external access.
+::
+
+ [ethA] [ethB] [ethC] [ethD] [ethE] [ethF]
+ : : : : : :
+ : : : : : :
+ [dpaa2-eth] [dpaa2-eth] [ dpaa2-switch ]
+ : : : : : : kernel
+ =============================================================================
+ : : : : : : hardware
+ [DPNI] [DPNI] [============= DPSW =================]
+ | | | | | |
+ | ---------- | [DPMAC] [DPMAC]
+ ------------------------------- | |
+ | |
+ [PHY] [PHY]
+
+Creating an Ethernet Switch
+===========================
+
+The dpaa2-switch driver probes on DPSW devices found on the fsl-mc bus. These
+devices can be either created statically through the boot time configuration
+file - DataPath Layout (DPL) - or at runtime using the DPAA2 object APIs
+(incorporated already into the restool userspace tool).
+
+At the moment, the dpaa2-switch driver imposes the following restrictions on
+the DPSW object that it will probe:
+
+ * The minimum number of FDBs should be at least equal to the number of switch
+ interfaces. This is necessary so that separation of switch ports can be
+ done, ie when not under a bridge, each switch port will have its own FDB.
+ ::
+
+ fsl_dpaa2_switch dpsw.0: The number of FDBs is lower than the number of ports, cannot probe
+
+ * Both the broadcast and flooding configuration should be per FDB. This
+ enables the driver to restrict the broadcast and flooding domains of each
+ FDB depending on the switch ports that are sharing it (aka are under the
+ same bridge).
+ ::
+
+ fsl_dpaa2_switch dpsw.0: Flooding domain is not per FDB, cannot probe
+ fsl_dpaa2_switch dpsw.0: Broadcast domain is not per FDB, cannot probe
+
+ * The control interface of the switch should not be disabled
+ (DPSW_OPT_CTRL_IF_DIS not passed as a create time option). Without the
+ control interface, the driver is not capable to provide proper Rx/Tx traffic
+ support on the switch port netdevices.
+ ::
+
+ fsl_dpaa2_switch dpsw.0: Control Interface is disabled, cannot probe
+
+Besides the configuration of the actual DPSW object, the dpaa2-switch driver
+will need the following DPAA2 objects:
+
+ * 1 DPMCP - A Management Command Portal object is needed for any interraction
+ with the MC firmware.
+
+ * 1 DPBP - A Buffer Pool is used for seeding buffers intended for the Rx path
+ on the control interface.
+
+ * Access to at least one DPIO object (Software Portal) is needed for any
+ enqueue/dequeue operation to be performed on the control interface queues.
+ The DPIO object will be shared, no need for a private one.
+
+Switching features
+==================
+
+The driver supports the configuration of L2 forwarding rules in hardware for
+port bridging as well as standalone usage of the independent switch interfaces.
+
+The hardware is not configurable with respect to VLAN awareness, thus any DPAA2
+switch port should be used only in usecases with a VLAN aware bridge::
+
+ $ ip link add dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1
+
+ $ ip link add dev br1 type bridge
+ $ ip link set dev ethX master br1
+ Error: fsl_dpaa2_switch: Cannot join a VLAN-unaware bridge
+
+Topology and loop detection through STP is supported when ``stp_state 1`` is
+used at bridge create ::
+
+ $ ip link add dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1 stp_state 1
+
+L2 FDB manipulation (add/delete/dump) is supported.
+
+HW FDB learning can be configured on each switch port independently through
+bridge commands. When the HW learning is disabled, a fast age procedure will be
+run and any previously learnt addresses will be removed.
+::
+
+ $ bridge link set dev ethX learning off
+ $ bridge link set dev ethX learning on
+
+Restricting the unknown unicast and multicast flooding domain is supported, but
+not independently of each other::
+
+ $ ip link set dev ethX type bridge_slave flood off mcast_flood off
+ $ ip link set dev ethX type bridge_slave flood off mcast_flood on
+ Error: fsl_dpaa2_switch: Cannot configure multicast flooding independently of unicast.
+
+Broadcast flooding on a switch port can be disabled/enabled through the brport sysfs::
+
+ $ echo 0 > /sys/bus/fsl-mc/devices/dpsw.Y/net/ethX/brport/broadcast_flood
+
+Offloads
+========
+
+Routing actions (redirect, trap, drop)
+--------------------------------------
+
+The DPAA2 switch is able to offload flow-based redirection of packets making
+use of ACL tables. Shared filter blocks are supported by sharing a single ACL
+table between multiple ports.
+
+The following flow keys are supported:
+
+ * Ethernet: dst_mac/src_mac
+ * IPv4: dst_ip/src_ip/ip_proto/tos
+ * VLAN: vlan_id/vlan_prio/vlan_tpid/vlan_dei
+ * L4: dst_port/src_port
+
+Also, the matchall filter can be used to redirect the entire traffic received
+on a port.
+
+As per flow actions, the following are supported:
+
+ * drop
+ * mirred egress redirect
+ * trap
+
+Each ACL entry (filter) can be setup with only one of the listed
+actions.
+
+Example 1: send frames received on eth4 with a SA of 00:01:02:03:04:05 to the
+CPU::
+
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth4 clsact
+ $ tc filter add dev eth4 ingress flower src_mac 00:01:02:03:04:05 skip_sw action trap
+
+Example 2: drop frames received on eth4 with VID 100 and PCP of 3::
+
+ $ tc filter add dev eth4 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_id 100 vlan_prio 3 action drop
+
+Example 3: redirect all frames received on eth4 to eth1::
+
+ $ tc filter add dev eth4 ingress matchall action mirred egress redirect dev eth1
+
+Example 4: Use a single shared filter block on both eth5 and eth6::
+
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth5 ingress_block 1 clsact
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth6 ingress_block 1 clsact
+ $ tc filter add block 1 ingress flower dst_mac 00:01:02:03:04:04 skip_sw \
+ action trap
+ $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol ipv4 flower src_ip 192.168.1.1 skip_sw \
+ action mirred egress redirect dev eth3
+
+Mirroring
+~~~~~~~~~
+
+The DPAA2 switch supports only per port mirroring and per VLAN mirroring.
+Adding mirroring filters in shared blocks is also supported.
+
+When using the tc-flower classifier with the 802.1q protocol, only the
+''vlan_id'' key will be accepted. Mirroring based on any other fields from the
+802.1q protocol will be rejected::
+
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth8 ingress_block 1 clsact
+ $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_prio 3 action mirred egress mirror dev eth6
+ Error: fsl_dpaa2_switch: Only matching on VLAN ID supported.
+ We have an error talking to the kernel
+
+If a mirroring VLAN filter is requested on a port, the VLAN must to be
+installed on the switch port in question either using ''bridge'' or by creating
+a VLAN upper device if the switch port is used as a standalone interface::
+
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth8 ingress_block 1 clsact
+ $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_id 200 action mirred egress mirror dev eth6
+ Error: VLAN must be installed on the switch port.
+ We have an error talking to the kernel
+
+ $ bridge vlan add vid 200 dev eth8
+ $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_id 200 action mirred egress mirror dev eth6
+
+ $ ip link add link eth8 name eth8.200 type vlan id 200
+ $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_id 200 action mirred egress mirror dev eth6
+
+Also, it should be noted that the mirrored traffic will be subject to the same
+egress restrictions as any other traffic. This means that when a mirrored
+packet will reach the mirror port, if the VLAN found in the packet is not
+installed on the port it will get dropped.
+
+The DPAA2 switch supports only a single mirroring destination, thus multiple
+mirror rules can be installed but their ''to'' port has to be the same::
+
+ $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_id 200 action mirred egress mirror dev eth6
+ $ tc filter add block 1 ingress protocol 802.1q flower skip_sw vlan_id 100 action mirred egress mirror dev eth7
+ Error: fsl_dpaa2_switch: Multiple mirror ports not supported.
+ We have an error talking to the kernel
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/gianfar.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/gianfar.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9c4a91d38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/gianfar.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===========================
+The Gianfar Ethernet Driver
+===========================
+
+:Author: Andy Fleming <afleming@freescale.com>
+:Updated: 2005-07-28
+
+
+Checksum Offloading
+===================
+
+The eTSEC controller (first included in parts from late 2005 like
+the 8548) has the ability to perform TCP, UDP, and IP checksums
+in hardware. The Linux kernel only offloads the TCP and UDP
+checksums (and always performs the pseudo header checksums), so
+the driver only supports checksumming for TCP/IP and UDP/IP
+packets. Use ethtool to enable or disable this feature for RX
+and TX.
+
+VLAN
+====
+
+In order to use VLAN, please consult Linux documentation on
+configuring VLANs. The gianfar driver supports hardware insertion and
+extraction of VLAN headers, but not filtering. Filtering will be
+done by the kernel.
+
+Multicasting
+============
+
+The gianfar driver supports using the group hash table on the
+TSEC (and the extended hash table on the eTSEC) for multicast
+filtering. On the eTSEC, the exact-match MAC registers are used
+before the hash tables. See Linux documentation on how to join
+multicast groups.
+
+Padding
+=======
+
+The gianfar driver supports padding received frames with 2 bytes
+to align the IP header to a 16-byte boundary, when supported by
+hardware.
+
+Ethtool
+=======
+
+The gianfar driver supports the use of ethtool for many
+configuration options. You must run ethtool only on currently
+open interfaces. See ethtool documentation for details.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/google/gve.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/google/gve.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6d73ee78f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/google/gve.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+==============================================================
+Linux kernel driver for Compute Engine Virtual Ethernet (gve):
+==============================================================
+
+Supported Hardware
+===================
+The GVE driver binds to a single PCI device id used by the virtual
+Ethernet device found in some Compute Engine VMs.
+
++--------------+----------+---------+
+|Field | Value | Comments|
++==============+==========+=========+
+|Vendor ID | `0x1AE0` | Google |
++--------------+----------+---------+
+|Device ID | `0x0042` | |
++--------------+----------+---------+
+|Sub-vendor ID | `0x1AE0` | Google |
++--------------+----------+---------+
+|Sub-device ID | `0x0058` | |
++--------------+----------+---------+
+|Revision ID | `0x0` | |
++--------------+----------+---------+
+|Device Class | `0x200` | Ethernet|
++--------------+----------+---------+
+
+PCI Bars
+========
+The gVNIC PCI device exposes three 32-bit memory BARS:
+- Bar0 - Device configuration and status registers.
+- Bar1 - MSI-X vector table
+- Bar2 - IRQ, RX and TX doorbells
+
+Device Interactions
+===================
+The driver interacts with the device in the following ways:
+ - Registers
+ - A block of MMIO registers
+ - See gve_register.h for more detail
+ - Admin Queue
+ - See description below
+ - Reset
+ - At any time the device can be reset
+ - Interrupts
+ - See supported interrupts below
+ - Transmit and Receive Queues
+ - See description below
+
+Descriptor Formats
+------------------
+GVE supports two descriptor formats: GQI and DQO. These two formats have
+entirely different descriptors, which will be described below.
+
+Registers
+---------
+All registers are MMIO.
+
+The registers are used for initializing and configuring the device as well as
+querying device status in response to management interrupts.
+
+Endianness
+----------
+- Admin Queue messages and registers are all Big Endian.
+- GQI descriptors and datapath registers are Big Endian.
+- DQO descriptors and datapath registers are Little Endian.
+
+Admin Queue (AQ)
+----------------
+The Admin Queue is a PAGE_SIZE memory block, treated as an array of AQ
+commands, used by the driver to issue commands to the device and set up
+resources.The driver and the device maintain a count of how many commands
+have been submitted and executed. To issue AQ commands, the driver must do
+the following (with proper locking):
+
+1) Copy new commands into next available slots in the AQ array
+2) Increment its counter by he number of new commands
+3) Write the counter into the GVE_ADMIN_QUEUE_DOORBELL register
+4) Poll the ADMIN_QUEUE_EVENT_COUNTER register until it equals
+ the value written to the doorbell, or until a timeout.
+
+The device will update the status field in each AQ command reported as
+executed through the ADMIN_QUEUE_EVENT_COUNTER register.
+
+Device Resets
+-------------
+A device reset is triggered by writing 0x0 to the AQ PFN register.
+This causes the device to release all resources allocated by the
+driver, including the AQ itself.
+
+Interrupts
+----------
+The following interrupts are supported by the driver:
+
+Management Interrupt
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The management interrupt is used by the device to tell the driver to
+look at the GVE_DEVICE_STATUS register.
+
+The handler for the management irq simply queues the service task in
+the workqueue to check the register and acks the irq.
+
+Notification Block Interrupts
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The notification block interrupts are used to tell the driver to poll
+the queues associated with that interrupt.
+
+The handler for these irqs schedule the napi for that block to run
+and poll the queues.
+
+GQI Traffic Queues
+------------------
+GQI queues are composed of a descriptor ring and a buffer and are assigned to a
+notification block.
+
+The descriptor rings are power-of-two-sized ring buffers consisting of
+fixed-size descriptors. They advance their head pointer using a __be32
+doorbell located in Bar2. The tail pointers are advanced by consuming
+descriptors in-order and updating a __be32 counter. Both the doorbell
+and the counter overflow to zero.
+
+Each queue's buffers must be registered in advance with the device as a
+queue page list, and packet data can only be put in those pages.
+
+Transmit
+~~~~~~~~
+gve maps the buffers for transmit rings into a FIFO and copies the packets
+into the FIFO before sending them to the NIC.
+
+Receive
+~~~~~~~
+The buffers for receive rings are put into a data ring that is the same
+length as the descriptor ring and the head and tail pointers advance over
+the rings together.
+
+DQO Traffic Queues
+------------------
+- Every TX and RX queue is assigned a notification block.
+
+- TX and RX buffers queues, which send descriptors to the device, use MMIO
+ doorbells to notify the device of new descriptors.
+
+- RX and TX completion queues, which receive descriptors from the device, use a
+ "generation bit" to know when a descriptor was populated by the device. The
+ driver initializes all bits with the "current generation". The device will
+ populate received descriptors with the "next generation" which is inverted
+ from the current generation. When the ring wraps, the current/next generation
+ are swapped.
+
+- It's the driver's responsibility to ensure that the RX and TX completion
+ queues are not overrun. This can be accomplished by limiting the number of
+ descriptors posted to HW.
+
+- TX packets have a 16 bit completion_tag and RX buffers have a 16 bit
+ buffer_id. These will be returned on the TX completion and RX queues
+ respectively to let the driver know which packet/buffer was completed.
+
+Transmit
+~~~~~~~~
+A packet's buffers are DMA mapped for the device to access before transmission.
+After the packet was successfully transmitted, the buffers are unmapped.
+
+Receive
+~~~~~~~
+The driver posts fixed sized buffers to HW on the RX buffer queue. The packet
+received on the associated RX queue may span multiple descriptors.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/huawei/hinic.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/huawei/hinic.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..867ac8f4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/huawei/hinic.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============================================================
+Linux Kernel Driver for Huawei Intelligent NIC(HiNIC) family
+============================================================
+
+Overview:
+=========
+HiNIC is a network interface card for the Data Center Area.
+
+The driver supports a range of link-speed devices (10GbE, 25GbE, 40GbE, etc.).
+The driver supports also a negotiated and extendable feature set.
+
+Some HiNIC devices support SR-IOV. This driver is used for Physical Function
+(PF).
+
+HiNIC devices support MSI-X interrupt vector for each Tx/Rx queue and
+adaptive interrupt moderation.
+
+HiNIC devices support also various offload features such as checksum offload,
+TCP Transmit Segmentation Offload(TSO), Receive-Side Scaling(RSS) and
+LRO(Large Receive Offload).
+
+
+Supported PCI vendor ID/device IDs:
+===================================
+
+19e5:1822 - HiNIC PF
+
+
+Driver Architecture and Source Code:
+====================================
+
+hinic_dev - Implement a Logical Network device that is independent from
+specific HW details about HW data structure formats.
+
+hinic_hwdev - Implement the HW details of the device and include the components
+for accessing the PCI NIC.
+
+hinic_hwdev contains the following components:
+===============================================
+
+HW Interface:
+=============
+
+The interface for accessing the pci device (DMA memory and PCI BARs).
+(hinic_hw_if.c, hinic_hw_if.h)
+
+Configuration Status Registers Area that describes the HW Registers on the
+configuration and status BAR0. (hinic_hw_csr.h)
+
+MGMT components:
+================
+
+Asynchronous Event Queues(AEQs) - The event queues for receiving messages from
+the MGMT modules on the cards. (hinic_hw_eqs.c, hinic_hw_eqs.h)
+
+Application Programmable Interface commands(API CMD) - Interface for sending
+MGMT commands to the card. (hinic_hw_api_cmd.c, hinic_hw_api_cmd.h)
+
+Management (MGMT) - the PF to MGMT channel that uses API CMD for sending MGMT
+commands to the card and receives notifications from the MGMT modules on the
+card by AEQs. Also set the addresses of the IO CMDQs in HW.
+(hinic_hw_mgmt.c, hinic_hw_mgmt.h)
+
+IO components:
+==============
+
+Completion Event Queues(CEQs) - The completion Event Queues that describe IO
+tasks that are finished. (hinic_hw_eqs.c, hinic_hw_eqs.h)
+
+Work Queues(WQ) - Contain the memory and operations for use by CMD queues and
+the Queue Pairs. The WQ is a Memory Block in a Page. The Block contains
+pointers to Memory Areas that are the Memory for the Work Queue Elements(WQEs).
+(hinic_hw_wq.c, hinic_hw_wq.h)
+
+Command Queues(CMDQ) - The queues for sending commands for IO management and is
+used to set the QPs addresses in HW. The commands completion events are
+accumulated on the CEQ that is configured to receive the CMDQ completion events.
+(hinic_hw_cmdq.c, hinic_hw_cmdq.h)
+
+Queue Pairs(QPs) - The HW Receive and Send queues for Receiving and Transmitting
+Data. (hinic_hw_qp.c, hinic_hw_qp.h, hinic_hw_qp_ctxt.h)
+
+IO - de/constructs all the IO components. (hinic_hw_io.c, hinic_hw_io.h)
+
+HW device:
+==========
+
+HW device - de/constructs the HW Interface, the MGMT components on the
+initialization of the driver and the IO components on the case of Interface
+UP/DOWN Events. (hinic_hw_dev.c, hinic_hw_dev.h)
+
+
+hinic_dev contains the following components:
+===============================================
+
+PCI ID table - Contains the supported PCI Vendor/Device IDs.
+(hinic_pci_tbl.h)
+
+Port Commands - Send commands to the HW device for port management
+(MAC, Vlan, MTU, ...). (hinic_port.c, hinic_port.h)
+
+Tx Queues - Logical Tx Queues that use the HW Send Queues for transmit.
+The Logical Tx queue is not dependent on the format of the HW Send Queue.
+(hinic_tx.c, hinic_tx.h)
+
+Rx Queues - Logical Rx Queues that use the HW Receive Queues for receive.
+The Logical Rx queue is not dependent on the format of the HW Receive Queue.
+(hinic_rx.c, hinic_rx.h)
+
+hinic_dev - de/constructs the Logical Tx and Rx Queues.
+(hinic_main.c, hinic_dev.h)
+
+
+Miscellaneous
+=============
+
+Common functions that are used by HW and Logical Device.
+(hinic_common.c, hinic_common.h)
+
+
+Support
+=======
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue to
+aviad.krawczyk@huawei.com.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..519690558
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+Ethernet Device Drivers
+=======================
+
+Device drivers for Ethernet and Ethernet-based virtual function devices.
+
+Contents:
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 2
+
+ 3com/3c509
+ 3com/vortex
+ amazon/ena
+ altera/altera_tse
+ aquantia/atlantic
+ chelsio/cxgb
+ cirrus/cs89x0
+ dlink/dl2k
+ davicom/dm9000
+ dec/dmfe
+ freescale/dpaa
+ freescale/dpaa2/index
+ freescale/gianfar
+ google/gve
+ huawei/hinic
+ intel/e100
+ intel/e1000
+ intel/e1000e
+ intel/fm10k
+ intel/igb
+ intel/igbvf
+ intel/ixgb
+ intel/ixgbe
+ intel/ixgbevf
+ intel/i40e
+ intel/iavf
+ intel/ice
+ marvell/octeontx2
+ marvell/octeon_ep
+ mellanox/mlx5
+ microsoft/netvsc
+ neterion/s2io
+ netronome/nfp
+ pensando/ionic
+ smsc/smc9
+ stmicro/stmmac
+ ti/cpsw
+ ti/cpsw_switchdev
+ ti/am65_nuss_cpsw_switchdev
+ ti/tlan
+ toshiba/spider_net
+ wangxun/txgbe
+ wangxun/ngbe
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e100.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e100.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3d4a9ba21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e100.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+=============================================================
+Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of Adapters
+=============================================================
+
+June 1, 2018
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- In This Release
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Building and Installation
+- Driver Configuration Parameters
+- Additional Configurations
+- Known Issues
+- Support
+
+
+In This Release
+===============
+
+This file describes the Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of
+Adapters. This driver includes support for Itanium(R)2-based systems.
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your Intel PRO/100 adapter.
+
+The following features are now available in supported kernels:
+ - Native VLANs
+ - Channel Bonding (teaming)
+ - SNMP
+
+Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source:
+/Documentation/networking/bonding.rst
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+Driver Configuration Parameters
+===============================
+
+The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
+unless otherwise noted.
+
+Rx Descriptors:
+ Number of receive descriptors. A receive descriptor is a data
+ structure that describes a receive buffer and its attributes to the network
+ controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to write
+ data from the controller to host memory. In the 3.x.x driver the valid range
+ for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 256. This parameter can be
+ changed using the command::
+
+ ethtool -G eth? rx n
+
+ Where n is the number of desired Rx descriptors.
+
+Tx Descriptors:
+ Number of transmit descriptors. A transmit descriptor is a data
+ structure that describes a transmit buffer and its attributes to the network
+ controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to read
+ data from the host memory to the controller. In the 3.x.x driver the valid
+ range for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 128. This parameter
+ can be changed using the command::
+
+ ethtool -G eth? tx n
+
+ Where n is the number of desired Tx descriptors.
+
+Speed/Duplex:
+ The driver auto-negotiates the link speed and duplex settings by
+ default. The ethtool utility can be used as follows to force speed/duplex.::
+
+ ethtool -s eth? autoneg off speed {10|100} duplex {full|half}
+
+ NOTE: setting the speed/duplex to incorrect values will cause the link to
+ fail.
+
+Event Log Message Level:
+ The driver uses the message level flag to log events
+ to syslog. The message level can be set at driver load time. It can also be
+ set using the command::
+
+ ethtool -s eth? msglvl n
+
+
+Additional Configurations
+=========================
+
+Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started
+is distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves
+adding an alias line to `/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf` as well as editing other
+system startup scripts and/or configuration files. Many popular Linux
+distributions ship with tools to make these changes for you. To learn
+the proper way to configure a network device for your system, refer to
+your distribution documentation. If during this process you are asked
+for the driver or module name, the name for the Linux Base Driver for
+the Intel PRO/100 Family of Adapters is e100.
+
+As an example, if you install the e100 driver for two PRO/100 adapters
+(eth0 and eth1), add the following to a configuration file in
+/etc/modprobe.d/::
+
+ alias eth0 e100
+ alias eth1 e100
+
+Viewing Link Messages
+---------------------
+
+In order to see link messages and other Intel driver information on your
+console, you must set the dmesg level up to six. This can be done by
+entering the following on the command line before loading the e100
+driver::
+
+ dmesg -n 6
+
+If you wish to see all messages issued by the driver, including debug
+messages, set the dmesg level to eight.
+
+NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+ethtool
+-------
+
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool
+version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality.
+
+The latest release of ethtool can be found from
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+Enabling Wake on LAN (WoL)
+--------------------------
+WoL is provided through the ethtool utility. For instructions on
+enabling WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. WoL will be
+enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this
+driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e100 driver must be loaded
+when shutting down or rebooting the system.
+
+NAPI
+----
+
+NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the e100 driver.
+
+See https://wiki.linuxfoundation.org/networking/napi for more
+information on NAPI.
+
+Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network
+------------------------------------------------------
+
+Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have one
+system on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain
+(non-partitioned switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces
+will respond to IP traffic for any IP address assigned to the system.
+This results in unbalanced receive traffic.
+
+If you have multiple interfaces in a server, either turn on ARP
+filtering by
+
+(1) entering::
+
+ echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter
+
+ (this only works if your kernel's version is higher than 2.4.5), or
+
+(2) installing the interfaces in separate broadcast domains (either
+ in different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs).
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4aaae0f7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,463 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+==========================================================
+Linux Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+==========================================================
+
+Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999 - 2013 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Speed and Duplex Configuration
+- Additional Configurations
+- Support
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter &
+Driver ID Guide at:
+
+ http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/idguide.htm
+
+For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, refer to the following
+website. In the search field, enter your adapter name or type, or use the
+networking link on the left to search for your adapter:
+
+ http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/home.htm
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+
+The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
+unless otherwise noted.
+
+NOTES:
+ For more information about the AutoNeg, Duplex, and Speed
+ parameters, see the "Speed and Duplex Configuration" section in
+ this document.
+
+ For more information about the InterruptThrottleRate,
+ RxIntDelay, TxIntDelay, RxAbsIntDelay, and TxAbsIntDelay
+ parameters, see the application note at:
+ http://www.intel.com/design/network/applnots/ap450.htm
+
+AutoNeg
+-------
+
+(Supported only on adapters with copper connections)
+
+:Valid Range: 0x01-0x0F, 0x20-0x2F
+:Default Value: 0x2F
+
+This parameter is a bit-mask that specifies the speed and duplex settings
+advertised by the adapter. When this parameter is used, the Speed and
+Duplex parameters must not be specified.
+
+NOTE:
+ Refer to the Speed and Duplex section of this readme for more
+ information on the AutoNeg parameter.
+
+Duplex
+------
+
+(Supported only on adapters with copper connections)
+
+:Valid Range: 0-2 (0=auto-negotiate, 1=half, 2=full)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This defines the direction in which data is allowed to flow. Can be
+either one or two-directional. If both Duplex and the link partner are
+set to auto-negotiate, the board auto-detects the correct duplex. If the
+link partner is forced (either full or half), Duplex defaults to half-
+duplex.
+
+FlowControl
+-----------
+
+:Valid Range: 0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx)
+:Default Value: Reads flow control settings from the EEPROM
+
+This parameter controls the automatic generation(Tx) and response(Rx)
+to Ethernet PAUSE frames.
+
+InterruptThrottleRate
+---------------------
+
+(not supported on Intel(R) 82542, 82543 or 82544-based adapters)
+
+:Valid Range:
+ 0,1,3,4,100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic, 3=dynamic conservative,
+ 4=simplified balancing)
+:Default Value: 3
+
+The driver can limit the amount of interrupts per second that the adapter
+will generate for incoming packets. It does this by writing a value to the
+adapter that is based on the maximum amount of interrupts that the adapter
+will generate per second.
+
+Setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater or equal to 100
+will program the adapter to send out a maximum of that many interrupts
+per second, even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt
+load on the system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load,
+but will increase latency as packets are not processed as quickly.
+
+The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static
+InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for
+all traffic types,but lacking in small packet performance and latency.
+The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and
+for this reason an adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm was implemented.
+
+Since 7.3.x, the driver has two adaptive modes (setting 1 or 3) in which
+it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic
+that it receives. After determining the type of incoming traffic in the last
+timeframe, it will adjust the InterruptThrottleRate to an appropriate value
+for that traffic.
+
+The algorithm classifies the incoming traffic every interval into
+classes. Once the class is determined, the InterruptThrottleRate value is
+adjusted to suit that traffic type the best. There are three classes defined:
+"Bulk traffic", for large amounts of packets of normal size; "Low latency",
+for small amounts of traffic and/or a significant percentage of small
+packets; and "Lowest latency", for almost completely small packets or
+minimal traffic.
+
+In dynamic conservative mode, the InterruptThrottleRate value is set to 4000
+for traffic that falls in class "Bulk traffic". If traffic falls in the "Low
+latency" or "Lowest latency" class, the InterruptThrottleRate is increased
+stepwise to 20000. This default mode is suitable for most applications.
+
+For situations where low latency is vital such as cluster or
+grid computing, the algorithm can reduce latency even more when
+InterruptThrottleRate is set to mode 1. In this mode, which operates
+the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to
+70000 for traffic in class "Lowest latency".
+
+In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and
+RX traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the
+interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second. If the
+traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could
+be as high as 8000.
+
+Setting InterruptThrottleRate to 0 turns off any interrupt moderation
+and may improve small packet latency, but is generally not suitable
+for bulk throughput traffic.
+
+NOTE:
+ InterruptThrottleRate takes precedence over the TxAbsIntDelay and
+ RxAbsIntDelay parameters. In other words, minimizing the receive
+ and/or transmit absolute delays does not force the controller to
+ generate more interrupts than what the Interrupt Throttle Rate
+ allows.
+
+CAUTION:
+ If you are using the Intel(R) PRO/1000 CT Network Connection
+ (controller 82547), setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value
+ greater than 75,000, may hang (stop transmitting) adapters
+ under certain network conditions. If this occurs a NETDEV
+ WATCHDOG message is logged in the system event log. In
+ addition, the controller is automatically reset, restoring
+ the network connection. To eliminate the potential for the
+ hang, ensure that InterruptThrottleRate is set no greater
+ than 75,000 and is not set to 0.
+
+NOTE:
+ When e1000 is loaded with default settings and multiple adapters
+ are in use simultaneously, the CPU utilization may increase non-
+ linearly. In order to limit the CPU utilization without impacting
+ the overall throughput, we recommend that you load the driver as
+ follows::
+
+ modprobe e1000 InterruptThrottleRate=3000,3000,3000
+
+ This sets the InterruptThrottleRate to 3000 interrupts/sec for
+ the first, second, and third instances of the driver. The range
+ of 2000 to 3000 interrupts per second works on a majority of
+ systems and is a good starting point, but the optimal value will
+ be platform-specific. If CPU utilization is not a concern, use
+ RX_POLLING (NAPI) and default driver settings.
+
+RxDescriptors
+-------------
+
+:Valid Range:
+ - 48-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters
+ - 48-4096 for all other supported adapters
+:Default Value: 256
+
+This value specifies the number of receive buffer descriptors allocated
+by the driver. Increasing this value allows the driver to buffer more
+incoming packets, at the expense of increased system memory utilization.
+
+Each descriptor is 16 bytes. A receive buffer is also allocated for each
+descriptor and can be either 2048, 4096, 8192, or 16384 bytes, depending
+on the MTU setting. The maximum MTU size is 16110.
+
+NOTE:
+ MTU designates the frame size. It only needs to be set for Jumbo
+ Frames. Depending on the available system resources, the request
+ for a higher number of receive descriptors may be denied. In this
+ case, use a lower number.
+
+RxIntDelay
+----------
+
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of 1.024
+microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if
+properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing this value adds
+extra latency to frame reception and can end up decreasing the throughput
+of TCP traffic. If the system is reporting dropped receives, this value
+may be set too high, causing the driver to run out of available receive
+descriptors.
+
+CAUTION:
+ When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may
+ hang (stop transmitting) under certain network conditions. If
+ this occurs a NETDEV WATCHDOG message is logged in the system
+ event log. In addition, the controller is automatically reset,
+ restoring the network connection. To eliminate the potential
+ for the hang ensure that RxIntDelay is set to 0.
+
+RxAbsIntDelay
+-------------
+
+(This parameter is supported only on 82540, 82545 and later adapters.)
+
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 128
+
+This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a
+receive interrupt is generated. Useful only if RxIntDelay is non-zero,
+this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial
+packet is received within the set amount of time. Proper tuning,
+along with RxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific network
+conditions.
+
+Speed
+-----
+
+(This parameter is supported only on adapters with copper connections.)
+
+:Valid Settings: 0, 10, 100, 1000
+:Default Value: 0 (auto-negotiate at all supported speeds)
+
+Speed forces the line speed to the specified value in megabits per second
+(Mbps). If this parameter is not specified or is set to 0 and the link
+partner is set to auto-negotiate, the board will auto-detect the correct
+speed. Duplex should also be set when Speed is set to either 10 or 100.
+
+TxDescriptors
+-------------
+
+:Valid Range:
+ - 48-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters
+ - 48-4096 for all other supported adapters
+:Default Value: 256
+
+This value is the number of transmit descriptors allocated by the driver.
+Increasing this value allows the driver to queue more transmits. Each
+descriptor is 16 bytes.
+
+NOTE:
+ Depending on the available system resources, the request for a
+ higher number of transmit descriptors may be denied. In this case,
+ use a lower number.
+
+TxIntDelay
+----------
+
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 8
+
+This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of
+1.024 microseconds. Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU
+efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. If the
+system is reporting dropped transmits, this value may be set too high
+causing the driver to run out of available transmit descriptors.
+
+TxAbsIntDelay
+-------------
+
+(This parameter is supported only on 82540, 82545 and later adapters.)
+
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 32
+
+This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a
+transmit interrupt is generated. Useful only if TxIntDelay is non-zero,
+this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial
+packet is sent on the wire within the set amount of time. Proper tuning,
+along with TxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific
+network conditions.
+
+XsumRX
+------
+
+(This parameter is NOT supported on the 82542-based adapter.)
+
+:Valid Range: 0-1
+:Default Value: 1
+
+A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum
+offload for received packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter hardware.
+
+Copybreak
+---------
+
+:Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off)
+:Default Value: 256
+:Usage: modprobe e1000.ko copybreak=128
+
+Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX
+buffer before handing it up the stack.
+
+This parameter is different than other parameters, in that it is a
+single (not 1,1,1 etc.) parameter applied to all driver instances and
+it is also available during runtime at
+/sys/module/e1000/parameters/copybreak
+
+SmartPowerDownEnable
+--------------------
+
+:Valid Range: 0-1
+:Default Value: 0 (disabled)
+
+Allows PHY to turn off in lower power states. The user can turn off
+this parameter in supported chipsets.
+
+Speed and Duplex Configuration
+==============================
+
+Three keywords are used to control the speed and duplex configuration.
+These keywords are Speed, Duplex, and AutoNeg.
+
+If the board uses a fiber interface, these keywords are ignored, and the
+fiber interface board only links at 1000 Mbps full-duplex.
+
+For copper-based boards, the keywords interact as follows:
+
+- The default operation is auto-negotiate. The board advertises all
+ supported speed and duplex combinations, and it links at the highest
+ common speed and duplex mode IF the link partner is set to auto-negotiate.
+
+- If Speed = 1000, limited auto-negotiation is enabled and only 1000 Mbps
+ is advertised (The 1000BaseT spec requires auto-negotiation.)
+
+- If Speed = 10 or 100, then both Speed and Duplex should be set. Auto-
+ negotiation is disabled, and the AutoNeg parameter is ignored. Partner
+ SHOULD also be forced.
+
+The AutoNeg parameter is used when more control is required over the
+auto-negotiation process. It should be used when you wish to control which
+speed and duplex combinations are advertised during the auto-negotiation
+process.
+
+The parameter may be specified as either a decimal or hexadecimal value as
+determined by the bitmap below.
+
+============== ====== ====== ======= ======= ====== ====== ======= ======
+Bit position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
+Decimal Value 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
+Hex value 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1
+Speed (Mbps) N/A N/A 1000 N/A 100 100 10 10
+Duplex Full Full Half Full Half
+============== ====== ====== ======= ======= ====== ====== ======= ======
+
+Some examples of using AutoNeg::
+
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x01 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Half)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=1 (Same as above)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x02 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Full)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x03 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Half or 10 Full)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x04 (Restricts autonegotiation to 100 Half)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x05 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Half or 100
+ Half)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x020 (Restricts autonegotiation to 1000 Full)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=32 (Same as above)
+
+Note that when this parameter is used, Speed and Duplex must not be specified.
+
+If the link partner is forced to a specific speed and duplex, then this
+parameter should not be used. Instead, use the Speed and Duplex parameters
+previously mentioned to force the adapter to the same speed and duplex.
+
+Additional Configurations
+=========================
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+
+ Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than
+ the default of 1500. Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size.
+ For example::
+
+ ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+ This setting is not saved across reboots. It can be made permanent if
+ you add::
+
+ MTU=9000
+
+ to the file /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x>. This example
+ applies to the Red Hat distributions; other distributions may store this
+ setting in a different location.
+
+Notes:
+ Degradation in throughput performance may be observed in some Jumbo frames
+ environments. If this is observed, increasing the application's socket buffer
+ size and/or increasing the /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_*mem entry values may help.
+ See the specific application manual and /usr/src/linux*/Documentation/
+ networking/ip-sysctl.txt for more details.
+
+ - The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 16110. This value coincides
+ with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 16128.
+
+ - Using Jumbo frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in
+ poor performance or loss of link.
+
+ - Adapters based on the Intel(R) 82542 and 82573V/E controller do not
+ support Jumbo Frames. These correspond to the following product names::
+
+ Intel(R) PRO/1000 Gigabit Server Adapter
+ Intel(R) PRO/1000 PM Network Connection
+
+ethtool
+-------
+
+ The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+ diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool
+ version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality.
+
+ The latest release of ethtool can be found from
+ https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+Enabling Wake on LAN (WoL)
+--------------------------
+
+ WoL is configured through the ethtool utility.
+
+ WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot.
+ For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000 driver must be
+ loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system.
+
+Support
+=======
+
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+ http://support.intel.com
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+ http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported
+kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related
+to the issue to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000e.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f49cd370e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000e.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,383 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+=====================================================
+Linux Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+=====================================================
+
+Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 2008-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Additional Configurations
+- Support
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are used
+by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this
+syntax::
+
+ modprobe e1000e [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...]
+
+There needs to be a <VAL#> for each network port in the system supported by
+this driver. The values will be applied to each instance, in function order.
+For example::
+
+ modprobe e1000e InterruptThrottleRate=16000,16000
+
+In this case, there are two network ports supported by e1000e in the system.
+The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
+unless otherwise noted.
+
+NOTE: A descriptor describes a data buffer and attributes related to the data
+buffer. This information is accessed by the hardware.
+
+InterruptThrottleRate
+---------------------
+:Valid Range: 0,1,3,4,100-100000
+:Default Value: 3
+
+Interrupt Throttle Rate controls the number of interrupts each interrupt
+vector can generate per second. Increasing ITR lowers latency at the cost of
+increased CPU utilization, though it may help throughput in some circumstances.
+
+Setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater or equal to 100
+will program the adapter to send out a maximum of that many interrupts
+per second, even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt
+load on the system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load,
+but will increase latency as packets are not processed as quickly.
+
+The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static
+InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for
+all traffic types, but lacking in small packet performance and latency.
+The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and
+for this reason an adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm was implemented.
+
+The driver has two adaptive modes (setting 1 or 3) in which
+it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic
+that it receives. After determining the type of incoming traffic in the last
+timeframe, it will adjust the InterruptThrottleRate to an appropriate value
+for that traffic.
+
+The algorithm classifies the incoming traffic every interval into
+classes. Once the class is determined, the InterruptThrottleRate value is
+adjusted to suit that traffic type the best. There are three classes defined:
+"Bulk traffic", for large amounts of packets of normal size; "Low latency",
+for small amounts of traffic and/or a significant percentage of small
+packets; and "Lowest latency", for almost completely small packets or
+minimal traffic.
+
+ - 0: Off
+ Turns off any interrupt moderation and may improve small packet latency.
+ However, this is generally not suitable for bulk throughput traffic due
+ to the increased CPU utilization of the higher interrupt rate.
+ - 1: Dynamic mode
+ This mode attempts to moderate interrupts per vector while maintaining
+ very low latency. This can sometimes cause extra CPU utilization. If
+ planning on deploying e1000e in a latency sensitive environment, this
+ parameter should be considered.
+ - 3: Dynamic Conservative mode (default)
+ In dynamic conservative mode, the InterruptThrottleRate value is set to
+ 4000 for traffic that falls in class "Bulk traffic". If traffic falls in
+ the "Low latency" or "Lowest latency" class, the InterruptThrottleRate is
+ increased stepwise to 20000. This default mode is suitable for most
+ applications.
+ - 4: Simplified Balancing mode
+ In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and
+ RX traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the
+ interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second. If the
+ traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could
+ be as high as 8000.
+ - 100-100000:
+ Setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater or equal to 100
+ will program the adapter to send at most that many interrupts per second,
+ even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt load on the
+ system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load, but will increase
+ latency as packets are not processed as quickly.
+
+NOTE: InterruptThrottleRate takes precedence over the TxAbsIntDelay and
+RxAbsIntDelay parameters. In other words, minimizing the receive and/or
+transmit absolute delays does not force the controller to generate more
+interrupts than what the Interrupt Throttle Rate allows.
+
+RxIntDelay
+----------
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of 1.024
+microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if
+properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing this value adds extra
+latency to frame reception and can end up decreasing the throughput of TCP
+traffic. If the system is reporting dropped receives, this value may be set
+too high, causing the driver to run out of available receive descriptors.
+
+CAUTION: When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may hang
+(stop transmitting) under certain network conditions. If this occurs a NETDEV
+WATCHDOG message is logged in the system event log. In addition, the
+controller is automatically reset, restoring the network connection. To
+eliminate the potential for the hang ensure that RxIntDelay is set to 0.
+
+RxAbsIntDelay
+-------------
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 8
+
+This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a
+receive interrupt is generated. This value ensures that an interrupt is
+generated after the initial packet is received within the set amount of time,
+which is useful only if RxIntDelay is non-zero. Proper tuning, along with
+RxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific network conditions.
+
+TxIntDelay
+----------
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 8
+
+This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of 1.024
+microseconds. Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if
+properly tuned for specific network traffic. If the system is reporting
+dropped transmits, this value may be set too high causing the driver to run
+out of available transmit descriptors.
+
+TxAbsIntDelay
+-------------
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 32
+
+This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a
+transmit interrupt is generated. It is useful only if TxIntDelay is non-zero.
+It ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial Packet is sent on
+the wire within the set amount of time. Proper tuning, along with TxIntDelay,
+may improve traffic throughput in specific network conditions.
+
+copybreak
+---------
+:Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off)
+:Default Value: 256
+
+The driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh receive
+buffer before handing it up the stack.
+This parameter differs from other parameters because it is a single (not 1,1,1
+etc.) parameter applied to all driver instances and it is also available
+during runtime at /sys/module/e1000e/parameters/copybreak.
+
+To use copybreak, type::
+
+ modprobe e1000e.ko copybreak=128
+
+SmartPowerDownEnable
+--------------------
+:Valid Range: 0,1
+:Default Value: 0 (disabled)
+
+Allows the PHY to turn off in lower power states. The user can turn off this
+parameter in supported chipsets.
+
+KumeranLockLoss
+---------------
+:Valid Range: 0,1
+:Default Value: 1 (enabled)
+
+This workaround skips resetting the PHY at shutdown for the initial silicon
+releases of ICH8 systems.
+
+IntMode
+-------
+:Valid Range: 0-2
+:Default Value: 0
+
+ +-------+----------------+
+ | Value | Interrupt Mode |
+ +=======+================+
+ | 0 | Legacy |
+ +-------+----------------+
+ | 1 | MSI |
+ +-------+----------------+
+ | 2 | MSI-X |
+ +-------+----------------+
+
+IntMode allows load time control over the type of interrupt registered for by
+the driver. MSI-X is required for multiple queue support, and some kernels and
+combinations of kernel .config options will force a lower level of interrupt
+support.
+
+This command will show different values for each type of interrupt::
+
+ cat /proc/interrupts
+
+CrcStripping
+------------
+:Valid Range: 0,1
+:Default Value: 1 (enabled)
+
+Strip the CRC from received packets before sending up the network stack. If
+you have a machine with a BMC enabled but cannot receive IPMI traffic after
+loading or enabling the driver, try disabling this feature.
+
+WriteProtectNVM
+---------------
+:Valid Range: 0,1
+:Default Value: 1 (enabled)
+
+If set to 1, configure the hardware to ignore all write/erase cycles to the
+GbE region in the ICHx NVM (in order to prevent accidental corruption of the
+NVM). This feature can be disabled by setting the parameter to 0 during initial
+driver load.
+
+NOTE: The machine must be power cycled (full off/on) when enabling NVM writes
+via setting the parameter to zero. Once the NVM has been locked (via the
+parameter at 1 when the driver loads) it cannot be unlocked except via power
+cycle.
+
+Debug
+-----
+:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This parameter adjusts the level of debug messages displayed in the system logs.
+
+
+Additional Features and Configurations
+======================================
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
+to a value larger than the default value of 1500.
+
+Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the
+following where <x> is the interface number::
+
+ ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows::
+
+ ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x>
+ ip link set up dev eth<x>
+
+This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made
+permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file:
+
+- For RHEL: /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x>
+- For SLES: /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file>
+
+NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 8996. This value coincides
+with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9018 bytes.
+
+NOTE: Using Jumbo frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in
+poor performance or loss of link.
+
+NOTE: The following adapters limit Jumbo Frames sized packets to a maximum of
+4088 bytes:
+
+ - Intel(R) 82578DM Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82577LM Gigabit Network Connection
+
+The following adapters do not support Jumbo Frames:
+
+ - Intel(R) PRO/1000 Gigabit Server Adapter
+ - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PM Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82562G 10/100 Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82562G-2 10/100 Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82562GT 10/100 Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82562GT-2 10/100 Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82562V 10/100 Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82562V-2 10/100 Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82566DC Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82566DC-2 Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82566DM Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82566MC Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82566MM Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82567V-3 Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82577LC Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82578DC Gigabit Network Connection
+
+NOTE: Jumbo Frames cannot be configured on an 82579-based Network device if
+MACSec is enabled on the system.
+
+
+ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool
+version is required for this functionality. Download it at:
+
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+NOTE: When validating enable/disable tests on some parts (for example, 82578),
+it is necessary to add a few seconds between tests when working with ethtool.
+
+
+Speed and Duplex Configuration
+------------------------------
+In addressing speed and duplex configuration issues, you need to distinguish
+between copper-based adapters and fiber-based adapters.
+
+In the default mode, an Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using copper
+connections will attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner to determine
+the best setting. If the adapter cannot establish link with the link partner
+using auto-negotiation, you may need to manually configure the adapter and link
+partner to identical settings to establish link and pass packets. This should
+only be needed when attempting to link with an older switch that does not
+support auto-negotiation or one that has been forced to a specific speed or
+duplex mode. Your link partner must match the setting you choose. 1 Gbps speeds
+and higher cannot be forced. Use the autonegotiation advertising setting to
+manually set devices for 1 Gbps and higher.
+
+Speed, duplex, and autonegotiation advertising are configured through the
+ethtool utility.
+
+Caution: Only experienced network administrators should force speed and duplex
+or change autonegotiation advertising manually. The settings at the switch must
+always match the adapter settings. Adapter performance may suffer or your
+adapter may not operate if you configure the adapter differently from your
+switch.
+
+An Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using fiber-based connections, however,
+will not attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner since those adapters
+operate only in full duplex and only at their native speed.
+
+
+Enabling Wake on LAN (WoL)
+--------------------------
+WoL is configured through the ethtool utility.
+
+WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For
+this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000e driver must be loaded
+prior to shutting down or suspending the system.
+
+NOTE: Wake on LAN is only supported on port A for the following devices:
+- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Network Connection
+- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Connection
+- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter
+- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PF Dual Port Server Adapter
+- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Quad Port Server Adapter
+- Intel(R) Gigabit PT Quad Port Server ExpressModule
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/fm10k.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/fm10k.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9258ef6f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/fm10k.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+=============================================================
+Linux Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Multi-host Controller
+=============================================================
+
+August 20, 2018
+Copyright(c) 2015-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Additional Configurations
+- Performance Tuning
+- Known Issues
+- Support
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+The driver in this release is compatible with devices based on the Intel(R)
+Ethernet Multi-host Controller.
+
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+
+Flow Control
+------------
+The Intel(R) Ethernet Switch Host Interface Driver does not support Flow
+Control. It will not send pause frames. This may result in dropped frames.
+
+
+Virtual Functions (VFs)
+-----------------------
+Use sysfs to enable VFs.
+Valid Range: 0-64
+
+For example::
+
+ echo $num_vf_enabled > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs //enable VFs
+ echo 0 > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs //disable VFs
+
+NOTE: Neither the device nor the driver control how VFs are mapped into config
+space. Bus layout will vary by operating system. On operating systems that
+support it, you can check sysfs to find the mapping.
+
+NOTE: When SR-IOV mode is enabled, hardware VLAN filtering and VLAN tag
+stripping/insertion will remain enabled. Please remove the old VLAN filter
+before the new VLAN filter is added. For example::
+
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 100 // set vlan 100 for VF 0
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 0 // Delete vlan 100
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 200 // set a new vlan 200 for VF 0
+
+
+Additional Features and Configurations
+======================================
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
+to a value larger than the default value of 1500.
+
+Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the
+following where <x> is the interface number::
+
+ ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows::
+
+ ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x>
+ ip link set up dev eth<x>
+
+This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made
+permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file:
+
+- For RHEL: /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x>
+- For SLES: /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file>
+
+NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 15342. This value coincides
+with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 15364 bytes.
+
+NOTE: This driver will attempt to use multiple page sized buffers to receive
+each jumbo packet. This should help to avoid buffer starvation issues when
+allocating receive packets.
+
+
+Generic Receive Offload, aka GRO
+--------------------------------
+The driver supports the in-kernel software implementation of GRO. GRO has
+shown that by coalescing Rx traffic into larger chunks of data, CPU
+utilization can be significantly reduced when under large Rx load. GRO is an
+evolution of the previously-used LRO interface. GRO is able to coalesce
+other protocols besides TCP. It's also safe to use with configurations that
+are problematic for LRO, namely bridging and iSCSI.
+
+
+
+Supported ethtool Commands and Options for Filtering
+----------------------------------------------------
+-n --show-nfc
+ Retrieves the receive network flow classification configurations.
+
+rx-flow-hash tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6
+ Retrieves the hash options for the specified network traffic type.
+
+-N --config-nfc
+ Configures the receive network flow classification.
+
+rx-flow-hash tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6 m|v|t|s|d|f|n|r
+ Configures the hash options for the specified network traffic type.
+
+- udp4: UDP over IPv4
+- udp6: UDP over IPv6
+- f Hash on bytes 0 and 1 of the Layer 4 header of the rx packet.
+- n Hash on bytes 2 and 3 of the Layer 4 header of the rx packet.
+
+
+Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+============================
+
+Enabling SR-IOV in a 64-bit Microsoft Windows Server 2012/R2 guest OS under Linux KVM
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+KVM Hypervisor/VMM supports direct assignment of a PCIe device to a VM. This
+includes traditional PCIe devices, as well as SR-IOV-capable devices based on
+the Intel Ethernet Controller XL710.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/i40e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/i40e.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ac35bd472
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/i40e.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,771 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+=================================================================
+Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700 Series
+=================================================================
+
+Intel 40 Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Overview
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Intel(R) Ethernet Flow Director
+- Additional Configurations
+- Known Issues
+- Support
+
+
+Driver information can be obtained using ethtool, lspci, and ifconfig.
+Instructions on updating ethtool can be found in the section Additional
+Configurations later in this document.
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your Intel adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply to use
+with Linux.
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+The driver is compatible with devices based on the following:
+
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X710
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller XL710
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection X722
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller XXV710
+
+For the best performance, make sure the latest NVM/FW is installed on your
+device.
+
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest NVM/FW
+images and Intel network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+SFP+ and QSFP+ Devices
+----------------------
+For information about supported media, refer to this document:
+https://www.intel.com/content/dam/www/public/us/en/documents/release-notes/xl710-ethernet-controller-feature-matrix.pdf
+
+NOTE: Some adapters based on the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700 Series only
+support Intel Ethernet Optics modules. On these adapters, other modules are not
+supported and will not function. In all cases Intel recommends using Intel
+Ethernet Optics; other modules may function but are not validated by Intel.
+Contact Intel for supported media types.
+
+NOTE: For connections based on Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700 Series, support
+is dependent on your system board. Please see your vendor for details.
+
+NOTE: In systems that do not have adequate airflow to cool the adapter and
+optical modules, you must use high temperature optical modules.
+
+Virtual Functions (VFs)
+-----------------------
+Use sysfs to enable VFs. For example::
+
+ #echo $num_vf_enabled > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs #enable VFs
+ #echo 0 > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs #disable VFs
+
+For example, the following instructions will configure PF eth0 and the first VF
+on VLAN 10::
+
+ $ ip link set dev eth0 vf 0 vlan 10
+
+VLAN Tag Packet Steering
+------------------------
+Allows you to send all packets with a specific VLAN tag to a particular SR-IOV
+virtual function (VF). Further, this feature allows you to designate a
+particular VF as trusted, and allows that trusted VF to request selective
+promiscuous mode on the Physical Function (PF).
+
+To set a VF as trusted or untrusted, enter the following command in the
+Hypervisor::
+
+ # ip link set dev eth0 vf 1 trust [on|off]
+
+Once the VF is designated as trusted, use the following commands in the VM to
+set the VF to promiscuous mode.
+
+::
+
+ For promiscuous all:
+ #ip link set eth2 promisc on
+ Where eth2 is a VF interface in the VM
+
+ For promiscuous Multicast:
+ #ip link set eth2 allmulticast on
+ Where eth2 is a VF interface in the VM
+
+NOTE: By default, the ethtool priv-flag vf-true-promisc-support is set to
+"off",meaning that promiscuous mode for the VF will be limited. To set the
+promiscuous mode for the VF to true promiscuous and allow the VF to see all
+ingress traffic, use the following command::
+
+ #ethtool -set-priv-flags p261p1 vf-true-promisc-support on
+
+The vf-true-promisc-support priv-flag does not enable promiscuous mode; rather,
+it designates which type of promiscuous mode (limited or true) you will get
+when you enable promiscuous mode using the ip link commands above. Note that
+this is a global setting that affects the entire device. However,the
+vf-true-promisc-support priv-flag is only exposed to the first PF of the
+device. The PF remains in limited promiscuous mode (unless it is in MFP mode)
+regardless of the vf-true-promisc-support setting.
+
+Now add a VLAN interface on the VF interface::
+
+ #ip link add link eth2 name eth2.100 type vlan id 100
+
+Note that the order in which you set the VF to promiscuous mode and add the
+VLAN interface does not matter (you can do either first). The end result in
+this example is that the VF will get all traffic that is tagged with VLAN 100.
+
+Intel(R) Ethernet Flow Director
+-------------------------------
+The Intel Ethernet Flow Director performs the following tasks:
+
+- Directs receive packets according to their flows to different queues.
+- Enables tight control on routing a flow in the platform.
+- Matches flows and CPU cores for flow affinity.
+- Supports multiple parameters for flexible flow classification and load
+ balancing (in SFP mode only).
+
+NOTE: The Linux i40e driver supports the following flow types: IPv4, TCPv4, and
+UDPv4. For a given flow type, it supports valid combinations of IP addresses
+(source or destination) and UDP/TCP ports (source and destination). For
+example, you can supply only a source IP address, a source IP address and a
+destination port, or any combination of one or more of these four parameters.
+
+NOTE: The Linux i40e driver allows you to filter traffic based on a
+user-defined flexible two-byte pattern and offset by using the ethtool user-def
+and mask fields. Only L3 and L4 flow types are supported for user-defined
+flexible filters. For a given flow type, you must clear all Intel Ethernet Flow
+Director filters before changing the input set (for that flow type).
+
+To enable or disable the Intel Ethernet Flow Director::
+
+ # ethtool -K ethX ntuple <on|off>
+
+When disabling ntuple filters, all the user programmed filters are flushed from
+the driver cache and hardware. All needed filters must be re-added when ntuple
+is re-enabled.
+
+To add a filter that directs packet to queue 2, use -U or -N switch::
+
+ # ethtool -N ethX flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \
+ 192.168.10.2 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 action 2 [loc 1]
+
+To set a filter using only the source and destination IP address::
+
+ # ethtool -N ethX flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \
+ 192.168.10.2 action 2 [loc 1]
+
+To see the list of filters currently present::
+
+ # ethtool <-u|-n> ethX
+
+Application Targeted Routing (ATR) Perfect Filters
+--------------------------------------------------
+ATR is enabled by default when the kernel is in multiple transmit queue mode.
+An ATR Intel Ethernet Flow Director filter rule is added when a TCP-IP flow
+starts and is deleted when the flow ends. When a TCP-IP Intel Ethernet Flow
+Director rule is added from ethtool (Sideband filter), ATR is turned off by the
+driver. To re-enable ATR, the sideband can be disabled with the ethtool -K
+option. For example::
+
+ ethtool -K [adapter] ntuple [off|on]
+
+If sideband is re-enabled after ATR is re-enabled, ATR remains enabled until a
+TCP-IP flow is added. When all TCP-IP sideband rules are deleted, ATR is
+automatically re-enabled.
+
+Packets that match the ATR rules are counted in fdir_atr_match stats in
+ethtool, which also can be used to verify whether ATR rules still exist.
+
+Sideband Perfect Filters
+------------------------
+Sideband Perfect Filters are used to direct traffic that matches specified
+characteristics. They are enabled through ethtool's ntuple interface. To add a
+new filter use the following command::
+
+ ethtool -U <device> flow-type <type> src-ip <ip> dst-ip <ip> src-port <port> \
+ dst-port <port> action <queue>
+
+Where:
+ <device> - the ethernet device to program
+ <type> - can be ip4, tcp4, udp4, or sctp4
+ <ip> - the ip address to match on
+ <port> - the port number to match on
+ <queue> - the queue to direct traffic towards (-1 discards matching traffic)
+
+Use the following command to display all of the active filters::
+
+ ethtool -u <device>
+
+Use the following command to delete a filter::
+
+ ethtool -U <device> delete <N>
+
+Where <N> is the filter id displayed when printing all the active filters, and
+may also have been specified using "loc <N>" when adding the filter.
+
+The following example matches TCP traffic sent from 192.168.0.1, port 5300,
+directed to 192.168.0.5, port 80, and sends it to queue 7::
+
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 \
+ src-port 5300 dst-port 80 action 7
+
+For each flow-type, the programmed filters must all have the same matching
+input set. For example, issuing the following two commands is acceptable::
+
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10
+
+Issuing the next two commands, however, is not acceptable, since the first
+specifies src-ip and the second specifies dst-ip::
+
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10
+
+The second command will fail with an error. You may program multiple filters
+with the same fields, using different values, but, on one device, you may not
+program two tcp4 filters with different matching fields.
+
+Matching on a sub-portion of a field is not supported by the i40e driver, thus
+partial mask fields are not supported.
+
+The driver also supports matching user-defined data within the packet payload.
+This flexible data is specified using the "user-def" field of the ethtool
+command in the following way:
+
++----------------------------+--------------------------+
+| 31 28 24 20 16 | 15 12 8 4 0 |
++----------------------------+--------------------------+
+| offset into packet payload | 2 bytes of flexible data |
++----------------------------+--------------------------+
+
+For example,
+
+::
+
+ ... user-def 0x4FFFF ...
+
+tells the filter to look 4 bytes into the payload and match that value against
+0xFFFF. The offset is based on the beginning of the payload, and not the
+beginning of the packet. Thus
+
+::
+
+ flow-type tcp4 ... user-def 0x8BEAF ...
+
+would match TCP/IPv4 packets which have the value 0xBEAF 8 bytes into the
+TCP/IPv4 payload.
+
+Note that ICMP headers are parsed as 4 bytes of header and 4 bytes of payload.
+Thus to match the first byte of the payload, you must actually add 4 bytes to
+the offset. Also note that ip4 filters match both ICMP frames as well as raw
+(unknown) ip4 frames, where the payload will be the L3 payload of the IP4 frame.
+
+The maximum offset is 64. The hardware will only read up to 64 bytes of data
+from the payload. The offset must be even because the flexible data is 2 bytes
+long and must be aligned to byte 0 of the packet payload.
+
+The user-defined flexible offset is also considered part of the input set and
+cannot be programmed separately for multiple filters of the same type. However,
+the flexible data is not part of the input set and multiple filters may use the
+same offset but match against different data.
+
+To create filters that direct traffic to a specific Virtual Function, use the
+"action" parameter. Specify the action as a 64 bit value, where the lower 32
+bits represents the queue number, while the next 8 bits represent which VF.
+Note that 0 is the PF, so the VF identifier is offset by 1. For example::
+
+ ... action 0x800000002 ...
+
+specifies to direct traffic to Virtual Function 7 (8 minus 1) into queue 2 of
+that VF.
+
+Note that these filters will not break internal routing rules, and will not
+route traffic that otherwise would not have been sent to the specified Virtual
+Function.
+
+Setting the link-down-on-close Private Flag
+-------------------------------------------
+When the link-down-on-close private flag is set to "on", the port's link will
+go down when the interface is brought down using the ifconfig ethX down command.
+
+Use ethtool to view and set link-down-on-close, as follows::
+
+ ethtool --show-priv-flags ethX
+ ethtool --set-priv-flags ethX link-down-on-close [on|off]
+
+Viewing Link Messages
+---------------------
+Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is
+restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on
+your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following::
+
+ dmesg -n 8
+
+NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
+to a value larger than the default value of 1500.
+
+Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the
+following where <x> is the interface number::
+
+ ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows::
+
+ ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x>
+ ip link set up dev eth<x>
+
+This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made
+permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file::
+
+ /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x> // for RHEL
+ /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file> // for SLES
+
+NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 9702. This value coincides
+with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9728 bytes.
+
+NOTE: This driver will attempt to use multiple page sized buffers to receive
+each jumbo packet. This should help to avoid buffer starvation issues when
+allocating receive packets.
+
+ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool
+version is required for this functionality. Download it at:
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+Supported ethtool Commands and Options for Filtering
+----------------------------------------------------
+-n --show-nfc
+ Retrieves the receive network flow classification configurations.
+
+rx-flow-hash tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6
+ Retrieves the hash options for the specified network traffic type.
+
+-N --config-nfc
+ Configures the receive network flow classification.
+
+rx-flow-hash tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6 m|v|t|s|d|f|n|r...
+ Configures the hash options for the specified network traffic type.
+
+udp4 UDP over IPv4
+udp6 UDP over IPv6
+
+f Hash on bytes 0 and 1 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet.
+n Hash on bytes 2 and 3 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet.
+
+Speed and Duplex Configuration
+------------------------------
+In addressing speed and duplex configuration issues, you need to distinguish
+between copper-based adapters and fiber-based adapters.
+
+In the default mode, an Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using copper
+connections will attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner to determine
+the best setting. If the adapter cannot establish link with the link partner
+using auto-negotiation, you may need to manually configure the adapter and link
+partner to identical settings to establish link and pass packets. This should
+only be needed when attempting to link with an older switch that does not
+support auto-negotiation or one that has been forced to a specific speed or
+duplex mode. Your link partner must match the setting you choose. 1 Gbps speeds
+and higher cannot be forced. Use the autonegotiation advertising setting to
+manually set devices for 1 Gbps and higher.
+
+NOTE: You cannot set the speed for devices based on the Intel(R) Ethernet
+Network Adapter XXV710 based devices.
+
+Speed, duplex, and autonegotiation advertising are configured through the
+ethtool utility.
+
+Caution: Only experienced network administrators should force speed and duplex
+or change autonegotiation advertising manually. The settings at the switch must
+always match the adapter settings. Adapter performance may suffer or your
+adapter may not operate if you configure the adapter differently from your
+switch.
+
+An Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using fiber-based connections, however,
+will not attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner since those adapters
+operate only in full duplex and only at their native speed.
+
+NAPI
+----
+NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the i40e driver.
+For more information on NAPI, see
+https://wiki.linuxfoundation.org/networking/napi
+
+Flow Control
+------------
+Ethernet Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) can be configured with ethtool to enable
+receiving and transmitting pause frames for i40e. When transmit is enabled,
+pause frames are generated when the receive packet buffer crosses a predefined
+threshold. When receive is enabled, the transmit unit will halt for the time
+delay specified when a pause frame is received.
+
+NOTE: You must have a flow control capable link partner.
+
+Flow Control is on by default.
+
+Use ethtool to change the flow control settings.
+
+To enable or disable Rx or Tx Flow Control::
+
+ ethtool -A eth? rx <on|off> tx <on|off>
+
+Note: This command only enables or disables Flow Control if auto-negotiation is
+disabled. If auto-negotiation is enabled, this command changes the parameters
+used for auto-negotiation with the link partner.
+
+To enable or disable auto-negotiation::
+
+ ethtool -s eth? autoneg <on|off>
+
+Note: Flow Control auto-negotiation is part of link auto-negotiation. Depending
+on your device, you may not be able to change the auto-negotiation setting.
+
+RSS Hash Flow
+-------------
+Allows you to set the hash bytes per flow type and any combination of one or
+more options for Receive Side Scaling (RSS) hash byte configuration.
+
+::
+
+ # ethtool -N <dev> rx-flow-hash <type> <option>
+
+Where <type> is:
+ tcp4 signifying TCP over IPv4
+ udp4 signifying UDP over IPv4
+ tcp6 signifying TCP over IPv6
+ udp6 signifying UDP over IPv6
+And <option> is one or more of:
+ s Hash on the IP source address of the Rx packet.
+ d Hash on the IP destination address of the Rx packet.
+ f Hash on bytes 0 and 1 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet.
+ n Hash on bytes 2 and 3 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet.
+
+MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature
+----------------------------------
+When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by the
+hardware and not transmitted.
+NOTE: This feature can be disabled for a specific Virtual Function (VF)::
+
+ ip link set <pf dev> vf <vf id> spoofchk {off|on}
+
+IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Hardware Clock (PHC)
+------------------------------------------------------------
+Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is used to synchronize clocks in a computer
+network. PTP support varies among Intel devices that support this driver. Use
+"ethtool -T <netdev name>" to get a definitive list of PTP capabilities
+supported by the device.
+
+IEEE 802.1ad (QinQ) Support
+---------------------------
+The IEEE 802.1ad standard, informally known as QinQ, allows for multiple VLAN
+IDs within a single Ethernet frame. VLAN IDs are sometimes referred to as
+"tags," and multiple VLAN IDs are thus referred to as a "tag stack." Tag stacks
+allow L2 tunneling and the ability to segregate traffic within a particular
+VLAN ID, among other uses.
+
+The following are examples of how to configure 802.1ad (QinQ)::
+
+ ip link add link eth0 eth0.24 type vlan proto 802.1ad id 24
+ ip link add link eth0.24 eth0.24.371 type vlan proto 802.1Q id 371
+
+Where "24" and "371" are example VLAN IDs.
+
+NOTES:
+ Receive checksum offloads, cloud filters, and VLAN acceleration are not
+ supported for 802.1ad (QinQ) packets.
+
+VXLAN and GENEVE Overlay HW Offloading
+--------------------------------------
+Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) allows you to extend an L2 network over an L3
+network, which may be useful in a virtualized or cloud environment. Some
+Intel(R) Ethernet Network devices perform VXLAN processing, offloading it from
+the operating system. This reduces CPU utilization.
+
+VXLAN offloading is controlled by the Tx and Rx checksum offload options
+provided by ethtool. That is, if Tx checksum offload is enabled, and the
+adapter has the capability, VXLAN offloading is also enabled.
+
+Support for VXLAN and GENEVE HW offloading is dependent on kernel support of
+the HW offloading features.
+
+Multiple Functions per Port
+---------------------------
+Some adapters based on the Intel Ethernet Controller X710/XL710 support
+multiple functions on a single physical port. Configure these functions through
+the System Setup/BIOS.
+
+Minimum TX Bandwidth is the guaranteed minimum data transmission bandwidth, as
+a percentage of the full physical port link speed, that the partition will
+receive. The bandwidth the partition is awarded will never fall below the level
+you specify.
+
+The range for the minimum bandwidth values is:
+1 to ((100 minus # of partitions on the physical port) plus 1)
+For example, if a physical port has 4 partitions, the range would be:
+1 to ((100 - 4) + 1 = 97)
+
+The Maximum Bandwidth percentage represents the maximum transmit bandwidth
+allocated to the partition as a percentage of the full physical port link
+speed. The accepted range of values is 1-100. The value is used as a limiter,
+should you chose that any one particular function not be able to consume 100%
+of a port's bandwidth (should it be available). The sum of all the values for
+Maximum Bandwidth is not restricted, because no more than 100% of a port's
+bandwidth can ever be used.
+
+NOTE: X710/XXV710 devices fail to enable Max VFs (64) when Multiple Functions
+per Port (MFP) and SR-IOV are enabled. An error from i40e is logged that says
+"add vsi failed for VF N, aq_err 16". To workaround the issue, enable less than
+64 virtual functions (VFs).
+
+Data Center Bridging (DCB)
+--------------------------
+DCB is a configuration Quality of Service implementation in hardware. It uses
+the VLAN priority tag (802.1p) to filter traffic. That means that there are 8
+different priorities that traffic can be filtered into. It also enables
+priority flow control (802.1Qbb) which can limit or eliminate the number of
+dropped packets during network stress. Bandwidth can be allocated to each of
+these priorities, which is enforced at the hardware level (802.1Qaz).
+
+Adapter firmware implements LLDP and DCBX protocol agents as per 802.1AB and
+802.1Qaz respectively. The firmware based DCBX agent runs in willing mode only
+and can accept settings from a DCBX capable peer. Software configuration of
+DCBX parameters via dcbtool/lldptool are not supported.
+
+NOTE: Firmware LLDP can be disabled by setting the private flag disable-fw-lldp.
+
+The i40e driver implements the DCB netlink interface layer to allow user-space
+to communicate with the driver and query DCB configuration for the port.
+
+NOTE:
+The kernel assumes that TC0 is available, and will disable Priority Flow
+Control (PFC) on the device if TC0 is not available. To fix this, ensure TC0 is
+enabled when setting up DCB on your switch.
+
+Interrupt Rate Limiting
+-----------------------
+:Valid Range: 0-235 (0=no limit)
+
+The Intel(R) Ethernet Controller XL710 family supports an interrupt rate
+limiting mechanism. The user can control, via ethtool, the number of
+microseconds between interrupts.
+
+Syntax::
+
+ # ethtool -C ethX rx-usecs-high N
+
+The range of 0-235 microseconds provides an effective range of 4,310 to 250,000
+interrupts per second. The value of rx-usecs-high can be set independently of
+rx-usecs and tx-usecs in the same ethtool command, and is also independent of
+the adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm. The underlying hardware supports
+granularity in 4-microsecond intervals, so adjacent values may result in the
+same interrupt rate.
+
+One possible use case is the following::
+
+ # ethtool -C ethX adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs-high 20 rx-usecs \
+ 5 tx-usecs 5
+
+The above command would disable adaptive interrupt moderation, and allow a
+maximum of 5 microseconds before indicating a receive or transmit was complete.
+However, instead of resulting in as many as 200,000 interrupts per second, it
+limits total interrupts per second to 50,000 via the rx-usecs-high parameter.
+
+Performance Optimization
+========================
+Driver defaults are meant to fit a wide variety of workloads, but if further
+optimization is required we recommend experimenting with the following settings.
+
+NOTE: For better performance when processing small (64B) frame sizes, try
+enabling Hyper threading in the BIOS in order to increase the number of logical
+cores in the system and subsequently increase the number of queues available to
+the adapter.
+
+Virtualized Environments
+------------------------
+1. Disable XPS on both ends by using the included virt_perf_default script
+or by running the following command as root::
+
+ for file in `ls /sys/class/net/<ethX>/queues/tx-*/xps_cpus`;
+ do echo 0 > $file; done
+
+2. Using the appropriate mechanism (vcpupin) in the vm, pin the cpu's to
+individual lcpu's, making sure to use a set of cpu's included in the
+device's local_cpulist: /sys/class/net/<ethX>/device/local_cpulist.
+
+3. Configure as many Rx/Tx queues in the VM as available. Do not rely on
+the default setting of 1.
+
+
+Non-virtualized Environments
+----------------------------
+Pin the adapter's IRQs to specific cores by disabling the irqbalance service
+and using the included set_irq_affinity script. Please see the script's help
+text for further options.
+
+- The following settings will distribute the IRQs across all the cores evenly::
+
+ # scripts/set_irq_affinity -x all <interface1> , [ <interface2>, ... ]
+
+- The following settings will distribute the IRQs across all the cores that are
+ local to the adapter (same NUMA node)::
+
+ # scripts/set_irq_affinity -x local <interface1> ,[ <interface2>, ... ]
+
+For very CPU intensive workloads, we recommend pinning the IRQs to all cores.
+
+For IP Forwarding: Disable Adaptive ITR and lower Rx and Tx interrupts per
+queue using ethtool.
+
+- Setting rx-usecs and tx-usecs to 125 will limit interrupts to about 8000
+ interrupts per second per queue.
+
+::
+
+ # ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs 125 \
+ tx-usecs 125
+
+For lower CPU utilization: Disable Adaptive ITR and lower Rx and Tx interrupts
+per queue using ethtool.
+
+- Setting rx-usecs and tx-usecs to 250 will limit interrupts to about 4000
+ interrupts per second per queue.
+
+::
+
+ # ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs 250 \
+ tx-usecs 250
+
+For lower latency: Disable Adaptive ITR and ITR by setting Rx and Tx to 0 using
+ethtool.
+
+::
+
+ # ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs 0 \
+ tx-usecs 0
+
+Application Device Queues (ADq)
+-------------------------------
+Application Device Queues (ADq) allows you to dedicate one or more queues to a
+specific application. This can reduce latency for the specified application,
+and allow Tx traffic to be rate limited per application. Follow the steps below
+to set ADq.
+
+1. Create traffic classes (TCs). Maximum of 8 TCs can be created per interface.
+The shaper bw_rlimit parameter is optional.
+
+Example: Sets up two tcs, tc0 and tc1, with 16 queues each and max tx rate set
+to 1Gbit for tc0 and 3Gbit for tc1.
+
+::
+
+ # tc qdisc add dev <interface> root mqprio num_tc 2 map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
+ queues 16@0 16@16 hw 1 mode channel shaper bw_rlimit min_rate 1Gbit 2Gbit
+ max_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit
+
+map: priority mapping for up to 16 priorities to tcs (e.g. map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
+sets priorities 0-3 to use tc0 and 4-7 to use tc1)
+
+queues: for each tc, <num queues>@<offset> (e.g. queues 16@0 16@16 assigns
+16 queues to tc0 at offset 0 and 16 queues to tc1 at offset 16. Max total
+number of queues for all tcs is 64 or number of cores, whichever is lower.)
+
+hw 1 mode channel: ‘channel’ with ‘hw’ set to 1 is a new new hardware
+offload mode in mqprio that makes full use of the mqprio options, the
+TCs, the queue configurations, and the QoS parameters.
+
+shaper bw_rlimit: for each tc, sets minimum and maximum bandwidth rates.
+Totals must be equal or less than port speed.
+
+For example: min_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit: Verify bandwidth limit using network
+monitoring tools such as `ifstat` or `sar -n DEV [interval] [number of samples]`
+
+2. Enable HW TC offload on interface::
+
+ # ethtool -K <interface> hw-tc-offload on
+
+3. Apply TCs to ingress (RX) flow of interface::
+
+ # tc qdisc add dev <interface> ingress
+
+NOTES:
+ - Run all tc commands from the iproute2 <pathtoiproute2>/tc/ directory.
+ - ADq is not compatible with cloud filters.
+ - Setting up channels via ethtool (ethtool -L) is not supported when the
+ TCs are configured using mqprio.
+ - You must have iproute2 latest version
+ - NVM version 6.01 or later is required.
+ - ADq cannot be enabled when any the following features are enabled: Data
+ Center Bridging (DCB), Multiple Functions per Port (MFP), or Sideband
+ Filters.
+ - If another driver (for example, DPDK) has set cloud filters, you cannot
+ enable ADq.
+ - Tunnel filters are not supported in ADq. If encapsulated packets do
+ arrive in non-tunnel mode, filtering will be done on the inner headers.
+ For example, for VXLAN traffic in non-tunnel mode, PCTYPE is identified
+ as a VXLAN encapsulated packet, outer headers are ignored. Therefore,
+ inner headers are matched.
+ - If a TC filter on a PF matches traffic over a VF (on the PF), that
+ traffic will be routed to the appropriate queue of the PF, and will
+ not be passed on the VF. Such traffic will end up getting dropped higher
+ up in the TCP/IP stack as it does not match PF address data.
+ - If traffic matches multiple TC filters that point to different TCs,
+ that traffic will be duplicated and sent to all matching TC queues.
+ The hardware switch mirrors the packet to a VSI list when multiple
+ filters are matched.
+
+
+Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+============================
+
+NOTE: 1 Gb devices based on the Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection X722 do
+not support the following features:
+
+ * Data Center Bridging (DCB)
+ * QOS
+ * VMQ
+ * SR-IOV
+ * Task Encapsulation offload (VXLAN, NVGRE)
+ * Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE)
+ * Auto-media detect
+
+Unexpected Issues when the device driver and DPDK share a device
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Unexpected issues may result when an i40e device is in multi driver mode and
+the kernel driver and DPDK driver are sharing the device. This is because
+access to the global NIC resources is not synchronized between multiple
+drivers. Any change to the global NIC configuration (writing to a global
+register, setting global configuration by AQ, or changing switch modes) will
+affect all ports and drivers on the device. Loading DPDK with the
+"multi-driver" module parameter may mitigate some of the issues.
+
+TC0 must be enabled when setting up DCB on a switch
+---------------------------------------------------
+The kernel assumes that TC0 is available, and will disable Priority Flow
+Control (PFC) on the device if TC0 is not available. To fix this, ensure TC0 is
+enabled when setting up DCB on your switch.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/iavf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/iavf.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..151af0a8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/iavf.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,331 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+=================================================================
+Linux Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Adaptive Virtual Function
+=================================================================
+
+Intel Ethernet Adaptive Virtual Function Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 2013-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Overview
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Additional Configurations
+- Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+- Support
+
+Overview
+========
+
+This file describes the iavf Linux Base Driver. This driver was formerly
+called i40evf.
+
+The iavf driver supports the below mentioned virtual function devices and
+can only be activated on kernels running the i40e or newer Physical Function
+(PF) driver compiled with CONFIG_PCI_IOV. The iavf driver requires
+CONFIG_PCI_MSI to be enabled.
+
+The guest OS loading the iavf driver must support MSI-X interrupts.
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+The driver in this kernel is compatible with devices based on the following:
+ * Intel(R) XL710 X710 Virtual Function
+ * Intel(R) X722 Virtual Function
+ * Intel(R) XXV710 Virtual Function
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Adaptive Virtual Function
+
+For the best performance, make sure the latest NVM/FW is installed on your
+device.
+
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest NVM/FW
+images and Intel network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+
+Additional Features and Configurations
+======================================
+
+Viewing Link Messages
+---------------------
+Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is
+restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on
+your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following::
+
+ # dmesg -n 8
+
+NOTE:
+ This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool
+version is required for this functionality. Download it at:
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+Setting VLAN Tag Stripping
+--------------------------
+If you have applications that require Virtual Functions (VFs) to receive
+packets with VLAN tags, you can disable VLAN tag stripping for the VF. The
+Physical Function (PF) processes requests issued from the VF to enable or
+disable VLAN tag stripping. Note that if the PF has assigned a VLAN to a VF,
+then requests from that VF to set VLAN tag stripping will be ignored.
+
+To enable/disable VLAN tag stripping for a VF, issue the following command
+from inside the VM in which you are running the VF::
+
+ # ethtool -K <if_name> rxvlan on/off
+
+or alternatively::
+
+ # ethtool --offload <if_name> rxvlan on/off
+
+Adaptive Virtual Function
+-------------------------
+Adaptive Virtual Function (AVF) allows the virtual function driver, or VF, to
+adapt to changing feature sets of the physical function driver (PF) with which
+it is associated. This allows system administrators to update a PF without
+having to update all the VFs associated with it. All AVFs have a single common
+device ID and branding string.
+
+AVFs have a minimum set of features known as "base mode," but may provide
+additional features depending on what features are available in the PF with
+which the AVF is associated. The following are base mode features:
+
+- 4 Queue Pairs (QP) and associated Configuration Status Registers (CSRs)
+ for Tx/Rx
+- i40e descriptors and ring format
+- Descriptor write-back completion
+- 1 control queue, with i40e descriptors, CSRs and ring format
+- 5 MSI-X interrupt vectors and corresponding i40e CSRs
+- 1 Interrupt Throttle Rate (ITR) index
+- 1 Virtual Station Interface (VSI) per VF
+- 1 Traffic Class (TC), TC0
+- Receive Side Scaling (RSS) with 64 entry indirection table and key,
+ configured through the PF
+- 1 unicast MAC address reserved per VF
+- 16 MAC address filters for each VF
+- Stateless offloads - non-tunneled checksums
+- AVF device ID
+- HW mailbox is used for VF to PF communications (including on Windows)
+
+IEEE 802.1ad (QinQ) Support
+---------------------------
+The IEEE 802.1ad standard, informally known as QinQ, allows for multiple VLAN
+IDs within a single Ethernet frame. VLAN IDs are sometimes referred to as
+"tags," and multiple VLAN IDs are thus referred to as a "tag stack." Tag stacks
+allow L2 tunneling and the ability to segregate traffic within a particular
+VLAN ID, among other uses.
+
+The following are examples of how to configure 802.1ad (QinQ)::
+
+ # ip link add link eth0 eth0.24 type vlan proto 802.1ad id 24
+ # ip link add link eth0.24 eth0.24.371 type vlan proto 802.1Q id 371
+
+Where "24" and "371" are example VLAN IDs.
+
+NOTES:
+ Receive checksum offloads, cloud filters, and VLAN acceleration are not
+ supported for 802.1ad (QinQ) packets.
+
+Application Device Queues (ADq)
+-------------------------------
+Application Device Queues (ADq) allows you to dedicate one or more queues to a
+specific application. This can reduce latency for the specified application,
+and allow Tx traffic to be rate limited per application. Follow the steps below
+to set ADq.
+
+Requirements:
+
+- The sch_mqprio, act_mirred and cls_flower modules must be loaded
+- The latest version of iproute2
+- If another driver (for example, DPDK) has set cloud filters, you cannot
+ enable ADQ
+- Depending on the underlying PF device, ADQ cannot be enabled when the
+ following features are enabled:
+
+ + Data Center Bridging (DCB)
+ + Multiple Functions per Port (MFP)
+ + Sideband Filters
+
+1. Create traffic classes (TCs). Maximum of 8 TCs can be created per interface.
+The shaper bw_rlimit parameter is optional.
+
+Example: Sets up two tcs, tc0 and tc1, with 16 queues each and max tx rate set
+to 1Gbit for tc0 and 3Gbit for tc1.
+
+::
+
+ tc qdisc add dev <interface> root mqprio num_tc 2 map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
+ queues 16@0 16@16 hw 1 mode channel shaper bw_rlimit min_rate 1Gbit 2Gbit
+ max_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit
+
+map: priority mapping for up to 16 priorities to tcs (e.g. map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
+sets priorities 0-3 to use tc0 and 4-7 to use tc1)
+
+queues: for each tc, <num queues>@<offset> (e.g. queues 16@0 16@16 assigns
+16 queues to tc0 at offset 0 and 16 queues to tc1 at offset 16. Max total
+number of queues for all tcs is 64 or number of cores, whichever is lower.)
+
+hw 1 mode channel: ‘channel’ with ‘hw’ set to 1 is a new new hardware
+offload mode in mqprio that makes full use of the mqprio options, the
+TCs, the queue configurations, and the QoS parameters.
+
+shaper bw_rlimit: for each tc, sets minimum and maximum bandwidth rates.
+Totals must be equal or less than port speed.
+
+For example: min_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit: Verify bandwidth limit using network
+monitoring tools such as ``ifstat`` or ``sar -n DEV [interval] [number of samples]``
+
+NOTE:
+ Setting up channels via ethtool (ethtool -L) is not supported when the
+ TCs are configured using mqprio.
+
+2. Enable HW TC offload on interface::
+
+ # ethtool -K <interface> hw-tc-offload on
+
+3. Apply TCs to ingress (RX) flow of interface::
+
+ # tc qdisc add dev <interface> ingress
+
+NOTES:
+ - Run all tc commands from the iproute2 <pathtoiproute2>/tc/ directory
+ - ADq is not compatible with cloud filters
+ - Setting up channels via ethtool (ethtool -L) is not supported when the TCs
+ are configured using mqprio
+ - You must have iproute2 latest version
+ - NVM version 6.01 or later is required
+ - ADq cannot be enabled when any the following features are enabled: Data
+ Center Bridging (DCB), Multiple Functions per Port (MFP), or Sideband Filters
+ - If another driver (for example, DPDK) has set cloud filters, you cannot
+ enable ADq
+ - Tunnel filters are not supported in ADq. If encapsulated packets do arrive
+ in non-tunnel mode, filtering will be done on the inner headers. For example,
+ for VXLAN traffic in non-tunnel mode, PCTYPE is identified as a VXLAN
+ encapsulated packet, outer headers are ignored. Therefore, inner headers are
+ matched.
+ - If a TC filter on a PF matches traffic over a VF (on the PF), that traffic
+ will be routed to the appropriate queue of the PF, and will not be passed on
+ the VF. Such traffic will end up getting dropped higher up in the TCP/IP
+ stack as it does not match PF address data.
+ - If traffic matches multiple TC filters that point to different TCs, that
+ traffic will be duplicated and sent to all matching TC queues. The hardware
+ switch mirrors the packet to a VSI list when multiple filters are matched.
+
+
+Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+============================
+
+Bonding fails with VFs bound to an Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700 series device
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+If you bind Virtual Functions (VFs) to an Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700
+series based device, the VF slaves may fail when they become the active slave.
+If the MAC address of the VF is set by the PF (Physical Function) of the
+device, when you add a slave, or change the active-backup slave, Linux bonding
+tries to sync the backup slave's MAC address to the same MAC address as the
+active slave. Linux bonding will fail at this point. This issue will not occur
+if the VF's MAC address is not set by the PF.
+
+Traffic Is Not Being Passed Between VM and Client
+-------------------------------------------------
+You may not be able to pass traffic between a client system and a
+Virtual Machine (VM) running on a separate host if the Virtual Function
+(VF, or Virtual NIC) is not in trusted mode and spoof checking is enabled
+on the VF. Note that this situation can occur in any combination of client,
+host, and guest operating system. For information on how to set the VF to
+trusted mode, refer to the section "VLAN Tag Packet Steering" in this
+readme document. For information on setting spoof checking, refer to the
+section "MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature" in this readme document.
+
+Do not unload port driver if VF with active VM is bound to it
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+Do not unload a port's driver if a Virtual Function (VF) with an active Virtual
+Machine (VM) is bound to it. Doing so will cause the port to appear to hang.
+Once the VM shuts down, or otherwise releases the VF, the command will complete.
+
+Using four traffic classes fails
+--------------------------------
+Do not try to reserve more than three traffic classes in the iavf driver. Doing
+so will fail to set any traffic classes and will cause the driver to write
+errors to stdout. Use a maximum of three queues to avoid this issue.
+
+Multiple log error messages on iavf driver removal
+--------------------------------------------------
+If you have several VFs and you remove the iavf driver, several instances of
+the following log errors are written to the log::
+
+ Unable to send opcode 2 to PF, err I40E_ERR_QUEUE_EMPTY, aq_err ok
+ Unable to send the message to VF 2 aq_err 12
+ ARQ Overflow Error detected
+
+Virtual machine does not get link
+---------------------------------
+If the virtual machine has more than one virtual port assigned to it, and those
+virtual ports are bound to different physical ports, you may not get link on
+all of the virtual ports. The following command may work around the issue::
+
+ # ethtool -r <PF>
+
+Where <PF> is the PF interface in the host, for example: p5p1. You may need to
+run the command more than once to get link on all virtual ports.
+
+MAC address of Virtual Function changes unexpectedly
+----------------------------------------------------
+If a Virtual Function's MAC address is not assigned in the host, then the VF
+(virtual function) driver will use a random MAC address. This random MAC
+address may change each time the VF driver is reloaded. You can assign a static
+MAC address in the host machine. This static MAC address will survive
+a VF driver reload.
+
+Driver Buffer Overflow Fix
+--------------------------
+The fix to resolve CVE-2016-8105, referenced in Intel SA-00069
+https://www.intel.com/content/www/us/en/security-center/advisory/intel-sa-00069.html
+is included in this and future versions of the driver.
+
+Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network
+------------------------------------------------------
+Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have one system
+on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain (non-partitioned
+switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces will respond to IP traffic
+for any IP address assigned to the system. This results in unbalanced receive
+traffic.
+
+If you have multiple interfaces in a server, either turn on ARP filtering by
+entering::
+
+ # echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter
+
+NOTE:
+ This setting is not saved across reboots. The configuration change can be
+ made permanent by adding the following line to the file /etc/sysctl.conf::
+
+ net.ipv4.conf.all.arp_filter = 1
+
+Another alternative is to install the interfaces in separate broadcast domains
+(either in different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs).
+
+Rx Page Allocation Errors
+-------------------------
+'Page allocation failure. order:0' errors may occur under stress.
+This is caused by the way the Linux kernel reports this stressed condition.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://support.intel.com
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ice.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ice.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dc2e60ced
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ice.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,1040 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+=================================================================
+Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 800 Series
+=================================================================
+
+Intel ice Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 2018-2021 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Overview
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Important Notes
+- Additional Features & Configurations
+- Performance Optimization
+
+
+The associated Virtual Function (VF) driver for this driver is iavf.
+
+Driver information can be obtained using ethtool and lspci.
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your Intel adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply to use
+with Linux.
+
+This driver supports XDP (Express Data Path) and AF_XDP zero-copy. Note that
+XDP is blocked for frame sizes larger than 3KB.
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+
+Important Notes
+===============
+
+Packet drops may occur under receive stress
+-------------------------------------------
+Devices based on the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 800 Series are designed to
+tolerate a limited amount of system latency during PCIe and DMA transactions.
+If these transactions take longer than the tolerated latency, it can impact the
+length of time the packets are buffered in the device and associated memory,
+which may result in dropped packets. These packets drops typically do not have
+a noticeable impact on throughput and performance under standard workloads.
+
+If these packet drops appear to affect your workload, the following may improve
+the situation:
+
+1) Make sure that your system's physical memory is in a high-performance
+ configuration, as recommended by the platform vendor. A common
+ recommendation is for all channels to be populated with a single DIMM
+ module.
+2) In your system's BIOS/UEFI settings, select the "Performance" profile.
+3) Your distribution may provide tools like "tuned," which can help tweak
+ kernel settings to achieve better standard settings for different workloads.
+
+
+Configuring SR-IOV for improved network security
+------------------------------------------------
+In a virtualized environment, on Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapters that
+support SR-IOV, the virtual function (VF) may be subject to malicious behavior.
+Software-generated layer two frames, like IEEE 802.3x (link flow control), IEEE
+802.1Qbb (priority based flow-control), and others of this type, are not
+expected and can throttle traffic between the host and the virtual switch,
+reducing performance. To resolve this issue, and to ensure isolation from
+unintended traffic streams, configure all SR-IOV enabled ports for VLAN tagging
+from the administrative interface on the PF. This configuration allows
+unexpected, and potentially malicious, frames to be dropped.
+
+See "Configuring VLAN Tagging on SR-IOV Enabled Adapter Ports" later in this
+README for configuration instructions.
+
+
+Do not unload port driver if VF with active VM is bound to it
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+Do not unload a port's driver if a Virtual Function (VF) with an active Virtual
+Machine (VM) is bound to it. Doing so will cause the port to appear to hang.
+Once the VM shuts down, or otherwise releases the VF, the command will
+complete.
+
+
+Important notes for SR-IOV and Link Aggregation
+-----------------------------------------------
+Link Aggregation is mutually exclusive with SR-IOV.
+
+- If Link Aggregation is active, SR-IOV VFs cannot be created on the PF.
+- If SR-IOV is active, you cannot set up Link Aggregation on the interface.
+
+Bridging and MACVLAN are also affected by this. If you wish to use bridging or
+MACVLAN with SR-IOV, you must set up bridging or MACVLAN before enabling
+SR-IOV. If you are using bridging or MACVLAN in conjunction with SR-IOV, and
+you want to remove the interface from the bridge or MACVLAN, you must follow
+these steps:
+
+1. Destroy SR-IOV VFs if they exist
+2. Remove the interface from the bridge or MACVLAN
+3. Recreate SRIOV VFs as needed
+
+
+Additional Features and Configurations
+======================================
+
+ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool
+version is required for this functionality. Download it at:
+https://kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+NOTE: The rx_bytes value of ethtool does not match the rx_bytes value of
+Netdev, due to the 4-byte CRC being stripped by the device. The difference
+between the two rx_bytes values will be 4 x the number of Rx packets. For
+example, if Rx packets are 10 and Netdev (software statistics) displays
+rx_bytes as "X", then ethtool (hardware statistics) will display rx_bytes as
+"X+40" (4 bytes CRC x 10 packets).
+
+
+Viewing Link Messages
+---------------------
+Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is
+restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on
+your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following::
+
+ # dmesg -n 8
+
+NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+
+Dynamic Device Personalization
+------------------------------
+Dynamic Device Personalization (DDP) allows you to change the packet processing
+pipeline of a device by applying a profile package to the device at runtime.
+Profiles can be used to, for example, add support for new protocols, change
+existing protocols, or change default settings. DDP profiles can also be rolled
+back without rebooting the system.
+
+The DDP package loads during device initialization. The driver looks for
+``intel/ice/ddp/ice.pkg`` in your firmware root (typically ``/lib/firmware/``
+or ``/lib/firmware/updates/``) and checks that it contains a valid DDP package
+file.
+
+NOTE: Your distribution should likely have provided the latest DDP file, but if
+ice.pkg is missing, you can find it in the linux-firmware repository or from
+intel.com.
+
+If the driver is unable to load the DDP package, the device will enter Safe
+Mode. Safe Mode disables advanced and performance features and supports only
+basic traffic and minimal functionality, such as updating the NVM or
+downloading a new driver or DDP package. Safe Mode only applies to the affected
+physical function and does not impact any other PFs. See the "Intel(R) Ethernet
+Adapters and Devices User Guide" for more details on DDP and Safe Mode.
+
+NOTES:
+
+- If you encounter issues with the DDP package file, you may need to download
+ an updated driver or DDP package file. See the log messages for more
+ information.
+
+- The ice.pkg file is a symbolic link to the default DDP package file.
+
+- You cannot update the DDP package if any PF drivers are already loaded. To
+ overwrite a package, unload all PFs and then reload the driver with the new
+ package.
+
+- Only the first loaded PF per device can download a package for that device.
+
+You can install specific DDP package files for different physical devices in
+the same system. To install a specific DDP package file:
+
+1. Download the DDP package file you want for your device.
+
+2. Rename the file ice-xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx.pkg, where 'xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx' is the
+ unique 64-bit PCI Express device serial number (in hex) of the device you
+ want the package downloaded on. The filename must include the complete
+ serial number (including leading zeros) and be all lowercase. For example,
+ if the 64-bit serial number is b887a3ffffca0568, then the file name would be
+ ice-b887a3ffffca0568.pkg.
+
+ To find the serial number from the PCI bus address, you can use the
+ following command::
+
+ # lspci -vv -s af:00.0 | grep -i Serial
+ Capabilities: [150 v1] Device Serial Number b8-87-a3-ff-ff-ca-05-68
+
+ You can use the following command to format the serial number without the
+ dashes::
+
+ # lspci -vv -s af:00.0 | grep -i Serial | awk '{print $7}' | sed s/-//g
+ b887a3ffffca0568
+
+3. Copy the renamed DDP package file to
+ ``/lib/firmware/updates/intel/ice/ddp/``. If the directory does not yet
+ exist, create it before copying the file.
+
+4. Unload all of the PFs on the device.
+
+5. Reload the driver with the new package.
+
+NOTE: The presence of a device-specific DDP package file overrides the loading
+of the default DDP package file (ice.pkg).
+
+
+Intel(R) Ethernet Flow Director
+-------------------------------
+The Intel Ethernet Flow Director performs the following tasks:
+
+- Directs receive packets according to their flows to different queues
+- Enables tight control on routing a flow in the platform
+- Matches flows and CPU cores for flow affinity
+
+NOTE: This driver supports the following flow types:
+
+- IPv4
+- TCPv4
+- UDPv4
+- SCTPv4
+- IPv6
+- TCPv6
+- UDPv6
+- SCTPv6
+
+Each flow type supports valid combinations of IP addresses (source or
+destination) and UDP/TCP/SCTP ports (source and destination). You can supply
+only a source IP address, a source IP address and a destination port, or any
+combination of one or more of these four parameters.
+
+NOTE: This driver allows you to filter traffic based on a user-defined flexible
+two-byte pattern and offset by using the ethtool user-def and mask fields. Only
+L3 and L4 flow types are supported for user-defined flexible filters. For a
+given flow type, you must clear all Intel Ethernet Flow Director filters before
+changing the input set (for that flow type).
+
+
+Flow Director Filters
+---------------------
+Flow Director filters are used to direct traffic that matches specified
+characteristics. They are enabled through ethtool's ntuple interface. To enable
+or disable the Intel Ethernet Flow Director and these filters::
+
+ # ethtool -K <ethX> ntuple <off|on>
+
+NOTE: When you disable ntuple filters, all the user programmed filters are
+flushed from the driver cache and hardware. All needed filters must be re-added
+when ntuple is re-enabled.
+
+To display all of the active filters::
+
+ # ethtool -u <ethX>
+
+To add a new filter::
+
+ # ethtool -U <ethX> flow-type <type> src-ip <ip> [m <ip_mask>] dst-ip <ip>
+ [m <ip_mask>] src-port <port> [m <port_mask>] dst-port <port> [m <port_mask>]
+ action <queue>
+
+ Where:
+ <ethX> - the Ethernet device to program
+ <type> - can be ip4, tcp4, udp4, sctp4, ip6, tcp6, udp6, sctp6
+ <ip> - the IP address to match on
+ <ip_mask> - the IPv4 address to mask on
+ NOTE: These filters use inverted masks.
+ <port> - the port number to match on
+ <port_mask> - the 16-bit integer for masking
+ NOTE: These filters use inverted masks.
+ <queue> - the queue to direct traffic toward (-1 discards the
+ matched traffic)
+
+To delete a filter::
+
+ # ethtool -U <ethX> delete <N>
+
+ Where <N> is the filter ID displayed when printing all the active filters,
+ and may also have been specified using "loc <N>" when adding the filter.
+
+EXAMPLES:
+
+To add a filter that directs packet to queue 2::
+
+ # ethtool -U <ethX> flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \
+ 192.168.10.2 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 action 2 [loc 1]
+
+To set a filter using only the source and destination IP address::
+
+ # ethtool -U <ethX> flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \
+ 192.168.10.2 action 2 [loc 1]
+
+To set a filter based on a user-defined pattern and offset::
+
+ # ethtool -U <ethX> flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \
+ 192.168.10.2 user-def 0x4FFFF action 2 [loc 1]
+
+ where the value of the user-def field contains the offset (4 bytes) and
+ the pattern (0xffff).
+
+To match TCP traffic sent from 192.168.0.1, port 5300, directed to 192.168.0.5,
+port 80, and then send it to queue 7::
+
+ # ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 dst-ip 192.168.0.5
+ src-port 5300 dst-port 80 action 7
+
+To add a TCPv4 filter with a partial mask for a source IP subnet::
+
+ # ethtool -U <ethX> flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.0.0 m 0.255.255.255 dst-ip
+ 192.168.5.12 src-port 12600 dst-port 31 action 12
+
+NOTES:
+
+For each flow-type, the programmed filters must all have the same matching
+input set. For example, issuing the following two commands is acceptable::
+
+ # ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7
+ # ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10
+
+Issuing the next two commands, however, is not acceptable, since the first
+specifies src-ip and the second specifies dst-ip::
+
+ # ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7
+ # ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10
+
+The second command will fail with an error. You may program multiple filters
+with the same fields, using different values, but, on one device, you may not
+program two tcp4 filters with different matching fields.
+
+The ice driver does not support matching on a subportion of a field, thus
+partial mask fields are not supported.
+
+
+Flex Byte Flow Director Filters
+-------------------------------
+The driver also supports matching user-defined data within the packet payload.
+This flexible data is specified using the "user-def" field of the ethtool
+command in the following way:
+
+.. table::
+
+ ============================== ============================
+ ``31 28 24 20 16`` ``15 12 8 4 0``
+ ``offset into packet payload`` ``2 bytes of flexible data``
+ ============================== ============================
+
+For example,
+
+::
+
+ ... user-def 0x4FFFF ...
+
+tells the filter to look 4 bytes into the payload and match that value against
+0xFFFF. The offset is based on the beginning of the payload, and not the
+beginning of the packet. Thus
+
+::
+
+ flow-type tcp4 ... user-def 0x8BEAF ...
+
+would match TCP/IPv4 packets which have the value 0xBEAF 8 bytes into the
+TCP/IPv4 payload.
+
+Note that ICMP headers are parsed as 4 bytes of header and 4 bytes of payload.
+Thus to match the first byte of the payload, you must actually add 4 bytes to
+the offset. Also note that ip4 filters match both ICMP frames as well as raw
+(unknown) ip4 frames, where the payload will be the L3 payload of the IP4
+frame.
+
+The maximum offset is 64. The hardware will only read up to 64 bytes of data
+from the payload. The offset must be even because the flexible data is 2 bytes
+long and must be aligned to byte 0 of the packet payload.
+
+The user-defined flexible offset is also considered part of the input set and
+cannot be programmed separately for multiple filters of the same type. However,
+the flexible data is not part of the input set and multiple filters may use the
+same offset but match against different data.
+
+
+RSS Hash Flow
+-------------
+Allows you to set the hash bytes per flow type and any combination of one or
+more options for Receive Side Scaling (RSS) hash byte configuration.
+
+::
+
+ # ethtool -N <ethX> rx-flow-hash <type> <option>
+
+ Where <type> is:
+ tcp4 signifying TCP over IPv4
+ udp4 signifying UDP over IPv4
+ tcp6 signifying TCP over IPv6
+ udp6 signifying UDP over IPv6
+ And <option> is one or more of:
+ s Hash on the IP source address of the Rx packet.
+ d Hash on the IP destination address of the Rx packet.
+ f Hash on bytes 0 and 1 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet.
+ n Hash on bytes 2 and 3 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet.
+
+
+Accelerated Receive Flow Steering (aRFS)
+----------------------------------------
+Devices based on the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 800 Series support
+Accelerated Receive Flow Steering (aRFS) on the PF. aRFS is a load-balancing
+mechanism that allows you to direct packets to the same CPU where an
+application is running or consuming the packets in that flow.
+
+NOTES:
+
+- aRFS requires that ntuple filtering is enabled via ethtool.
+- aRFS support is limited to the following packet types:
+
+ - TCP over IPv4 and IPv6
+ - UDP over IPv4 and IPv6
+ - Nonfragmented packets
+
+- aRFS only supports Flow Director filters, which consist of the
+ source/destination IP addresses and source/destination ports.
+- aRFS and ethtool's ntuple interface both use the device's Flow Director. aRFS
+ and ntuple features can coexist, but you may encounter unexpected results if
+ there's a conflict between aRFS and ntuple requests. See "Intel(R) Ethernet
+ Flow Director" for additional information.
+
+To set up aRFS:
+
+1. Enable the Intel Ethernet Flow Director and ntuple filters using ethtool.
+
+::
+
+ # ethtool -K <ethX> ntuple on
+
+2. Set up the number of entries in the global flow table. For example:
+
+::
+
+ # NUM_RPS_ENTRIES=16384
+ # echo $NUM_RPS_ENTRIES > /proc/sys/net/core/rps_sock_flow_entries
+
+3. Set up the number of entries in the per-queue flow table. For example:
+
+::
+
+ # NUM_RX_QUEUES=64
+ # for file in /sys/class/net/$IFACE/queues/rx-*/rps_flow_cnt; do
+ # echo $(($NUM_RPS_ENTRIES/$NUM_RX_QUEUES)) > $file;
+ # done
+
+4. Disable the IRQ balance daemon (this is only a temporary stop of the service
+ until the next reboot).
+
+::
+
+ # systemctl stop irqbalance
+
+5. Configure the interrupt affinity.
+
+ See ``/Documentation/core-api/irq/irq-affinity.rst``
+
+
+To disable aRFS using ethtool::
+
+ # ethtool -K <ethX> ntuple off
+
+NOTE: This command will disable ntuple filters and clear any aRFS filters in
+software and hardware.
+
+Example Use Case:
+
+1. Set the server application on the desired CPU (e.g., CPU 4).
+
+::
+
+ # taskset -c 4 netserver
+
+2. Use netperf to route traffic from the client to CPU 4 on the server with
+ aRFS configured. This example uses TCP over IPv4.
+
+::
+
+ # netperf -H <Host IPv4 Address> -t TCP_STREAM
+
+
+Enabling Virtual Functions (VFs)
+--------------------------------
+Use sysfs to enable virtual functions (VF).
+
+For example, you can create 4 VFs as follows::
+
+ # echo 4 > /sys/class/net/<ethX>/device/sriov_numvfs
+
+To disable VFs, write 0 to the same file::
+
+ # echo 0 > /sys/class/net/<ethX>/device/sriov_numvfs
+
+The maximum number of VFs for the ice driver is 256 total (all ports). To check
+how many VFs each PF supports, use the following command::
+
+ # cat /sys/class/net/<ethX>/device/sriov_totalvfs
+
+Note: You cannot use SR-IOV when link aggregation (LAG)/bonding is active, and
+vice versa. To enforce this, the driver checks for this mutual exclusion.
+
+
+Displaying VF Statistics on the PF
+----------------------------------
+Use the following command to display the statistics for the PF and its VFs::
+
+ # ip -s link show dev <ethX>
+
+NOTE: The output of this command can be very large due to the maximum number of
+possible VFs.
+
+The PF driver will display a subset of the statistics for the PF and for all
+VFs that are configured. The PF will always print a statistics block for each
+of the possible VFs, and it will show zero for all unconfigured VFs.
+
+
+Configuring VLAN Tagging on SR-IOV Enabled Adapter Ports
+--------------------------------------------------------
+To configure VLAN tagging for the ports on an SR-IOV enabled adapter, use the
+following command. The VLAN configuration should be done before the VF driver
+is loaded or the VM is booted. The VF is not aware of the VLAN tag being
+inserted on transmit and removed on received frames (sometimes called "port
+VLAN" mode).
+
+::
+
+ # ip link set dev <ethX> vf <id> vlan <vlan id>
+
+For example, the following will configure PF eth0 and the first VF on VLAN 10::
+
+ # ip link set dev eth0 vf 0 vlan 10
+
+
+Enabling a VF link if the port is disconnected
+----------------------------------------------
+If the physical function (PF) link is down, you can force link up (from the
+host PF) on any virtual functions (VF) bound to the PF.
+
+For example, to force link up on VF 0 bound to PF eth0::
+
+ # ip link set eth0 vf 0 state enable
+
+Note: If the command does not work, it may not be supported by your system.
+
+
+Setting the MAC Address for a VF
+--------------------------------
+To change the MAC address for the specified VF::
+
+ # ip link set <ethX> vf 0 mac <address>
+
+For example::
+
+ # ip link set <ethX> vf 0 mac 00:01:02:03:04:05
+
+This setting lasts until the PF is reloaded.
+
+NOTE: Assigning a MAC address for a VF from the host will disable any
+subsequent requests to change the MAC address from within the VM. This is a
+security feature. The VM is not aware of this restriction, so if this is
+attempted in the VM, it will trigger MDD events.
+
+
+Trusted VFs and VF Promiscuous Mode
+-----------------------------------
+This feature allows you to designate a particular VF as trusted and allows that
+trusted VF to request selective promiscuous mode on the Physical Function (PF).
+
+To set a VF as trusted or untrusted, enter the following command in the
+Hypervisor::
+
+ # ip link set dev <ethX> vf 1 trust [on|off]
+
+NOTE: It's important to set the VF to trusted before setting promiscuous mode.
+If the VM is not trusted, the PF will ignore promiscuous mode requests from the
+VF. If the VM becomes trusted after the VF driver is loaded, you must make a
+new request to set the VF to promiscuous.
+
+Once the VF is designated as trusted, use the following commands in the VM to
+set the VF to promiscuous mode.
+
+For promiscuous all::
+
+ # ip link set <ethX> promisc on
+ Where <ethX> is a VF interface in the VM
+
+For promiscuous Multicast::
+
+ # ip link set <ethX> allmulticast on
+ Where <ethX> is a VF interface in the VM
+
+NOTE: By default, the ethtool private flag vf-true-promisc-support is set to
+"off," meaning that promiscuous mode for the VF will be limited. To set the
+promiscuous mode for the VF to true promiscuous and allow the VF to see all
+ingress traffic, use the following command::
+
+ # ethtool --set-priv-flags <ethX> vf-true-promisc-support on
+
+The vf-true-promisc-support private flag does not enable promiscuous mode;
+rather, it designates which type of promiscuous mode (limited or true) you will
+get when you enable promiscuous mode using the ip link commands above. Note
+that this is a global setting that affects the entire device. However, the
+vf-true-promisc-support private flag is only exposed to the first PF of the
+device. The PF remains in limited promiscuous mode regardless of the
+vf-true-promisc-support setting.
+
+Next, add a VLAN interface on the VF interface. For example::
+
+ # ip link add link eth2 name eth2.100 type vlan id 100
+
+Note that the order in which you set the VF to promiscuous mode and add the
+VLAN interface does not matter (you can do either first). The result in this
+example is that the VF will get all traffic that is tagged with VLAN 100.
+
+
+Malicious Driver Detection (MDD) for VFs
+----------------------------------------
+Some Intel Ethernet devices use Malicious Driver Detection (MDD) to detect
+malicious traffic from the VF and disable Tx/Rx queues or drop the offending
+packet until a VF driver reset occurs. You can view MDD messages in the PF's
+system log using the dmesg command.
+
+- If the PF driver logs MDD events from the VF, confirm that the correct VF
+ driver is installed.
+- To restore functionality, you can manually reload the VF or VM or enable
+ automatic VF resets.
+- When automatic VF resets are enabled, the PF driver will immediately reset
+ the VF and reenable queues when it detects MDD events on the receive path.
+- If automatic VF resets are disabled, the PF will not automatically reset the
+ VF when it detects MDD events.
+
+To enable or disable automatic VF resets, use the following command::
+
+ # ethtool --set-priv-flags <ethX> mdd-auto-reset-vf on|off
+
+
+MAC and VLAN Anti-Spoofing Feature for VFs
+------------------------------------------
+When a malicious driver on a Virtual Function (VF) interface attempts to send a
+spoofed packet, it is dropped by the hardware and not transmitted.
+
+NOTE: This feature can be disabled for a specific VF::
+
+ # ip link set <ethX> vf <vf id> spoofchk {off|on}
+
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
+to a value larger than the default value of 1500.
+
+Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the
+following where <ethX> is the interface number::
+
+ # ifconfig <ethX> mtu 9000 up
+
+Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows::
+
+ # ip link set mtu 9000 dev <ethX>
+ # ip link set up dev <ethX>
+
+This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+
+NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for jumbo frames is 9702. This corresponds to the
+maximum jumbo frame size of 9728 bytes.
+
+NOTE: This driver will attempt to use multiple page sized buffers to receive
+each jumbo packet. This should help to avoid buffer starvation issues when
+allocating receive packets.
+
+NOTE: Packet loss may have a greater impact on throughput when you use jumbo
+frames. If you observe a drop in performance after enabling jumbo frames,
+enabling flow control may mitigate the issue.
+
+
+Speed and Duplex Configuration
+------------------------------
+In addressing speed and duplex configuration issues, you need to distinguish
+between copper-based adapters and fiber-based adapters.
+
+In the default mode, an Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using copper
+connections will attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner to determine
+the best setting. If the adapter cannot establish link with the link partner
+using auto-negotiation, you may need to manually configure the adapter and link
+partner to identical settings to establish link and pass packets. This should
+only be needed when attempting to link with an older switch that does not
+support auto-negotiation or one that has been forced to a specific speed or
+duplex mode. Your link partner must match the setting you choose. 1 Gbps speeds
+and higher cannot be forced. Use the autonegotiation advertising setting to
+manually set devices for 1 Gbps and higher.
+
+Speed, duplex, and autonegotiation advertising are configured through the
+ethtool utility. For the latest version, download and install ethtool from the
+following website:
+
+ https://kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+To see the speed configurations your device supports, run the following::
+
+ # ethtool <ethX>
+
+Caution: Only experienced network administrators should force speed and duplex
+or change autonegotiation advertising manually. The settings at the switch must
+always match the adapter settings. Adapter performance may suffer or your
+adapter may not operate if you configure the adapter differently from your
+switch.
+
+
+Data Center Bridging (DCB)
+--------------------------
+NOTE: The kernel assumes that TC0 is available, and will disable Priority Flow
+Control (PFC) on the device if TC0 is not available. To fix this, ensure TC0 is
+enabled when setting up DCB on your switch.
+
+DCB is a configuration Quality of Service implementation in hardware. It uses
+the VLAN priority tag (802.1p) to filter traffic. That means that there are 8
+different priorities that traffic can be filtered into. It also enables
+priority flow control (802.1Qbb) which can limit or eliminate the number of
+dropped packets during network stress. Bandwidth can be allocated to each of
+these priorities, which is enforced at the hardware level (802.1Qaz).
+
+DCB is normally configured on the network using the DCBX protocol (802.1Qaz), a
+specialization of LLDP (802.1AB). The ice driver supports the following
+mutually exclusive variants of DCBX support:
+
+1) Firmware-based LLDP Agent
+2) Software-based LLDP Agent
+
+In firmware-based mode, firmware intercepts all LLDP traffic and handles DCBX
+negotiation transparently for the user. In this mode, the adapter operates in
+"willing" DCBX mode, receiving DCB settings from the link partner (typically a
+switch). The local user can only query the negotiated DCB configuration. For
+information on configuring DCBX parameters on a switch, please consult the
+switch manufacturer's documentation.
+
+In software-based mode, LLDP traffic is forwarded to the network stack and user
+space, where a software agent can handle it. In this mode, the adapter can
+operate in either "willing" or "nonwilling" DCBX mode and DCB configuration can
+be both queried and set locally. This mode requires the FW-based LLDP Agent to
+be disabled.
+
+NOTE:
+
+- You can enable and disable the firmware-based LLDP Agent using an ethtool
+ private flag. Refer to the "FW-LLDP (Firmware Link Layer Discovery Protocol)"
+ section in this README for more information.
+- In software-based DCBX mode, you can configure DCB parameters using software
+ LLDP/DCBX agents that interface with the Linux kernel's DCB Netlink API. We
+ recommend using OpenLLDP as the DCBX agent when running in software mode. For
+ more information, see the OpenLLDP man pages and
+ https://github.com/intel/openlldp.
+- The driver implements the DCB netlink interface layer to allow the user space
+ to communicate with the driver and query DCB configuration for the port.
+- iSCSI with DCB is not supported.
+
+
+FW-LLDP (Firmware Link Layer Discovery Protocol)
+------------------------------------------------
+Use ethtool to change FW-LLDP settings. The FW-LLDP setting is per port and
+persists across boots.
+
+To enable LLDP::
+
+ # ethtool --set-priv-flags <ethX> fw-lldp-agent on
+
+To disable LLDP::
+
+ # ethtool --set-priv-flags <ethX> fw-lldp-agent off
+
+To check the current LLDP setting::
+
+ # ethtool --show-priv-flags <ethX>
+
+NOTE: You must enable the UEFI HII "LLDP Agent" attribute for this setting to
+take effect. If "LLDP AGENT" is set to disabled, you cannot enable it from the
+OS.
+
+
+Flow Control
+------------
+Ethernet Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) can be configured with ethtool to enable
+receiving and transmitting pause frames for ice. When transmit is enabled,
+pause frames are generated when the receive packet buffer crosses a predefined
+threshold. When receive is enabled, the transmit unit will halt for the time
+delay specified when a pause frame is received.
+
+NOTE: You must have a flow control capable link partner.
+
+Flow Control is disabled by default.
+
+Use ethtool to change the flow control settings.
+
+To enable or disable Rx or Tx Flow Control::
+
+ # ethtool -A <ethX> rx <on|off> tx <on|off>
+
+Note: This command only enables or disables Flow Control if auto-negotiation is
+disabled. If auto-negotiation is enabled, this command changes the parameters
+used for auto-negotiation with the link partner.
+
+Note: Flow Control auto-negotiation is part of link auto-negotiation. Depending
+on your device, you may not be able to change the auto-negotiation setting.
+
+NOTE:
+
+- The ice driver requires flow control on both the port and link partner. If
+ flow control is disabled on one of the sides, the port may appear to hang on
+ heavy traffic.
+- You may encounter issues with link-level flow control (LFC) after disabling
+ DCB. The LFC status may show as enabled but traffic is not paused. To resolve
+ this issue, disable and reenable LFC using ethtool::
+
+ # ethtool -A <ethX> rx off tx off
+ # ethtool -A <ethX> rx on tx on
+
+
+NAPI
+----
+This driver supports NAPI (Rx polling mode).
+For more information on NAPI, see
+https://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/napi
+
+
+MACVLAN
+-------
+This driver supports MACVLAN. Kernel support for MACVLAN can be tested by
+checking if the MACVLAN driver is loaded. You can run 'lsmod | grep macvlan' to
+see if the MACVLAN driver is loaded or run 'modprobe macvlan' to try to load
+the MACVLAN driver.
+
+NOTE:
+
+- In passthru mode, you can only set up one MACVLAN device. It will inherit the
+ MAC address of the underlying PF (Physical Function) device.
+
+
+IEEE 802.1ad (QinQ) Support
+---------------------------
+The IEEE 802.1ad standard, informally known as QinQ, allows for multiple VLAN
+IDs within a single Ethernet frame. VLAN IDs are sometimes referred to as
+"tags," and multiple VLAN IDs are thus referred to as a "tag stack." Tag stacks
+allow L2 tunneling and the ability to segregate traffic within a particular
+VLAN ID, among other uses.
+
+NOTES:
+
+- Receive checksum offloads and VLAN acceleration are not supported for 802.1ad
+ (QinQ) packets.
+
+- 0x88A8 traffic will not be received unless VLAN stripping is disabled with
+ the following command::
+
+ # ethtool -K <ethX> rxvlan off
+
+- 0x88A8/0x8100 double VLANs cannot be used with 0x8100 or 0x8100/0x8100 VLANS
+ configured on the same port. 0x88a8/0x8100 traffic will not be received if
+ 0x8100 VLANs are configured.
+
+- The VF can only transmit 0x88A8/0x8100 (i.e., 802.1ad/802.1Q) traffic if:
+
+ 1) The VF is not assigned a port VLAN.
+ 2) spoofchk is disabled from the PF. If you enable spoofchk, the VF will
+ not transmit 0x88A8/0x8100 traffic.
+
+- The VF may not receive all network traffic based on the Inner VLAN header
+ when VF true promiscuous mode (vf-true-promisc-support) and double VLANs are
+ enabled in SR-IOV mode.
+
+The following are examples of how to configure 802.1ad (QinQ)::
+
+ # ip link add link eth0 eth0.24 type vlan proto 802.1ad id 24
+ # ip link add link eth0.24 eth0.24.371 type vlan proto 802.1Q id 371
+
+ Where "24" and "371" are example VLAN IDs.
+
+
+Tunnel/Overlay Stateless Offloads
+---------------------------------
+Supported tunnels and overlays include VXLAN, GENEVE, and others depending on
+hardware and software configuration. Stateless offloads are enabled by default.
+
+To view the current state of all offloads::
+
+ # ethtool -k <ethX>
+
+
+UDP Segmentation Offload
+------------------------
+Allows the adapter to offload transmit segmentation of UDP packets with
+payloads up to 64K into valid Ethernet frames. Because the adapter hardware is
+able to complete data segmentation much faster than operating system software,
+this feature may improve transmission performance.
+In addition, the adapter may use fewer CPU resources.
+
+NOTE:
+
+- The application sending UDP packets must support UDP segmentation offload.
+
+To enable/disable UDP Segmentation Offload, issue the following command::
+
+ # ethtool -K <ethX> tx-udp-segmentation [off|on]
+
+GNSS module
+-----------
+Allows user to read messages from the GNSS module and write supported commands.
+If the module is physically present, driver creates 2 TTYs for each supported
+device in /dev, ttyGNSS_<device>:<function>_0 and _1. First one (_0) is RW and
+the second one is RO.
+The protocol of write commands is dependent on the GNSS module as the driver
+writes raw bytes from the TTY to the GNSS i2c. Please refer to the module
+documentation for details.
+
+Performance Optimization
+========================
+Driver defaults are meant to fit a wide variety of workloads, but if further
+optimization is required, we recommend experimenting with the following
+settings.
+
+
+Rx Descriptor Ring Size
+-----------------------
+To reduce the number of Rx packet discards, increase the number of Rx
+descriptors for each Rx ring using ethtool.
+
+ Check if the interface is dropping Rx packets due to buffers being full
+ (rx_dropped.nic can mean that there is no PCIe bandwidth)::
+
+ # ethtool -S <ethX> | grep "rx_dropped"
+
+ If the previous command shows drops on queues, it may help to increase
+ the number of descriptors using 'ethtool -G'::
+
+ # ethtool -G <ethX> rx <N>
+ Where <N> is the desired number of ring entries/descriptors
+
+ This can provide temporary buffering for issues that create latency while
+ the CPUs process descriptors.
+
+
+Interrupt Rate Limiting
+-----------------------
+This driver supports an adaptive interrupt throttle rate (ITR) mechanism that
+is tuned for general workloads. The user can customize the interrupt rate
+control for specific workloads, via ethtool, adjusting the number of
+microseconds between interrupts.
+
+To set the interrupt rate manually, you must disable adaptive mode::
+
+ # ethtool -C <ethX> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off
+
+For lower CPU utilization:
+
+ Disable adaptive ITR and lower Rx and Tx interrupts. The examples below
+ affect every queue of the specified interface.
+
+ Setting rx-usecs and tx-usecs to 80 will limit interrupts to about
+ 12,500 interrupts per second per queue::
+
+ # ethtool -C <ethX> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs 80 tx-usecs 80
+
+For reduced latency:
+
+ Disable adaptive ITR and ITR by setting rx-usecs and tx-usecs to 0
+ using ethtool::
+
+ # ethtool -C <ethX> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs 0 tx-usecs 0
+
+Per-queue interrupt rate settings:
+
+ The following examples are for queues 1 and 3, but you can adjust other
+ queues.
+
+ To disable Rx adaptive ITR and set static Rx ITR to 10 microseconds or
+ about 100,000 interrupts/second, for queues 1 and 3::
+
+ # ethtool --per-queue <ethX> queue_mask 0xa --coalesce adaptive-rx off
+ rx-usecs 10
+
+ To show the current coalesce settings for queues 1 and 3::
+
+ # ethtool --per-queue <ethX> queue_mask 0xa --show-coalesce
+
+Bounding interrupt rates using rx-usecs-high:
+
+ :Valid Range: 0-236 (0=no limit)
+
+ The range of 0-236 microseconds provides an effective range of 4,237 to
+ 250,000 interrupts per second. The value of rx-usecs-high can be set
+ independently of rx-usecs and tx-usecs in the same ethtool command, and is
+ also independent of the adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm. The
+ underlying hardware supports granularity in 4-microsecond intervals, so
+ adjacent values may result in the same interrupt rate.
+
+ The following command would disable adaptive interrupt moderation, and allow
+ a maximum of 5 microseconds before indicating a receive or transmit was
+ complete. However, instead of resulting in as many as 200,000 interrupts per
+ second, it limits total interrupts per second to 50,000 via the rx-usecs-high
+ parameter.
+
+ ::
+
+ # ethtool -C <ethX> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs-high 20
+ rx-usecs 5 tx-usecs 5
+
+
+Virtualized Environments
+------------------------
+In addition to the other suggestions in this section, the following may be
+helpful to optimize performance in VMs.
+
+ Using the appropriate mechanism (vcpupin) in the VM, pin the CPUs to
+ individual LCPUs, making sure to use a set of CPUs included in the
+ device's local_cpulist: ``/sys/class/net/<ethX>/device/local_cpulist``.
+
+ Configure as many Rx/Tx queues in the VM as available. (See the iavf driver
+ documentation for the number of queues supported.) For example::
+
+ # ethtool -L <virt_interface> rx <max> tx <max>
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
+
+
+Trademarks
+==========
+Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its
+subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.
+
+* Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igb.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d46289e18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igb.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,213 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+==========================================================
+Linux Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+==========================================================
+
+Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Additional Configurations
+- Support
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+
+Command Line Parameters
+========================
+If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are used
+by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this
+syntax::
+
+ modprobe igb [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...]
+
+There needs to be a <VAL#> for each network port in the system supported by
+this driver. The values will be applied to each instance, in function order.
+For example::
+
+ modprobe igb max_vfs=2,4
+
+In this case, there are two network ports supported by igb in the system.
+
+NOTE: A descriptor describes a data buffer and attributes related to the data
+buffer. This information is accessed by the hardware.
+
+max_vfs
+-------
+:Valid Range: 0-7
+
+This parameter adds support for SR-IOV. It causes the driver to spawn up to
+max_vfs worth of virtual functions. If the value is greater than 0 it will
+also force the VMDq parameter to be 1 or more.
+
+The parameters for the driver are referenced by position. Thus, if you have a
+dual port adapter, or more than one adapter in your system, and want N virtual
+functions per port, you must specify a number for each port with each parameter
+separated by a comma. For example::
+
+ modprobe igb max_vfs=4
+
+This will spawn 4 VFs on the first port.
+
+::
+
+ modprobe igb max_vfs=2,4
+
+This will spawn 2 VFs on the first port and 4 VFs on the second port.
+
+NOTE: Caution must be used in loading the driver with these parameters.
+Depending on your system configuration, number of slots, etc., it is impossible
+to predict in all cases where the positions would be on the command line.
+
+NOTE: Neither the device nor the driver control how VFs are mapped into config
+space. Bus layout will vary by operating system. On operating systems that
+support it, you can check sysfs to find the mapping.
+
+NOTE: When either SR-IOV mode or VMDq mode is enabled, hardware VLAN filtering
+and VLAN tag stripping/insertion will remain enabled. Please remove the old
+VLAN filter before the new VLAN filter is added. For example::
+
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 100 // set vlan 100 for VF 0
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 0 // Delete vlan 100
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 200 // set a new vlan 200 for VF 0
+
+Debug
+-----
+:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This parameter adjusts the level debug messages displayed in the system logs.
+
+
+Additional Features and Configurations
+======================================
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
+to a value larger than the default value of 1500.
+
+Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the
+following where <x> is the interface number::
+
+ ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows::
+
+ ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x>
+ ip link set up dev eth<x>
+
+This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made
+permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file:
+
+- For RHEL: /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x>
+- For SLES: /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file>
+
+NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 9216. This value coincides
+with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9234 bytes.
+
+NOTE: Using Jumbo frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in
+poor performance or loss of link.
+
+
+ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool
+version is required for this functionality. Download it at:
+
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+
+Enabling Wake on LAN (WoL)
+--------------------------
+WoL is configured through the ethtool utility.
+
+WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For
+this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the igb driver must be loaded
+prior to shutting down or suspending the system.
+
+NOTE: Wake on LAN is only supported on port A of multi-port devices. Also
+Wake On LAN is not supported for the following device:
+- Intel(R) Gigabit VT Quad Port Server Adapter
+
+
+Multiqueue
+----------
+In this mode, a separate MSI-X vector is allocated for each queue and one for
+"other" interrupts such as link status change and errors. All interrupts are
+throttled via interrupt moderation. Interrupt moderation must be used to avoid
+interrupt storms while the driver is processing one interrupt. The moderation
+value should be at least as large as the expected time for the driver to
+process an interrupt. Multiqueue is off by default.
+
+REQUIREMENTS: MSI-X support is required for Multiqueue. If MSI-X is not found,
+the system will fallback to MSI or to Legacy interrupts. This driver supports
+receive multiqueue on all kernels that support MSI-X.
+
+NOTE: On some kernels a reboot is required to switch between single queue mode
+and multiqueue mode or vice-versa.
+
+
+MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature
+----------------------------------
+When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by the
+hardware and not transmitted.
+
+An interrupt is sent to the PF driver notifying it of the spoof attempt. When a
+spoofed packet is detected, the PF driver will send the following message to
+the system log (displayed by the "dmesg" command):
+Spoof event(s) detected on VF(n), where n = the VF that attempted to do the
+spoofing
+
+
+Setting MAC Address, VLAN and Rate Limit Using IProute2 Tool
+------------------------------------------------------------
+You can set a MAC address of a Virtual Function (VF), a default VLAN and the
+rate limit using the IProute2 tool. Download the latest version of the
+IProute2 tool from Sourceforge if your version does not have all the features
+you require.
+
+Credit Based Shaper (Qav Mode)
+------------------------------
+When enabling the CBS qdisc in the hardware offload mode, traffic shaping using
+the CBS (described in the IEEE 802.1Q-2018 Section 8.6.8.2 and discussed in the
+Annex L) algorithm will run in the i210 controller, so it's more accurate and
+uses less CPU.
+
+When using offloaded CBS, and the traffic rate obeys the configured rate
+(doesn't go above it), CBS should have little to no effect in the latency.
+
+The offloaded version of the algorithm has some limits, caused by how the idle
+slope is expressed in the adapter's registers. It can only represent idle slopes
+in 16.38431 kbps units, which means that if a idle slope of 2576kbps is
+requested, the controller will be configured to use a idle slope of ~2589 kbps,
+because the driver rounds the value up. For more details, see the comments on
+:c:func:`igb_config_tx_modes()`.
+
+NOTE: This feature is exclusive to i210 models.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igbvf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igbvf.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..40fa210c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igbvf.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+===========================================================
+Linux Base Virtual Function Driver for Intel(R) 1G Ethernet
+===========================================================
+
+Intel Gigabit Virtual Function Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Additional Configurations
+- Support
+
+This driver supports Intel 82576-based virtual function devices-based virtual
+function devices that can only be activated on kernels that support SR-IOV.
+
+SR-IOV requires the correct platform and OS support.
+
+The guest OS loading this driver must support MSI-X interrupts.
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your Intel adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply to use
+with Linux.
+
+Driver information can be obtained using ethtool, lspci, and ifconfig.
+Instructions on updating ethtool can be found in the section Additional
+Configurations later in this document.
+
+NOTE: There is a limit of a total of 32 shared VLANs to 1 or more VFs.
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+
+Additional Features and Configurations
+======================================
+
+ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool
+version is required for this functionality. Download it at:
+
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgb.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c6a233e68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgb.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,468 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+=====================================================================
+Linux Base Driver for 10 Gigabit Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+=====================================================================
+
+October 1, 2018
+
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- In This Release
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Improving Performance
+- Additional Configurations
+- Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+- Support
+
+
+
+In This Release
+===============
+
+This file describes the ixgb Linux Base Driver for the 10 Gigabit Intel(R)
+Network Connection. This driver includes support for Itanium(R)2-based
+systems.
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your 10 Gigabit adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply
+to use with Linux.
+
+The following features are available in this kernel:
+ - Native VLANs
+ - Channel Bonding (teaming)
+ - SNMP
+
+Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source:
+/Documentation/networking/bonding.rst
+
+The driver information previously displayed in the /proc filesystem is not
+supported in this release. Alternatively, you can use ethtool (version 1.6
+or later), lspci, and iproute2 to obtain the same information.
+
+Instructions on updating ethtool can be found in the section "Additional
+Configurations" later in this document.
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+The following Intel network adapters are compatible with the drivers in this
+release:
+
++------------+------------------------------+----------------------------------+
+| Controller | Adapter Name | Physical Layer |
++============+==============================+==================================+
+| 82597EX | Intel(R) PRO/10GbE LR/SR/CX4 | - 10G Base-LR (fiber) |
+| | Server Adapters | - 10G Base-SR (fiber) |
+| | | - 10G Base-CX4 (copper) |
++------------+------------------------------+----------------------------------+
+
+For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter &
+Driver ID Guide at:
+
+ https://support.intel.com
+
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+
+If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are
+used by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using
+this syntax::
+
+ modprobe ixgb [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...]
+
+For example, with two 10GbE PCI adapters, entering::
+
+ modprobe ixgb TxDescriptors=80,128
+
+loads the ixgb driver with 80 TX resources for the first adapter and 128 TX
+resources for the second adapter.
+
+The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
+unless otherwise noted.
+
+Copybreak
+---------
+:Valid Range: 0-XXXX
+:Default Value: 256
+
+ This is the maximum size of packet that is copied to a new buffer on
+ receive.
+
+Debug
+-----
+:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+ This parameter adjusts the level of debug messages displayed in the
+ system logs.
+
+FlowControl
+-----------
+:Valid Range: 0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx)
+:Default Value: 1 if no EEPROM, otherwise read from EEPROM
+
+ This parameter controls the automatic generation(Tx) and response(Rx) to
+ Ethernet PAUSE frames. There are hardware bugs associated with enabling
+ Tx flow control so beware.
+
+RxDescriptors
+-------------
+:Valid Range: 64-4096
+:Default Value: 1024
+
+ This value is the number of receive descriptors allocated by the driver.
+ Increasing this value allows the driver to buffer more incoming packets.
+ Each descriptor is 16 bytes. A receive buffer is also allocated for
+ each descriptor and can be either 2048, 4056, 8192, or 16384 bytes,
+ depending on the MTU setting. When the MTU size is 1500 or less, the
+ receive buffer size is 2048 bytes. When the MTU is greater than 1500 the
+ receive buffer size will be either 4056, 8192, or 16384 bytes. The
+ maximum MTU size is 16114.
+
+TxDescriptors
+-------------
+:Valid Range: 64-4096
+:Default Value: 256
+
+ This value is the number of transmit descriptors allocated by the driver.
+ Increasing this value allows the driver to queue more transmits. Each
+ descriptor is 16 bytes.
+
+RxIntDelay
+----------
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 72
+
+ This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of
+ 0.8192 microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU
+ efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing
+ this value adds extra latency to frame reception and can end up
+ decreasing the throughput of TCP traffic. If the system is reporting
+ dropped receives, this value may be set too high, causing the driver to
+ run out of available receive descriptors.
+
+TxIntDelay
+----------
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 32
+
+ This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of
+ 0.8192 microseconds. Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU
+ efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing
+ this value adds extra latency to frame transmission and can end up
+ decreasing the throughput of TCP traffic. If this value is set too high,
+ it will cause the driver to run out of available transmit descriptors.
+
+XsumRX
+------
+:Valid Range: 0-1
+:Default Value: 1
+
+ A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum
+ offload for received packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter hardware.
+
+RxFCHighThresh
+--------------
+:Valid Range: 1,536-262,136 (0x600 - 0x3FFF8, 8 byte granularity)
+:Default Value: 196,608 (0x30000)
+
+ Receive Flow control high threshold (when we send a pause frame)
+
+RxFCLowThresh
+-------------
+:Valid Range: 64-262,136 (0x40 - 0x3FFF8, 8 byte granularity)
+:Default Value: 163,840 (0x28000)
+
+ Receive Flow control low threshold (when we send a resume frame)
+
+FCReqTimeout
+------------
+:Valid Range: 1-65535
+:Default Value: 65535
+
+ Flow control request timeout (how long to pause the link partner's tx)
+
+IntDelayEnable
+--------------
+:Value Range: 0,1
+:Default Value: 1
+
+ Interrupt Delay, 0 disables transmit interrupt delay and 1 enables it.
+
+
+Improving Performance
+=====================
+
+With the 10 Gigabit server adapters, the default Linux configuration will
+very likely limit the total available throughput artificially. There is a set
+of configuration changes that, when applied together, will increase the ability
+of Linux to transmit and receive data. The following enhancements were
+originally acquired from settings published at https://www.spec.org/web99/ for
+various submitted results using Linux.
+
+NOTE:
+ These changes are only suggestions, and serve as a starting point for
+ tuning your network performance.
+
+The changes are made in three major ways, listed in order of greatest effect:
+
+- Use ip link to modify the mtu (maximum transmission unit) and the txqueuelen
+ parameter.
+- Use sysctl to modify /proc parameters (essentially kernel tuning)
+- Use setpci to modify the MMRBC field in PCI-X configuration space to increase
+ transmit burst lengths on the bus.
+
+NOTE:
+ setpci modifies the adapter's configuration registers to allow it to read
+ up to 4k bytes at a time (for transmits). However, for some systems the
+ behavior after modifying this register may be undefined (possibly errors of
+ some kind). A power-cycle, hard reset or explicitly setting the e6 register
+ back to 22 (setpci -d 8086:1a48 e6.b=22) may be required to get back to a
+ stable configuration.
+
+- COPY these lines and paste them into ixgb_perf.sh:
+
+::
+
+ #!/bin/bash
+ echo "configuring network performance , edit this file to change the interface
+ or device ID of 10GbE card"
+ # set mmrbc to 4k reads, modify only Intel 10GbE device IDs
+ # replace 1a48 with appropriate 10GbE device's ID installed on the system,
+ # if needed.
+ setpci -d 8086:1a48 e6.b=2e
+ # set the MTU (max transmission unit) - it requires your switch and clients
+ # to change as well.
+ # set the txqueuelen
+ # your ixgb adapter should be loaded as eth1 for this to work, change if needed
+ ip li set dev eth1 mtu 9000 txqueuelen 1000 up
+ # call the sysctl utility to modify /proc/sys entries
+ sysctl -p ./sysctl_ixgb.conf
+
+- COPY these lines and paste them into sysctl_ixgb.conf:
+
+::
+
+ # some of the defaults may be different for your kernel
+ # call this file with sysctl -p <this file>
+ # these are just suggested values that worked well to increase throughput in
+ # several network benchmark tests, your mileage may vary
+
+ ### IPV4 specific settings
+ # turn TCP timestamp support off, default 1, reduces CPU use
+ net.ipv4.tcp_timestamps = 0
+ # turn SACK support off, default on
+ # on systems with a VERY fast bus -> memory interface this is the big gainer
+ net.ipv4.tcp_sack = 0
+ # set min/default/max TCP read buffer, default 4096 87380 174760
+ net.ipv4.tcp_rmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000
+ # set min/pressure/max TCP write buffer, default 4096 16384 131072
+ net.ipv4.tcp_wmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000
+ # set min/pressure/max TCP buffer space, default 31744 32256 32768
+ net.ipv4.tcp_mem = 10000000 10000000 10000000
+
+ ### CORE settings (mostly for socket and UDP effect)
+ # set maximum receive socket buffer size, default 131071
+ net.core.rmem_max = 524287
+ # set maximum send socket buffer size, default 131071
+ net.core.wmem_max = 524287
+ # set default receive socket buffer size, default 65535
+ net.core.rmem_default = 524287
+ # set default send socket buffer size, default 65535
+ net.core.wmem_default = 524287
+ # set maximum amount of option memory buffers, default 10240
+ net.core.optmem_max = 524287
+ # set number of unprocessed input packets before kernel starts dropping them; default 300
+ net.core.netdev_max_backlog = 300000
+
+Edit the ixgb_perf.sh script if necessary to change eth1 to whatever interface
+your ixgb driver is using and/or replace '1a48' with appropriate 10GbE device's
+ID installed on the system.
+
+NOTE:
+ Unless these scripts are added to the boot process, these changes will
+ only last only until the next system reboot.
+
+
+Resolving Slow UDP Traffic
+--------------------------
+If your server does not seem to be able to receive UDP traffic as fast as it
+can receive TCP traffic, it could be because Linux, by default, does not set
+the network stack buffers as large as they need to be to support high UDP
+transfer rates. One way to alleviate this problem is to allow more memory to
+be used by the IP stack to store incoming data.
+
+For instance, use the commands::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.rmem_max=262143
+
+and::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.rmem_default=262143
+
+to increase the read buffer memory max and default to 262143 (256k - 1) from
+defaults of max=131071 (128k - 1) and default=65535 (64k - 1). These variables
+will increase the amount of memory used by the network stack for receives, and
+can be increased significantly more if necessary for your application.
+
+
+Additional Configurations
+=========================
+
+Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions
+-------------------------------------------------
+Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started is
+distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves adding
+an alias line to /etc/modprobe.conf as well as editing other system startup
+scripts and/or configuration files. Many popular Linux distributions ship
+with tools to make these changes for you. To learn the proper way to
+configure a network device for your system, refer to your distribution
+documentation. If during this process you are asked for the driver or module
+name, the name for the Linux Base Driver for the Intel 10GbE Family of
+Adapters is ixgb.
+
+Viewing Link Messages
+---------------------
+Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is
+restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on
+your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following::
+
+ dmesg -n 8
+
+NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+The driver supports Jumbo Frames for all adapters. Jumbo Frames support is
+enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than the default of 1500.
+The maximum value for the MTU is 16114. Use the ip command to
+increase the MTU size. For example::
+
+ ip li set dev ethx mtu 9000
+
+The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 16114. This value coincides
+with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 16128.
+
+Ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool
+version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality.
+
+The latest release of ethtool can be found from
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+NOTE:
+ The ethtool version 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options.
+ Support for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by
+ upgrading to the latest version.
+
+NAPI
+----
+NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the ixgb driver.
+
+See https://wiki.linuxfoundation.org/networking/napi for more information on
+NAPI.
+
+
+Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+============================
+
+NOTE:
+ After installing the driver, if your Intel Network Connection is not
+ working, verify in the "In This Release" section of the readme that you have
+ installed the correct driver.
+
+Cable Interoperability Issue with Fujitsu XENPAK Module in SmartBits Chassis
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Excessive CRC errors may be observed if the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE CX4
+Server adapter is connected to a Fujitsu XENPAK CX4 module in a SmartBits
+chassis using 15 m/24AWG cable assemblies manufactured by Fujitsu or Leoni.
+The CRC errors may be received either by the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE CX4
+Server adapter or the SmartBits. If this situation occurs using a different
+cable assembly may resolve the issue.
+
+Cable Interoperability Issues with HP Procurve 3400cl Switch Port
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+Excessive CRC errors may be observed if the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE CX4 Server
+adapter is connected to an HP Procurve 3400cl switch port using short cables
+(1 m or shorter). If this situation occurs, using a longer cable may resolve
+the issue.
+
+Excessive CRC errors may be observed using Fujitsu 24AWG cable assemblies that
+Are 10 m or longer or where using a Leoni 15 m/24AWG cable assembly. The CRC
+errors may be received either by the CX4 Server adapter or at the switch. If
+this situation occurs, using a different cable assembly may resolve the issue.
+
+Jumbo Frames System Requirement
+-------------------------------
+Memory allocation failures have been observed on Linux systems with 64 MB
+of RAM or less that are running Jumbo Frames. If you are using Jumbo
+Frames, your system may require more than the advertised minimum
+requirement of 64 MB of system memory.
+
+Performance Degradation with Jumbo Frames
+-----------------------------------------
+Degradation in throughput performance may be observed in some Jumbo frames
+environments. If this is observed, increasing the application's socket buffer
+size and/or increasing the /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_*mem entry values may help.
+See the specific application manual and /usr/src/linux*/Documentation/
+networking/ip-sysctl.txt for more details.
+
+Allocating Rx Buffers when Using Jumbo Frames
+---------------------------------------------
+Allocating Rx buffers when using Jumbo Frames on 2.6.x kernels may fail if
+the available memory is heavily fragmented. This issue may be seen with PCI-X
+adapters or with packet split disabled. This can be reduced or eliminated
+by changing the amount of available memory for receive buffer allocation, by
+increasing /proc/sys/vm/min_free_kbytes.
+
+Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network
+------------------------------------------------------
+Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have
+one system on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain
+(non-partitioned switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces
+will respond to IP traffic for any IP address assigned to the system.
+This results in unbalanced receive traffic.
+
+If you have multiple interfaces in a server, do either of the following:
+
+ - Turn on ARP filtering by entering::
+
+ echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter
+
+ - Install the interfaces in separate broadcast domains - either in
+ different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs.
+
+UDP Stress Test Dropped Packet Issue
+--------------------------------------
+Under small packets UDP stress test with 10GbE driver, the Linux system
+may drop UDP packets due to the fullness of socket buffers. You may want
+to change the driver's Flow Control variables to the minimum value for
+controlling packet reception.
+
+Tx Hangs Possible Under Stress
+------------------------------
+Under stress conditions, if TX hangs occur, turning off TSO
+"ethtool -K eth0 tso off" may resolve the problem.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbe.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbe.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0a233b17c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbe.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,557 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+===========================================================================
+Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet 10 Gigabit PCI Express Adapters
+===========================================================================
+
+Intel 10 Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Additional Configurations
+- Known Issues
+- Support
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+The driver is compatible with devices based on the following:
+
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 82598
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 82599
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X520
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X540
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller x550
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X552
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X553
+
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+SFP+ Devices with Pluggable Optics
+----------------------------------
+
+82599-BASED ADAPTERS
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+NOTES:
+- If your 82599-based Intel(R) Network Adapter came with Intel optics or is an
+Intel(R) Ethernet Server Adapter X520-2, then it only supports Intel optics
+and/or the direct attach cables listed below.
+- When 82599-based SFP+ devices are connected back to back, they should be set
+to the same Speed setting via ethtool. Results may vary if you mix speed
+settings.
+
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Supplier | Type | Part Numbers |
++===============+=======================================+==================+
+| SR Modules |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) | FTLX8571D3BCV-IT |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) | AFBR-703SDZ-IN2 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) | AFBR-703SDDZ-IN1 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| LR Modules |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) | FTLX1471D3BCV-IT |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) | AFCT-701SDZ-IN2 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) | AFCT-701SDDZ-IN1 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+
+The following is a list of 3rd party SFP+ modules that have received some
+testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices.
+
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Supplier | Type | Part Numbers |
++===============+=======================================+==================+
+| Finisar | SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate | FTLX8571D3BCL |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Avago | SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate | AFBR-700SDZ |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Finisar | SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate | FTLX1471D3BCL |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Finisar | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail) | FTLX8571D3QCV-IT |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Avago | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail) | AFBR-703SDZ-IN1 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Finisar | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail) | FTLX1471D3QCV-IT |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Avago | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail) | AFCT-701SDZ-IN1 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Finisar | 1000BASE-T SFP | FCLF8522P2BTL |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Avago | 1000BASE-T | ABCU-5710RZ |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| HP | 1000BASE-SX SFP | 453153-001 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+
+82599-based adapters support all passive and active limiting direct attach
+cables that comply with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications.
+
+Laser turns off for SFP+ when ifconfig ethX down
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+"ifconfig ethX down" turns off the laser for 82599-based SFP+ fiber adapters.
+"ifconfig ethX up" turns on the laser.
+Alternatively, you can use "ip link set [down/up] dev ethX" to turn the
+laser off and on.
+
+
+82599-based QSFP+ Adapters
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+NOTES:
+- If your 82599-based Intel(R) Network Adapter came with Intel optics, it only
+supports Intel optics.
+- 82599-based QSFP+ adapters only support 4x10 Gbps connections. 1x40 Gbps
+connections are not supported. QSFP+ link partners must be configured for
+4x10 Gbps.
+- 82599-based QSFP+ adapters do not support automatic link speed detection.
+The link speed must be configured to either 10 Gbps or 1 Gbps to match the link
+partners speed capabilities. Incorrect speed configurations will result in
+failure to link.
+- Intel(R) Ethernet Converged Network Adapter X520-Q1 only supports the optics
+and direct attach cables listed below.
+
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Supplier | Type | Part Numbers |
++===============+=======================================+==================+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G QSFP+ SRL (bailed) | E10GQSFPSR |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+
+82599-based QSFP+ adapters support all passive and active limiting QSFP+
+direct attach cables that comply with SFF-8436 v4.1 specifications.
+
+82598-BASED ADAPTERS
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+NOTES:
+- Intel(r) Ethernet Network Adapters that support removable optical modules
+only support their original module type (for example, the Intel(R) 10 Gigabit
+SR Dual Port Express Module only supports SR optical modules). If you plug in
+a different type of module, the driver will not load.
+- Hot Swapping/hot plugging optical modules is not supported.
+- Only single speed, 10 gigabit modules are supported.
+- LAN on Motherboard (LOMs) may support DA, SR, or LR modules. Other module
+types are not supported. Please see your system documentation for details.
+
+The following is a list of SFP+ modules and direct attach cables that have
+received some testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices.
+
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Supplier | Type | Part Numbers |
++===============+=======================================+==================+
+| Finisar | SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate | FTLX8571D3BCL |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Avago | SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate | AFBR-700SDZ |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Finisar | SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate | FTLX1471D3BCL |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+
+82598-based adapters support all passive direct attach cables that comply with
+SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. Active direct attach cables
+are not supported.
+
+Third party optic modules and cables referred to above are listed only for the
+purpose of highlighting third party specifications and potential
+compatibility, and are not recommendations or endorsements or sponsorship of
+any third party's product by Intel. Intel is not endorsing or promoting
+products made by any third party and the third party reference is provided
+only to share information regarding certain optic modules and cables with the
+above specifications. There may be other manufacturers or suppliers, producing
+or supplying optic modules and cables with similar or matching descriptions.
+Customers must use their own discretion and diligence to purchase optic
+modules and cables from any third party of their choice. Customers are solely
+responsible for assessing the suitability of the product and/or devices and
+for the selection of the vendor for purchasing any product. THE OPTIC MODULES
+AND CABLES REFERRED TO ABOVE ARE NOT WARRANTED OR SUPPORTED BY INTEL. INTEL
+ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
+WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF SUCH THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS OR
+SELECTION OF VENDOR BY CUSTOMERS.
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+
+max_vfs
+-------
+:Valid Range: 1-63
+
+This parameter adds support for SR-IOV. It causes the driver to spawn up to
+max_vfs worth of virtual functions.
+If the value is greater than 0 it will also force the VMDq parameter to be 1 or
+more.
+
+NOTE: This parameter is only used on kernel 3.7.x and below. On kernel 3.8.x
+and above, use sysfs to enable VFs. Also, for Red Hat distributions, this
+parameter is only used on version 6.6 and older. For version 6.7 and newer, use
+sysfs. For example::
+
+ #echo $num_vf_enabled > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs // enable VFs
+ #echo 0 > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs //disable VFs
+
+The parameters for the driver are referenced by position. Thus, if you have a
+dual port adapter, or more than one adapter in your system, and want N virtual
+functions per port, you must specify a number for each port with each parameter
+separated by a comma. For example::
+
+ modprobe ixgbe max_vfs=4
+
+This will spawn 4 VFs on the first port.
+
+::
+
+ modprobe ixgbe max_vfs=2,4
+
+This will spawn 2 VFs on the first port and 4 VFs on the second port.
+
+NOTE: Caution must be used in loading the driver with these parameters.
+Depending on your system configuration, number of slots, etc., it is impossible
+to predict in all cases where the positions would be on the command line.
+
+NOTE: Neither the device nor the driver control how VFs are mapped into config
+space. Bus layout will vary by operating system. On operating systems that
+support it, you can check sysfs to find the mapping.
+
+NOTE: When either SR-IOV mode or VMDq mode is enabled, hardware VLAN filtering
+and VLAN tag stripping/insertion will remain enabled. Please remove the old
+VLAN filter before the new VLAN filter is added. For example,
+
+::
+
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 100 // set VLAN 100 for VF 0
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 0 // Delete VLAN 100
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 200 // set a new VLAN 200 for VF 0
+
+With kernel 3.6, the driver supports the simultaneous usage of max_vfs and DCB
+features, subject to the constraints described below. Prior to kernel 3.6, the
+driver did not support the simultaneous operation of max_vfs greater than 0 and
+the DCB features (multiple traffic classes utilizing Priority Flow Control and
+Extended Transmission Selection).
+
+When DCB is enabled, network traffic is transmitted and received through
+multiple traffic classes (packet buffers in the NIC). The traffic is associated
+with a specific class based on priority, which has a value of 0 through 7 used
+in the VLAN tag. When SR-IOV is not enabled, each traffic class is associated
+with a set of receive/transmit descriptor queue pairs. The number of queue
+pairs for a given traffic class depends on the hardware configuration. When
+SR-IOV is enabled, the descriptor queue pairs are grouped into pools. The
+Physical Function (PF) and each Virtual Function (VF) is allocated a pool of
+receive/transmit descriptor queue pairs. When multiple traffic classes are
+configured (for example, DCB is enabled), each pool contains a queue pair from
+each traffic class. When a single traffic class is configured in the hardware,
+the pools contain multiple queue pairs from the single traffic class.
+
+The number of VFs that can be allocated depends on the number of traffic
+classes that can be enabled. The configurable number of traffic classes for
+each enabled VF is as follows:
+0 - 15 VFs = Up to 8 traffic classes, depending on device support
+16 - 31 VFs = Up to 4 traffic classes
+32 - 63 VFs = 1 traffic class
+
+When VFs are configured, the PF is allocated one pool as well. The PF supports
+the DCB features with the constraint that each traffic class will only use a
+single queue pair. When zero VFs are configured, the PF can support multiple
+queue pairs per traffic class.
+
+allow_unsupported_sfp
+---------------------
+:Valid Range: 0,1
+:Default Value: 0 (disabled)
+
+This parameter allows unsupported and untested SFP+ modules on 82599-based
+adapters, as long as the type of module is known to the driver.
+
+debug
+-----
+:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This parameter adjusts the level of debug messages displayed in the system
+logs.
+
+
+Additional Features and Configurations
+======================================
+
+Flow Control
+------------
+Ethernet Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) can be configured with ethtool to enable
+receiving and transmitting pause frames for ixgbe. When transmit is enabled,
+pause frames are generated when the receive packet buffer crosses a predefined
+threshold. When receive is enabled, the transmit unit will halt for the time
+delay specified when a pause frame is received.
+
+NOTE: You must have a flow control capable link partner.
+
+Flow Control is enabled by default.
+
+Use ethtool to change the flow control settings. To enable or disable Rx or
+Tx Flow Control::
+
+ ethtool -A eth? rx <on|off> tx <on|off>
+
+Note: This command only enables or disables Flow Control if auto-negotiation is
+disabled. If auto-negotiation is enabled, this command changes the parameters
+used for auto-negotiation with the link partner.
+
+To enable or disable auto-negotiation::
+
+ ethtool -s eth? autoneg <on|off>
+
+Note: Flow Control auto-negotiation is part of link auto-negotiation. Depending
+on your device, you may not be able to change the auto-negotiation setting.
+
+NOTE: For 82598 backplane cards entering 1 gigabit mode, flow control default
+behavior is changed to off. Flow control in 1 gigabit mode on these devices can
+lead to transmit hangs.
+
+Intel(R) Ethernet Flow Director
+-------------------------------
+The Intel Ethernet Flow Director performs the following tasks:
+
+- Directs receive packets according to their flows to different queues.
+- Enables tight control on routing a flow in the platform.
+- Matches flows and CPU cores for flow affinity.
+- Supports multiple parameters for flexible flow classification and load
+ balancing (in SFP mode only).
+
+NOTE: Intel Ethernet Flow Director masking works in the opposite manner from
+subnet masking. In the following command::
+
+ #ethtool -N eth11 flow-type ip4 src-ip 172.4.1.2 m 255.0.0.0 dst-ip \
+ 172.21.1.1 m 255.128.0.0 action 31
+
+The src-ip value that is written to the filter will be 0.4.1.2, not 172.0.0.0
+as might be expected. Similarly, the dst-ip value written to the filter will be
+0.21.1.1, not 172.0.0.0.
+
+To enable or disable the Intel Ethernet Flow Director::
+
+ # ethtool -K ethX ntuple <on|off>
+
+When disabling ntuple filters, all the user programmed filters are flushed from
+the driver cache and hardware. All needed filters must be re-added when ntuple
+is re-enabled.
+
+To add a filter that directs packet to queue 2, use -U or -N switch::
+
+ # ethtool -N ethX flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \
+ 192.168.10.2 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 action 2 [loc 1]
+
+To see the list of filters currently present::
+
+ # ethtool <-u|-n> ethX
+
+Sideband Perfect Filters
+------------------------
+Sideband Perfect Filters are used to direct traffic that matches specified
+characteristics. They are enabled through ethtool's ntuple interface. To add a
+new filter use the following command::
+
+ ethtool -U <device> flow-type <type> src-ip <ip> dst-ip <ip> src-port <port> \
+ dst-port <port> action <queue>
+
+Where:
+ <device> - the ethernet device to program
+ <type> - can be ip4, tcp4, udp4, or sctp4
+ <ip> - the IP address to match on
+ <port> - the port number to match on
+ <queue> - the queue to direct traffic towards (-1 discards the matched traffic)
+
+Use the following command to delete a filter::
+
+ ethtool -U <device> delete <N>
+
+Where <N> is the filter id displayed when printing all the active filters, and
+may also have been specified using "loc <N>" when adding the filter.
+
+The following example matches TCP traffic sent from 192.168.0.1, port 5300,
+directed to 192.168.0.5, port 80, and sends it to queue 7::
+
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 \
+ src-port 5300 dst-port 80 action 7
+
+For each flow-type, the programmed filters must all have the same matching
+input set. For example, issuing the following two commands is acceptable::
+
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10
+
+Issuing the next two commands, however, is not acceptable, since the first
+specifies src-ip and the second specifies dst-ip::
+
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10
+
+The second command will fail with an error. You may program multiple filters
+with the same fields, using different values, but, on one device, you may not
+program two TCP4 filters with different matching fields.
+
+Matching on a sub-portion of a field is not supported by the ixgbe driver, thus
+partial mask fields are not supported.
+
+To create filters that direct traffic to a specific Virtual Function, use the
+"user-def" parameter. Specify the user-def as a 64 bit value, where the lower 32
+bits represents the queue number, while the next 8 bits represent which VF.
+Note that 0 is the PF, so the VF identifier is offset by 1. For example::
+
+ ... user-def 0x800000002 ...
+
+specifies to direct traffic to Virtual Function 7 (8 minus 1) into queue 2 of
+that VF.
+
+Note that these filters will not break internal routing rules, and will not
+route traffic that otherwise would not have been sent to the specified Virtual
+Function.
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
+to a value larger than the default value of 1500.
+
+Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the
+following where <x> is the interface number::
+
+ ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows::
+
+ ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x>
+ ip link set up dev eth<x>
+
+This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made
+permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file::
+
+ /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x> // for RHEL
+ /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file> // for SLES
+
+NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 9710. This value coincides
+with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9728 bytes.
+
+NOTE: This driver will attempt to use multiple page sized buffers to receive
+each jumbo packet. This should help to avoid buffer starvation issues when
+allocating receive packets.
+
+NOTE: For 82599-based network connections, if you are enabling jumbo frames in
+a virtual function (VF), jumbo frames must first be enabled in the physical
+function (PF). The VF MTU setting cannot be larger than the PF MTU.
+
+NBASE-T Support
+---------------
+The ixgbe driver supports NBASE-T on some devices. However, the advertisement
+of NBASE-T speeds is suppressed by default, to accommodate broken network
+switches which cannot cope with advertised NBASE-T speeds. Use the ethtool
+command to enable advertising NBASE-T speeds on devices which support it::
+
+ ethtool -s eth? advertise 0x1800000001028
+
+On Linux systems with INTERFACES(5), this can be specified as a pre-up command
+in /etc/network/interfaces so that the interface is always brought up with
+NBASE-T support, e.g.::
+
+ iface eth? inet dhcp
+ pre-up ethtool -s eth? advertise 0x1800000001028 || true
+
+Generic Receive Offload, aka GRO
+--------------------------------
+The driver supports the in-kernel software implementation of GRO. GRO has
+shown that by coalescing Rx traffic into larger chunks of data, CPU
+utilization can be significantly reduced when under large Rx load. GRO is an
+evolution of the previously-used LRO interface. GRO is able to coalesce
+other protocols besides TCP. It's also safe to use with configurations that
+are problematic for LRO, namely bridging and iSCSI.
+
+Data Center Bridging (DCB)
+--------------------------
+NOTE:
+The kernel assumes that TC0 is available, and will disable Priority Flow
+Control (PFC) on the device if TC0 is not available. To fix this, ensure TC0 is
+enabled when setting up DCB on your switch.
+
+DCB is a configuration Quality of Service implementation in hardware. It uses
+the VLAN priority tag (802.1p) to filter traffic. That means that there are 8
+different priorities that traffic can be filtered into. It also enables
+priority flow control (802.1Qbb) which can limit or eliminate the number of
+dropped packets during network stress. Bandwidth can be allocated to each of
+these priorities, which is enforced at the hardware level (802.1Qaz).
+
+Adapter firmware implements LLDP and DCBX protocol agents as per 802.1AB and
+802.1Qaz respectively. The firmware based DCBX agent runs in willing mode only
+and can accept settings from a DCBX capable peer. Software configuration of
+DCBX parameters via dcbtool/lldptool are not supported.
+
+The ixgbe driver implements the DCB netlink interface layer to allow user-space
+to communicate with the driver and query DCB configuration for the port.
+
+ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool
+version is required for this functionality. Download it at:
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+FCoE
+----
+The ixgbe driver supports Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) and Data Center
+Bridging (DCB). This code has no default effect on the regular driver
+operation. Configuring DCB and FCoE is outside the scope of this README. Refer
+to http://www.open-fcoe.org/ for FCoE project information and contact
+ixgbe-eedc@lists.sourceforge.net for DCB information.
+
+MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature
+----------------------------------
+When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by the
+hardware and not transmitted.
+
+An interrupt is sent to the PF driver notifying it of the spoof attempt. When a
+spoofed packet is detected, the PF driver will send the following message to
+the system log (displayed by the "dmesg" command)::
+
+ ixgbe ethX: ixgbe_spoof_check: n spoofed packets detected
+
+where "x" is the PF interface number; and "n" is number of spoofed packets.
+NOTE: This feature can be disabled for a specific Virtual Function (VF)::
+
+ ip link set <pf dev> vf <vf id> spoofchk {off|on}
+
+IPsec Offload
+-------------
+The ixgbe driver supports IPsec Hardware Offload. When creating Security
+Associations with "ip xfrm ..." the 'offload' tag option can be used to
+register the IPsec SA with the driver in order to get higher throughput in
+the secure communications.
+
+The offload is also supported for ixgbe's VFs, but the VF must be set as
+'trusted' and the support must be enabled with::
+
+ ethtool --set-priv-flags eth<x> vf-ipsec on
+ ip link set eth<x> vf <y> trust on
+
+
+Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+============================
+
+Enabling SR-IOV in a 64-bit Microsoft Windows Server 2012/R2 guest OS
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+Linux KVM Hypervisor/VMM supports direct assignment of a PCIe device to a VM.
+This includes traditional PCIe devices, as well as SR-IOV-capable devices based
+on the Intel Ethernet Controller XL710.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbevf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbevf.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..76bbde736
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbevf.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+============================================================
+Linux Base Virtual Function Driver for Intel(R) 10G Ethernet
+============================================================
+
+Intel 10 Gigabit Virtual Function Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Known Issues
+- Support
+
+This driver supports 82599, X540, X550, and X552-based virtual function devices
+that can only be activated on kernels that support SR-IOV.
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your Intel adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply to use
+with Linux.
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+The driver is compatible with devices based on the following:
+
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 82598
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 82599
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X520
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X540
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller x550
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X552
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X553
+
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+============================
+
+SR-IOV requires the correct platform and OS support.
+
+The guest OS loading this driver must support MSI-X interrupts.
+
+This driver is only supported as a loadable module at this time. Intel is not
+supplying patches against the kernel source to allow for static linking of the
+drivers.
+
+VLANs: There is a limit of a total of 64 shared VLANs to 1 or more VFs.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeon_ep.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeon_ep.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bc562c490
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeon_ep.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+====================================================================
+Linux kernel networking driver for Marvell's Octeon PCI Endpoint NIC
+====================================================================
+
+Network driver for Marvell's Octeon PCI EndPoint NIC.
+Copyright (c) 2020 Marvell International Ltd.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- `Overview`_
+- `Supported Devices`_
+- `Interface Control`_
+
+Overview
+========
+This driver implements networking functionality of Marvell's Octeon PCI
+EndPoint NIC.
+
+Supported Devices
+=================
+Currently, this driver support following devices:
+ * Network controller: Cavium, Inc. Device b200
+
+Interface Control
+=================
+Network Interface control like changing mtu, link speed, link down/up are
+done by writing command to mailbox command queue, a mailbox interface
+implemented through a reserved region in BAR4.
+This driver writes the commands into the mailbox and the firmware on the
+Octeon device processes them. The firmware also sends unsolicited notifications
+to driver for events suchs as link change, through notification queue
+implemented as part of mailbox interface.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeontx2.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeontx2.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dd5cd6946
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeontx2.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,289 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+====================================
+Marvell OcteonTx2 RVU Kernel Drivers
+====================================
+
+Copyright (c) 2020 Marvell International Ltd.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- `Overview`_
+- `Drivers`_
+- `Basic packet flow`_
+- `Devlink health reporters`_
+
+Overview
+========
+
+Resource virtualization unit (RVU) on Marvell's OcteonTX2 SOC maps HW
+resources from the network, crypto and other functional blocks into
+PCI-compatible physical and virtual functions. Each functional block
+again has multiple local functions (LFs) for provisioning to PCI devices.
+RVU supports multiple PCIe SRIOV physical functions (PFs) and virtual
+functions (VFs). PF0 is called the administrative / admin function (AF)
+and has privileges to provision RVU functional block's LFs to each of the
+PF/VF.
+
+RVU managed networking functional blocks
+ - Network pool or buffer allocator (NPA)
+ - Network interface controller (NIX)
+ - Network parser CAM (NPC)
+ - Schedule/Synchronize/Order unit (SSO)
+ - Loopback interface (LBK)
+
+RVU managed non-networking functional blocks
+ - Crypto accelerator (CPT)
+ - Scheduled timers unit (TIM)
+ - Schedule/Synchronize/Order unit (SSO)
+ Used for both networking and non networking usecases
+
+Resource provisioning examples
+ - A PF/VF with NIX-LF & NPA-LF resources works as a pure network device
+ - A PF/VF with CPT-LF resource works as a pure crypto offload device.
+
+RVU functional blocks are highly configurable as per software requirements.
+
+Firmware setups following stuff before kernel boots
+ - Enables required number of RVU PFs based on number of physical links.
+ - Number of VFs per PF are either static or configurable at compile time.
+ Based on config, firmware assigns VFs to each of the PFs.
+ - Also assigns MSIX vectors to each of PF and VFs.
+ - These are not changed after kernel boot.
+
+Drivers
+=======
+
+Linux kernel will have multiple drivers registering to different PF and VFs
+of RVU. Wrt networking there will be 3 flavours of drivers.
+
+Admin Function driver
+---------------------
+
+As mentioned above RVU PF0 is called the admin function (AF), this driver
+supports resource provisioning and configuration of functional blocks.
+Doesn't handle any I/O. It sets up few basic stuff but most of the
+funcionality is achieved via configuration requests from PFs and VFs.
+
+PF/VFs communicates with AF via a shared memory region (mailbox). Upon
+receiving requests AF does resource provisioning and other HW configuration.
+AF is always attached to host kernel, but PFs and their VFs may be used by host
+kernel itself, or attached to VMs or to userspace applications like
+DPDK etc. So AF has to handle provisioning/configuration requests sent
+by any device from any domain.
+
+AF driver also interacts with underlying firmware to
+ - Manage physical ethernet links ie CGX LMACs.
+ - Retrieve information like speed, duplex, autoneg etc
+ - Retrieve PHY EEPROM and stats.
+ - Configure FEC, PAM modes
+ - etc
+
+From pure networking side AF driver supports following functionality.
+ - Map a physical link to a RVU PF to which a netdev is registered.
+ - Attach NIX and NPA block LFs to RVU PF/VF which provide buffer pools, RQs, SQs
+ for regular networking functionality.
+ - Flow control (pause frames) enable/disable/config.
+ - HW PTP timestamping related config.
+ - NPC parser profile config, basically how to parse pkt and what info to extract.
+ - NPC extract profile config, what to extract from the pkt to match data in MCAM entries.
+ - Manage NPC MCAM entries, upon request can frame and install requested packet forwarding rules.
+ - Defines receive side scaling (RSS) algorithms.
+ - Defines segmentation offload algorithms (eg TSO)
+ - VLAN stripping, capture and insertion config.
+ - SSO and TIM blocks config which provide packet scheduling support.
+ - Debugfs support, to check current resource provising, current status of
+ NPA pools, NIX RQ, SQ and CQs, various stats etc which helps in debugging issues.
+ - And many more.
+
+Physical Function driver
+------------------------
+
+This RVU PF handles IO, is mapped to a physical ethernet link and this
+driver registers a netdev. This supports SR-IOV. As said above this driver
+communicates with AF with a mailbox. To retrieve information from physical
+links this driver talks to AF and AF gets that info from firmware and responds
+back ie cannot talk to firmware directly.
+
+Supports ethtool for configuring links, RSS, queue count, queue size,
+flow control, ntuple filters, dump PHY EEPROM, config FEC etc.
+
+Virtual Function driver
+-----------------------
+
+There are two types VFs, VFs that share the physical link with their parent
+SR-IOV PF and the VFs which work in pairs using internal HW loopback channels (LBK).
+
+Type1:
+ - These VFs and their parent PF share a physical link and used for outside communication.
+ - VFs cannot communicate with AF directly, they send mbox message to PF and PF
+ forwards that to AF. AF after processing, responds back to PF and PF forwards
+ the reply to VF.
+ - From functionality point of view there is no difference between PF and VF as same type
+ HW resources are attached to both. But user would be able to configure few stuff only
+ from PF as PF is treated as owner/admin of the link.
+
+Type2:
+ - RVU PF0 ie admin function creates these VFs and maps them to loopback block's channels.
+ - A set of two VFs (VF0 & VF1, VF2 & VF3 .. so on) works as a pair ie pkts sent out of
+ VF0 will be received by VF1 and viceversa.
+ - These VFs can be used by applications or virtual machines to communicate between them
+ without sending traffic outside. There is no switch present in HW, hence the support
+ for loopback VFs.
+ - These communicate directly with AF (PF0) via mbox.
+
+Except for the IO channels or links used for packet reception and transmission there is
+no other difference between these VF types. AF driver takes care of IO channel mapping,
+hence same VF driver works for both types of devices.
+
+Basic packet flow
+=================
+
+Ingress
+-------
+
+1. CGX LMAC receives packet.
+2. Forwards the packet to the NIX block.
+3. Then submitted to NPC block for parsing and then MCAM lookup to get the destination RVU device.
+4. NIX LF attached to the destination RVU device allocates a buffer from RQ mapped buffer pool of NPA block LF.
+5. RQ may be selected by RSS or by configuring MCAM rule with a RQ number.
+6. Packet is DMA'ed and driver is notified.
+
+Egress
+------
+
+1. Driver prepares a send descriptor and submits to SQ for transmission.
+2. The SQ is already configured (by AF) to transmit on a specific link/channel.
+3. The SQ descriptor ring is maintained in buffers allocated from SQ mapped pool of NPA block LF.
+4. NIX block transmits the pkt on the designated channel.
+5. NPC MCAM entries can be installed to divert pkt onto a different channel.
+
+Devlink health reporters
+========================
+
+NPA Reporters
+-------------
+The NPA reporters are responsible for reporting and recovering the following group of errors:
+
+1. GENERAL events
+
+ - Error due to operation of unmapped PF.
+ - Error due to disabled alloc/free for other HW blocks (NIX, SSO, TIM, DPI and AURA).
+
+2. ERROR events
+
+ - Fault due to NPA_AQ_INST_S read or NPA_AQ_RES_S write.
+ - AQ Doorbell Error.
+
+3. RAS events
+
+ - RAS Error Reporting for NPA_AQ_INST_S/NPA_AQ_RES_S.
+
+4. RVU events
+
+ - Error due to unmapped slot.
+
+Sample Output::
+
+ ~# devlink health
+ pci/0002:01:00.0:
+ reporter hw_npa_intr
+ state healthy error 2872 recover 2872 last_dump_date 2020-12-10 last_dump_time 09:39:09 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true
+ reporter hw_npa_gen
+ state healthy error 2872 recover 2872 last_dump_date 2020-12-11 last_dump_time 04:43:04 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true
+ reporter hw_npa_err
+ state healthy error 2871 recover 2871 last_dump_date 2020-12-10 last_dump_time 09:39:17 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true
+ reporter hw_npa_ras
+ state healthy error 0 recover 0 last_dump_date 2020-12-10 last_dump_time 09:32:40 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true
+
+Each reporter dumps the
+
+ - Error Type
+ - Error Register value
+ - Reason in words
+
+For example::
+
+ ~# devlink health dump show pci/0002:01:00.0 reporter hw_npa_gen
+ NPA_AF_GENERAL:
+ NPA General Interrupt Reg : 1
+ NIX0: free disabled RX
+ ~# devlink health dump show pci/0002:01:00.0 reporter hw_npa_intr
+ NPA_AF_RVU:
+ NPA RVU Interrupt Reg : 1
+ Unmap Slot Error
+ ~# devlink health dump show pci/0002:01:00.0 reporter hw_npa_err
+ NPA_AF_ERR:
+ NPA Error Interrupt Reg : 4096
+ AQ Doorbell Error
+
+
+NIX Reporters
+-------------
+The NIX reporters are responsible for reporting and recovering the following group of errors:
+
+1. GENERAL events
+
+ - Receive mirror/multicast packet drop due to insufficient buffer.
+ - SMQ Flush operation.
+
+2. ERROR events
+
+ - Memory Fault due to WQE read/write from multicast/mirror buffer.
+ - Receive multicast/mirror replication list error.
+ - Receive packet on an unmapped PF.
+ - Fault due to NIX_AQ_INST_S read or NIX_AQ_RES_S write.
+ - AQ Doorbell Error.
+
+3. RAS events
+
+ - RAS Error Reporting for NIX Receive Multicast/Mirror Entry Structure.
+ - RAS Error Reporting for WQE/Packet Data read from Multicast/Mirror Buffer..
+ - RAS Error Reporting for NIX_AQ_INST_S/NIX_AQ_RES_S.
+
+4. RVU events
+
+ - Error due to unmapped slot.
+
+Sample Output::
+
+ ~# ./devlink health
+ pci/0002:01:00.0:
+ reporter hw_npa_intr
+ state healthy error 0 recover 0 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true
+ reporter hw_npa_gen
+ state healthy error 0 recover 0 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true
+ reporter hw_npa_err
+ state healthy error 0 recover 0 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true
+ reporter hw_npa_ras
+ state healthy error 0 recover 0 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true
+ reporter hw_nix_intr
+ state healthy error 1121 recover 1121 last_dump_date 2021-01-19 last_dump_time 05:42:26 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true
+ reporter hw_nix_gen
+ state healthy error 949 recover 949 last_dump_date 2021-01-19 last_dump_time 05:42:43 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true
+ reporter hw_nix_err
+ state healthy error 1147 recover 1147 last_dump_date 2021-01-19 last_dump_time 05:42:59 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true
+ reporter hw_nix_ras
+ state healthy error 409 recover 409 last_dump_date 2021-01-19 last_dump_time 05:43:16 grace_period 0 auto_recover true auto_dump true
+
+Each reporter dumps the
+
+ - Error Type
+ - Error Register value
+ - Reason in words
+
+For example::
+
+ ~# devlink health dump show pci/0002:01:00.0 reporter hw_nix_intr
+ NIX_AF_RVU:
+ NIX RVU Interrupt Reg : 1
+ Unmap Slot Error
+ ~# devlink health dump show pci/0002:01:00.0 reporter hw_nix_gen
+ NIX_AF_GENERAL:
+ NIX General Interrupt Reg : 1
+ Rx multicast pkt drop
+ ~# devlink health dump show pci/0002:01:00.0 reporter hw_nix_err
+ NIX_AF_ERR:
+ NIX Error Interrupt Reg : 64
+ Rx on unmapped PF_FUNC
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/mellanox/mlx5.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/mellanox/mlx5.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5edf50d7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/mellanox/mlx5.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,762 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR Linux-OpenIB
+
+=================================================
+Mellanox ConnectX(R) mlx5 core VPI Network Driver
+=================================================
+
+Copyright (c) 2019, Mellanox Technologies LTD.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- `Enabling the driver and kconfig options`_
+- `Devlink info`_
+- `Devlink parameters`_
+- `Bridge offload`_
+- `mlx5 subfunction`_
+- `mlx5 function attributes`_
+- `Devlink health reporters`_
+- `mlx5 tracepoints`_
+
+Enabling the driver and kconfig options
+=======================================
+
+| mlx5 core is modular and most of the major mlx5 core driver features can be selected (compiled in/out)
+| at build time via kernel Kconfig flags.
+| Basic features, ethernet net device rx/tx offloads and XDP, are available with the most basic flags
+| CONFIG_MLX5_CORE=y/m and CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN=y.
+| For the list of advanced features please see below.
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE=(y/m/n)** (module mlx5_core.ko)
+
+| The driver can be enabled by choosing CONFIG_MLX5_CORE=y/m in kernel config.
+| This will provide mlx5 core driver for mlx5 ulps to interface with (mlx5e, mlx5_ib).
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN=(y/n)**
+
+| Choosing this option will allow basic ethernet netdevice support with all of the standard rx/tx offloads.
+| mlx5e is the mlx5 ulp driver which provides netdevice kernel interface, when chosen, mlx5e will be
+| built-in into mlx5_core.ko.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_ARFS=(y/n)**
+
+| Enables Hardware-accelerated receive flow steering (arfs) support, and ntuple filtering.
+| https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/howto-configure-arfs-on-connectx-4
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_RXNFC=(y/n)**
+
+| Enables ethtool receive network flow classification, which allows user defined
+| flow rules to direct traffic into arbitrary rx queue via ethtool set/get_rxnfc API.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN_DCB=(y/n)**:
+
+| Enables `Data Center Bridging (DCB) Support <https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/howto-auto-config-pfc-and-ets-on-connectx-4-via-lldp-dcbx>`_.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_MPFS=(y/n)**
+
+| Ethernet Multi-Physical Function Switch (MPFS) support in ConnectX NIC.
+| MPFs is required for when `Multi-Host <http://www.mellanox.com/page/multihost>`_ configuration is enabled to allow passing
+| user configured unicast MAC addresses to the requesting PF.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_ESWITCH=(y/n)**
+
+| Ethernet SRIOV E-Switch support in ConnectX NIC. E-Switch provides internal SRIOV packet steering
+| and switching for the enabled VFs and PF in two available modes:
+| 1) `Legacy SRIOV mode (L2 mac vlan steering based) <https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/howto-configure-sr-iov-for-connectx-4-connectx-5-with-kvm--ethernet-x>`_.
+| 2) `Switchdev mode (eswitch offloads) <https://www.mellanox.com/related-docs/prod_software/ASAP2_Hardware_Offloading_for_vSwitches_User_Manual_v4.4.pdf>`_.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_IPOIB=(y/n)**
+
+| IPoIB offloads & acceleration support.
+| Requires CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN to provide an accelerated interface for the rdma
+| IPoIB ulp netdevice.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_FPGA=(y/n)**
+
+| Build support for the Innova family of network cards by Mellanox Technologies.
+| Innova network cards are comprised of a ConnectX chip and an FPGA chip on one board.
+| If you select this option, the mlx5_core driver will include the Innova FPGA core and allow
+| building sandbox-specific client drivers.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_IPSEC=(y/n)**
+
+| Enables `IPSec XFRM cryptography-offload accelaration <http://www.mellanox.com/related-docs/prod_software/Mellanox_Innova_IPsec_Ethernet_Adapter_Card_User_Manual.pdf>`_.
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_TLS=(y/n)**
+
+| TLS cryptography-offload accelaration.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_INFINIBAND=(y/n/m)** (module mlx5_ib.ko)
+
+| Provides low-level InfiniBand/RDMA and `RoCE <https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/recommended-network-configuration-examples-for-roce-deployment>`_ support.
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_SF=(y/n)**
+
+| Build support for subfunction.
+| Subfunctons are more light weight than PCI SRIOV VFs. Choosing this option
+| will enable support for creating subfunction devices.
+
+**External options** ( Choose if the corresponding mlx5 feature is required )
+
+- CONFIG_PTP_1588_CLOCK: When chosen, mlx5 ptp support will be enabled
+- CONFIG_VXLAN: When chosen, mlx5 vxlan support will be enabled.
+- CONFIG_MLXFW: When chosen, mlx5 firmware flashing support will be enabled (via devlink and ethtool).
+
+Devlink info
+============
+
+The devlink info reports the running and stored firmware versions on device.
+It also prints the device PSID which represents the HCA board type ID.
+
+User command example::
+
+ $ devlink dev info pci/0000:00:06.0
+ pci/0000:00:06.0:
+ driver mlx5_core
+ versions:
+ fixed:
+ fw.psid MT_0000000009
+ running:
+ fw.version 16.26.0100
+ stored:
+ fw.version 16.26.0100
+
+Devlink parameters
+==================
+
+flow_steering_mode: Device flow steering mode
+---------------------------------------------
+The flow steering mode parameter controls the flow steering mode of the driver.
+Two modes are supported:
+1. 'dmfs' - Device managed flow steering.
+2. 'smfs - Software/Driver managed flow steering.
+
+In DMFS mode, the HW steering entities are created and managed through the
+Firmware.
+In SMFS mode, the HW steering entities are created and managed though by
+the driver directly into Hardware without firmware intervention.
+
+SMFS mode is faster and provides better rule inserstion rate compared to default DMFS mode.
+
+User command examples:
+
+- Set SMFS flow steering mode::
+
+ $ devlink dev param set pci/0000:06:00.0 name flow_steering_mode value "smfs" cmode runtime
+
+- Read device flow steering mode::
+
+ $ devlink dev param show pci/0000:06:00.0 name flow_steering_mode
+ pci/0000:06:00.0:
+ name flow_steering_mode type driver-specific
+ values:
+ cmode runtime value smfs
+
+enable_roce: RoCE enablement state
+----------------------------------
+RoCE enablement state controls driver support for RoCE traffic.
+When RoCE is disabled, there is no gid table, only raw ethernet QPs are supported and traffic on the well known UDP RoCE port is handled as raw ethernet traffic.
+
+To change RoCE enablement state a user must change the driverinit cmode value and run devlink reload.
+
+User command examples:
+
+- Disable RoCE::
+
+ $ devlink dev param set pci/0000:06:00.0 name enable_roce value false cmode driverinit
+ $ devlink dev reload pci/0000:06:00.0
+
+- Read RoCE enablement state::
+
+ $ devlink dev param show pci/0000:06:00.0 name enable_roce
+ pci/0000:06:00.0:
+ name enable_roce type generic
+ values:
+ cmode driverinit value true
+
+esw_port_metadata: Eswitch port metadata state
+----------------------------------------------
+When applicable, disabling Eswitch metadata can increase packet rate
+up to 20% depending on the use case and packet sizes.
+
+Eswitch port metadata state controls whether to internally tag packets with
+metadata. Metadata tagging must be enabled for multi-port RoCE, failover
+between representors and stacked devices.
+By default metadata is enabled on the supported devices in E-switch.
+Metadata is applicable only for E-switch in switchdev mode and
+users may disable it when NONE of the below use cases will be in use:
+1. HCA is in Dual/multi-port RoCE mode.
+2. VF/SF representor bonding (Usually used for Live migration)
+3. Stacked devices
+
+When metadata is disabled, the above use cases will fail to initialize if
+users try to enable them.
+
+- Show eswitch port metadata::
+
+ $ devlink dev param show pci/0000:06:00.0 name esw_port_metadata
+ pci/0000:06:00.0:
+ name esw_port_metadata type driver-specific
+ values:
+ cmode runtime value true
+
+- Disable eswitch port metadata::
+
+ $ devlink dev param set pci/0000:06:00.0 name esw_port_metadata value false cmode runtime
+
+- Change eswitch mode to switchdev mode where after choosing the metadata value::
+
+ $ devlink dev eswitch set pci/0000:06:00.0 mode switchdev
+
+Bridge offload
+==============
+The mlx5 driver implements support for offloading bridge rules when in switchdev
+mode. Linux bridge FDBs are automatically offloaded when mlx5 switchdev
+representor is attached to bridge.
+
+- Change device to switchdev mode::
+
+ $ devlink dev eswitch set pci/0000:06:00.0 mode switchdev
+
+- Attach mlx5 switchdev representor 'enp8s0f0' to bridge netdev 'bridge1'::
+
+ $ ip link set enp8s0f0 master bridge1
+
+VLANs
+-----
+Following bridge VLAN functions are supported by mlx5:
+
+- VLAN filtering (including multiple VLANs per port)::
+
+ $ ip link set bridge1 type bridge vlan_filtering 1
+ $ bridge vlan add dev enp8s0f0 vid 2-3
+
+- VLAN push on bridge ingress::
+
+ $ bridge vlan add dev enp8s0f0 vid 3 pvid
+
+- VLAN pop on bridge egress::
+
+ $ bridge vlan add dev enp8s0f0 vid 3 untagged
+
+mlx5 subfunction
+================
+mlx5 supports subfunction management using devlink port (see :ref:`Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-port.rst <devlink_port>`) interface.
+
+A Subfunction has its own function capabilities and its own resources. This
+means a subfunction has its own dedicated queues (txq, rxq, cq, eq). These
+queues are neither shared nor stolen from the parent PCI function.
+
+When a subfunction is RDMA capable, it has its own QP1, GID table and rdma
+resources neither shared nor stolen from the parent PCI function.
+
+A subfunction has a dedicated window in PCI BAR space that is not shared
+with ther other subfunctions or the parent PCI function. This ensures that all
+devices (netdev, rdma, vdpa etc.) of the subfunction accesses only assigned
+PCI BAR space.
+
+A Subfunction supports eswitch representation through which it supports tc
+offloads. The user configures eswitch to send/receive packets from/to
+the subfunction port.
+
+Subfunctions share PCI level resources such as PCI MSI-X IRQs with
+other subfunctions and/or with its parent PCI function.
+
+Example mlx5 software, system and device view::
+
+ _______
+ | admin |
+ | user |----------
+ |_______| |
+ | |
+ ____|____ __|______ _________________
+ | | | | | |
+ | devlink | | tc tool | | user |
+ | tool | |_________| | applications |
+ |_________| | |_________________|
+ | | | |
+ | | | | Userspace
+ +---------|-------------|-------------------|----------|--------------------+
+ | | +----------+ +----------+ Kernel
+ | | | netdev | | rdma dev |
+ | | +----------+ +----------+
+ (devlink port add/del | ^ ^
+ port function set) | | |
+ | | +---------------|
+ _____|___ | | _______|_______
+ | | | | | mlx5 class |
+ | devlink | +------------+ | | drivers |
+ | kernel | | rep netdev | | |(mlx5_core,ib) |
+ |_________| +------------+ | |_______________|
+ | | | ^
+ (devlink ops) | | (probe/remove)
+ _________|________ | | ____|________
+ | subfunction | | +---------------+ | subfunction |
+ | management driver|----- | subfunction |---| driver |
+ | (mlx5_core) | | auxiliary dev | | (mlx5_core) |
+ |__________________| +---------------+ |_____________|
+ | ^
+ (sf add/del, vhca events) |
+ | (device add/del)
+ _____|____ ____|________
+ | | | subfunction |
+ | PCI NIC |---- activate/deactive events---->| host driver |
+ |__________| | (mlx5_core) |
+ |_____________|
+
+Subfunction is created using devlink port interface.
+
+- Change device to switchdev mode::
+
+ $ devlink dev eswitch set pci/0000:06:00.0 mode switchdev
+
+- Add a devlink port of subfunction flaovur::
+
+ $ devlink port add pci/0000:06:00.0 flavour pcisf pfnum 0 sfnum 88
+ pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev eth6 flavour pcisf controller 0 pfnum 0 sfnum 88 external false splittable false
+ function:
+ hw_addr 00:00:00:00:00:00 state inactive opstate detached
+
+- Show a devlink port of the subfunction::
+
+ $ devlink port show pci/0000:06:00.0/32768
+ pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev enp6s0pf0sf88 flavour pcisf pfnum 0 sfnum 88
+ function:
+ hw_addr 00:00:00:00:00:00 state inactive opstate detached
+
+- Delete a devlink port of subfunction after use::
+
+ $ devlink port del pci/0000:06:00.0/32768
+
+mlx5 function attributes
+========================
+The mlx5 driver provides a mechanism to setup PCI VF/SF function attributes in
+a unified way for SmartNIC and non-SmartNIC.
+
+This is supported only when the eswitch mode is set to switchdev. Port function
+configuration of the PCI VF/SF is supported through devlink eswitch port.
+
+Port function attributes should be set before PCI VF/SF is enumerated by the
+driver.
+
+MAC address setup
+-----------------
+mlx5 driver provides mechanism to setup the MAC address of the PCI VF/SF.
+
+The configured MAC address of the PCI VF/SF will be used by netdevice and rdma
+device created for the PCI VF/SF.
+
+- Get the MAC address of the VF identified by its unique devlink port index::
+
+ $ devlink port show pci/0000:06:00.0/2
+ pci/0000:06:00.0/2: type eth netdev enp6s0pf0vf1 flavour pcivf pfnum 0 vfnum 1
+ function:
+ hw_addr 00:00:00:00:00:00
+
+- Set the MAC address of the VF identified by its unique devlink port index::
+
+ $ devlink port function set pci/0000:06:00.0/2 hw_addr 00:11:22:33:44:55
+
+ $ devlink port show pci/0000:06:00.0/2
+ pci/0000:06:00.0/2: type eth netdev enp6s0pf0vf1 flavour pcivf pfnum 0 vfnum 1
+ function:
+ hw_addr 00:11:22:33:44:55
+
+- Get the MAC address of the SF identified by its unique devlink port index::
+
+ $ devlink port show pci/0000:06:00.0/32768
+ pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev enp6s0pf0sf88 flavour pcisf pfnum 0 sfnum 88
+ function:
+ hw_addr 00:00:00:00:00:00
+
+- Set the MAC address of the VF identified by its unique devlink port index::
+
+ $ devlink port function set pci/0000:06:00.0/32768 hw_addr 00:00:00:00:88:88
+
+ $ devlink port show pci/0000:06:00.0/32768
+ pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev enp6s0pf0sf88 flavour pcivf pfnum 0 sfnum 88
+ function:
+ hw_addr 00:00:00:00:88:88
+
+SF state setup
+--------------
+To use the SF, the user must active the SF using the SF function state
+attribute.
+
+- Get the state of the SF identified by its unique devlink port index::
+
+ $ devlink port show ens2f0npf0sf88
+ pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev ens2f0npf0sf88 flavour pcisf controller 0 pfnum 0 sfnum 88 external false splittable false
+ function:
+ hw_addr 00:00:00:00:88:88 state inactive opstate detached
+
+- Activate the function and verify its state is active::
+
+ $ devlink port function set ens2f0npf0sf88 state active
+
+ $ devlink port show ens2f0npf0sf88
+ pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev ens2f0npf0sf88 flavour pcisf controller 0 pfnum 0 sfnum 88 external false splittable false
+ function:
+ hw_addr 00:00:00:00:88:88 state active opstate detached
+
+Upon function activation, the PF driver instance gets the event from the device
+that a particular SF was activated. It's the cue to put the device on bus, probe
+it and instantiate the devlink instance and class specific auxiliary devices
+for it.
+
+- Show the auxiliary device and port of the subfunction::
+
+ $ devlink dev show
+ devlink dev show auxiliary/mlx5_core.sf.4
+
+ $ devlink port show auxiliary/mlx5_core.sf.4/1
+ auxiliary/mlx5_core.sf.4/1: type eth netdev p0sf88 flavour virtual port 0 splittable false
+
+ $ rdma link show mlx5_0/1
+ link mlx5_0/1 state ACTIVE physical_state LINK_UP netdev p0sf88
+
+ $ rdma dev show
+ 8: rocep6s0f1: node_type ca fw 16.29.0550 node_guid 248a:0703:00b3:d113 sys_image_guid 248a:0703:00b3:d112
+ 13: mlx5_0: node_type ca fw 16.29.0550 node_guid 0000:00ff:fe00:8888 sys_image_guid 248a:0703:00b3:d112
+
+- Subfunction auxiliary device and class device hierarchy::
+
+ mlx5_core.sf.4
+ (subfunction auxiliary device)
+ /\
+ / \
+ / \
+ / \
+ / \
+ mlx5_core.eth.4 mlx5_core.rdma.4
+ (sf eth aux dev) (sf rdma aux dev)
+ | |
+ | |
+ p0sf88 mlx5_0
+ (sf netdev) (sf rdma device)
+
+Additionally, the SF port also gets the event when the driver attaches to the
+auxiliary device of the subfunction. This results in changing the operational
+state of the function. This provides visiblity to the user to decide when is it
+safe to delete the SF port for graceful termination of the subfunction.
+
+- Show the SF port operational state::
+
+ $ devlink port show ens2f0npf0sf88
+ pci/0000:06:00.0/32768: type eth netdev ens2f0npf0sf88 flavour pcisf controller 0 pfnum 0 sfnum 88 external false splittable false
+ function:
+ hw_addr 00:00:00:00:88:88 state active opstate attached
+
+Devlink health reporters
+========================
+
+tx reporter
+-----------
+The tx reporter is responsible for reporting and recovering of the following two error scenarios:
+
+- TX timeout
+ Report on kernel tx timeout detection.
+ Recover by searching lost interrupts.
+- TX error completion
+ Report on error tx completion.
+ Recover by flushing the TX queue and reset it.
+
+TX reporter also support on demand diagnose callback, on which it provides
+real time information of its send queues status.
+
+User commands examples:
+
+- Diagnose send queues status::
+
+ $ devlink health diagnose pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter tx
+
+NOTE: This command has valid output only when interface is up, otherwise the command has empty output.
+
+- Show number of tx errors indicated, number of recover flows ended successfully,
+ is autorecover enabled and graceful period from last recover::
+
+ $ devlink health show pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter tx
+
+rx reporter
+-----------
+The rx reporter is responsible for reporting and recovering of the following two error scenarios:
+
+- RX queues initialization (population) timeout
+ RX queues descriptors population on ring initialization is done in
+ napi context via triggering an irq, in case of a failure to get
+ the minimum amount of descriptors, a timeout would occur and it
+ could be recoverable by polling the EQ (Event Queue).
+- RX completions with errors (reported by HW on interrupt context)
+ Report on rx completion error.
+ Recover (if needed) by flushing the related queue and reset it.
+
+RX reporter also supports on demand diagnose callback, on which it
+provides real time information of its receive queues status.
+
+- Diagnose rx queues status, and corresponding completion queue::
+
+ $ devlink health diagnose pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter rx
+
+NOTE: This command has valid output only when interface is up, otherwise the command has empty output.
+
+- Show number of rx errors indicated, number of recover flows ended successfully,
+ is autorecover enabled and graceful period from last recover::
+
+ $ devlink health show pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter rx
+
+fw reporter
+-----------
+The fw reporter implements diagnose and dump callbacks.
+It follows symptoms of fw error such as fw syndrome by triggering
+fw core dump and storing it into the dump buffer.
+The fw reporter diagnose command can be triggered any time by the user to check
+current fw status.
+
+User commands examples:
+
+- Check fw heath status::
+
+ $ devlink health diagnose pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter fw
+
+- Read FW core dump if already stored or trigger new one::
+
+ $ devlink health dump show pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter fw
+
+NOTE: This command can run only on the PF which has fw tracer ownership,
+running it on other PF or any VF will return "Operation not permitted".
+
+fw fatal reporter
+-----------------
+The fw fatal reporter implements dump and recover callbacks.
+It follows fatal errors indications by CR-space dump and recover flow.
+The CR-space dump uses vsc interface which is valid even if the FW command
+interface is not functional, which is the case in most FW fatal errors.
+The recover function runs recover flow which reloads the driver and triggers fw
+reset if needed.
+On firmware error, the health buffer is dumped into the dmesg. The log
+level is derived from the error's severity (given in health buffer).
+
+User commands examples:
+
+- Run fw recover flow manually::
+
+ $ devlink health recover pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter fw_fatal
+
+- Read FW CR-space dump if already strored or trigger new one::
+
+ $ devlink health dump show pci/0000:82:00.1 reporter fw_fatal
+
+NOTE: This command can run only on PF.
+
+mlx5 tracepoints
+================
+
+mlx5 driver provides internal trace points for tracking and debugging using
+kernel tracepoints interfaces (refer to Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst).
+
+For the list of support mlx5 events check /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/mlx5/
+
+tc and eswitch offloads tracepoints:
+
+- mlx5e_configure_flower: trace flower filter actions and cookies offloaded to mlx5::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_configure_flower >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ tc-6535 [019] ...1 2672.404466: mlx5e_configure_flower: cookie=0000000067874a55 actions= REDIRECT
+
+- mlx5e_delete_flower: trace flower filter actions and cookies deleted from mlx5::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_delete_flower >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ tc-6569 [010] .N.1 2686.379075: mlx5e_delete_flower: cookie=0000000067874a55 actions= NULL
+
+- mlx5e_stats_flower: trace flower stats request::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_stats_flower >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ tc-6546 [010] ...1 2679.704889: mlx5e_stats_flower: cookie=0000000060eb3d6a bytes=0 packets=0 lastused=4295560217
+
+- mlx5e_tc_update_neigh_used_value: trace tunnel rule neigh update value offloaded to mlx5::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_tc_update_neigh_used_value >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ kworker/u48:4-8806 [009] ...1 55117.882428: mlx5e_tc_update_neigh_used_value: netdev: ens1f0 IPv4: 1.1.1.10 IPv6: ::ffff:1.1.1.10 neigh_used=1
+
+- mlx5e_rep_neigh_update: trace neigh update tasks scheduled due to neigh state change events::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_rep_neigh_update >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ kworker/u48:7-2221 [009] ...1 1475.387435: mlx5e_rep_neigh_update: netdev: ens1f0 MAC: 24:8a:07:9a:17:9a IPv4: 1.1.1.10 IPv6: ::ffff:1.1.1.10 neigh_connected=1
+
+Bridge offloads tracepoints:
+
+- mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_init: trace bridge FDB entry offloaded to mlx5::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_init >> set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ kworker/u20:9-2217 [003] ...1 318.582243: mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_init: net_device=enp8s0f0_0 addr=e4:fd:05:08:00:02 vid=0 flags=0 used=0
+
+- mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_cleanup: trace bridge FDB entry deleted from mlx5::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_cleanup >> set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ ip-2581 [005] ...1 318.629871: mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_cleanup: net_device=enp8s0f0_1 addr=e4:fd:05:08:00:03 vid=0 flags=0 used=16
+
+- mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_refresh: trace bridge FDB entry offload refreshed in
+ mlx5::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_refresh >> set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ kworker/u20:8-3849 [003] ...1 466716: mlx5_esw_bridge_fdb_entry_refresh: net_device=enp8s0f0_0 addr=e4:fd:05:08:00:02 vid=3 flags=0 used=0
+
+- mlx5_esw_bridge_vlan_create: trace bridge VLAN object add on mlx5
+ representor::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_vlan_create >> set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ ip-2560 [007] ...1 318.460258: mlx5_esw_bridge_vlan_create: vid=1 flags=6
+
+- mlx5_esw_bridge_vlan_cleanup: trace bridge VLAN object delete from mlx5
+ representor::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_vlan_cleanup >> set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ bridge-2582 [007] ...1 318.653496: mlx5_esw_bridge_vlan_cleanup: vid=2 flags=8
+
+- mlx5_esw_bridge_vport_init: trace mlx5 vport assigned with bridge upper
+ device::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_vport_init >> set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ ip-2560 [007] ...1 318.458915: mlx5_esw_bridge_vport_init: vport_num=1
+
+- mlx5_esw_bridge_vport_cleanup: trace mlx5 vport removed from bridge upper
+ device::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_bridge_vport_cleanup >> set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ ip-5387 [000] ...1 573713: mlx5_esw_bridge_vport_cleanup: vport_num=1
+
+Eswitch QoS tracepoints:
+
+- mlx5_esw_vport_qos_create: trace creation of transmit scheduler arbiter for vport::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_vport_qos_create >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ <...>-23496 [018] .... 73136.838831: mlx5_esw_vport_qos_create: (0000:82:00.0) vport=2 tsar_ix=4 bw_share=0, max_rate=0 group=000000007b576bb3
+
+- mlx5_esw_vport_qos_config: trace configuration of transmit scheduler arbiter for vport::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_vport_qos_config >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ <...>-26548 [023] .... 75754.223823: mlx5_esw_vport_qos_config: (0000:82:00.0) vport=1 tsar_ix=3 bw_share=34, max_rate=10000 group=000000007b576bb3
+
+- mlx5_esw_vport_qos_destroy: trace deletion of transmit scheduler arbiter for vport::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_vport_qos_destroy >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ <...>-27418 [004] .... 76546.680901: mlx5_esw_vport_qos_destroy: (0000:82:00.0) vport=1 tsar_ix=3
+
+- mlx5_esw_group_qos_create: trace creation of transmit scheduler arbiter for rate group::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_group_qos_create >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ <...>-26578 [008] .... 75776.022112: mlx5_esw_group_qos_create: (0000:82:00.0) group=000000008dac63ea tsar_ix=5
+
+- mlx5_esw_group_qos_config: trace configuration of transmit scheduler arbiter for rate group::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_group_qos_config >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ <...>-27303 [020] .... 76461.455356: mlx5_esw_group_qos_config: (0000:82:00.0) group=000000008dac63ea tsar_ix=5 bw_share=100 max_rate=20000
+
+- mlx5_esw_group_qos_destroy: trace deletion of transmit scheduler arbiter for group::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_esw_group_qos_destroy >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ <...>-27418 [006] .... 76547.187258: mlx5_esw_group_qos_destroy: (0000:82:00.0) group=000000007b576bb3 tsar_ix=1
+
+SF tracepoints:
+
+- mlx5_sf_add: trace addition of the SF port::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_add >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ devlink-9363 [031] ..... 24610.188722: mlx5_sf_add: (0000:06:00.0) port_index=32768 controller=0 hw_id=0x8000 sfnum=88
+
+- mlx5_sf_free: trace freeing of the SF port::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_free >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ devlink-9830 [038] ..... 26300.404749: mlx5_sf_free: (0000:06:00.0) port_index=32768 controller=0 hw_id=0x8000
+
+- mlx5_sf_hwc_alloc: trace allocating of the hardware SF context::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_hwc_alloc >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ devlink-9775 [031] ..... 26296.385259: mlx5_sf_hwc_alloc: (0000:06:00.0) controller=0 hw_id=0x8000 sfnum=88
+
+- mlx5_sf_hwc_free: trace freeing of the hardware SF context::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_hwc_free >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ kworker/u128:3-9093 [046] ..... 24625.365771: mlx5_sf_hwc_free: (0000:06:00.0) hw_id=0x8000
+
+- mlx5_sf_hwc_deferred_free : trace deferred freeing of the hardware SF context::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_hwc_deferred_free >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ devlink-9519 [046] ..... 24624.400271: mlx5_sf_hwc_deferred_free: (0000:06:00.0) hw_id=0x8000
+
+- mlx5_sf_vhca_event: trace SF vhca event and state::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_vhca_event >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ kworker/u128:3-9093 [046] ..... 24625.365525: mlx5_sf_vhca_event: (0000:06:00.0) hw_id=0x8000 sfnum=88 vhca_state=1
+
+- mlx5_sf_dev_add : trace SF device add event::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_dev_add>> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ kworker/u128:3-9093 [000] ..... 24616.524495: mlx5_sf_dev_add: (0000:06:00.0) sfdev=00000000fc5d96fd aux_id=4 hw_id=0x8000 sfnum=88
+
+- mlx5_sf_dev_del : trace SF device delete event::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5_sf_dev_del >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ kworker/u128:3-9093 [044] ..... 24624.400749: mlx5_sf_dev_del: (0000:06:00.0) sfdev=00000000fc5d96fd aux_id=4 hw_id=0x8000 sfnum=88
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/microsoft/netvsc.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/microsoft/netvsc.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fc5acd427
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/microsoft/netvsc.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+======================
+Hyper-V network driver
+======================
+
+Compatibility
+=============
+
+This driver is compatible with Windows Server 2012 R2, 2016 and
+Windows 10.
+
+Features
+========
+
+Checksum offload
+----------------
+ The netvsc driver supports checksum offload as long as the
+ Hyper-V host version does. Windows Server 2016 and Azure
+ support checksum offload for TCP and UDP for both IPv4 and
+ IPv6. Windows Server 2012 only supports checksum offload for TCP.
+
+Receive Side Scaling
+--------------------
+ Hyper-V supports receive side scaling. For TCP & UDP, packets can
+ be distributed among available queues based on IP address and port
+ number.
+
+ For TCP & UDP, we can switch hash level between L3 and L4 by ethtool
+ command. TCP/UDP over IPv4 and v6 can be set differently. The default
+ hash level is L4. We currently only allow switching TX hash level
+ from within the guests.
+
+ On Azure, fragmented UDP packets have high loss rate with L4
+ hashing. Using L3 hashing is recommended in this case.
+
+ For example, for UDP over IPv4 on eth0:
+
+ To include UDP port numbers in hashing::
+
+ ethtool -N eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4 sdfn
+
+ To exclude UDP port numbers in hashing::
+
+ ethtool -N eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4 sd
+
+ To show UDP hash level::
+
+ ethtool -n eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4
+
+Generic Receive Offload, aka GRO
+--------------------------------
+ The driver supports GRO and it is enabled by default. GRO coalesces
+ like packets and significantly reduces CPU usage under heavy Rx
+ load.
+
+Large Receive Offload (LRO), or Receive Side Coalescing (RSC)
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+ The driver supports LRO/RSC in the vSwitch feature. It reduces the per packet
+ processing overhead by coalescing multiple TCP segments when possible. The
+ feature is enabled by default on VMs running on Windows Server 2019 and
+ later. It may be changed by ethtool command::
+
+ ethtool -K eth0 lro on
+ ethtool -K eth0 lro off
+
+SR-IOV support
+--------------
+ Hyper-V supports SR-IOV as a hardware acceleration option. If SR-IOV
+ is enabled in both the vSwitch and the guest configuration, then the
+ Virtual Function (VF) device is passed to the guest as a PCI
+ device. In this case, both a synthetic (netvsc) and VF device are
+ visible in the guest OS and both NIC's have the same MAC address.
+
+ The VF is enslaved by netvsc device. The netvsc driver will transparently
+ switch the data path to the VF when it is available and up.
+ Network state (addresses, firewall, etc) should be applied only to the
+ netvsc device; the slave device should not be accessed directly in
+ most cases. The exceptions are if some special queue discipline or
+ flow direction is desired, these should be applied directly to the
+ VF slave device.
+
+Receive Buffer
+--------------
+ Packets are received into a receive area which is created when device
+ is probed. The receive area is broken into MTU sized chunks and each may
+ contain one or more packets. The number of receive sections may be changed
+ via ethtool Rx ring parameters.
+
+ There is a similar send buffer which is used to aggregate packets
+ for sending. The send area is broken into chunks, typically of 6144
+ bytes, each of section may contain one or more packets. Small
+ packets are usually transmitted via copy to the send buffer. However,
+ if the buffer is temporarily exhausted, or the packet to be transmitted is
+ an LSO packet, the driver will provide the host with pointers to the data
+ from the SKB. This attempts to achieve a balance between the overhead of
+ data copy and the impact of remapping VM memory to be accessible by the
+ host.
+
+XDP support
+-----------
+ XDP (eXpress Data Path) is a feature that runs eBPF bytecode at the early
+ stage when packets arrive at a NIC card. The goal is to increase performance
+ for packet processing, reducing the overhead of SKB allocation and other
+ upper network layers.
+
+ hv_netvsc supports XDP in native mode, and transparently sets the XDP
+ program on the associated VF NIC as well.
+
+ Setting / unsetting XDP program on synthetic NIC (netvsc) propagates to
+ VF NIC automatically. Setting / unsetting XDP program on VF NIC directly
+ is not recommended, also not propagated to synthetic NIC, and may be
+ overwritten by setting of synthetic NIC.
+
+ XDP program cannot run with LRO (RSC) enabled, so you need to disable LRO
+ before running XDP::
+
+ ethtool -K eth0 lro off
+
+ XDP_REDIRECT action is not yet supported.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/s2io.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/s2io.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c5673ec45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/s2io.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,196 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=========================================================
+Neterion's (Formerly S2io) Xframe I/II PCI-X 10GbE driver
+=========================================================
+
+Release notes for Neterion's (Formerly S2io) Xframe I/II PCI-X 10GbE driver.
+
+.. Contents
+ - 1. Introduction
+ - 2. Identifying the adapter/interface
+ - 3. Features supported
+ - 4. Command line parameters
+ - 5. Performance suggestions
+ - 6. Available Downloads
+
+
+1. Introduction
+===============
+This Linux driver supports Neterion's Xframe I PCI-X 1.0 and
+Xframe II PCI-X 2.0 adapters. It supports several features
+such as jumbo frames, MSI/MSI-X, checksum offloads, TSO, UFO and so on.
+See below for complete list of features.
+
+All features are supported for both IPv4 and IPv6.
+
+2. Identifying the adapter/interface
+====================================
+
+a. Insert the adapter(s) in your system.
+b. Build and load driver::
+
+ # insmod s2io.ko
+
+c. View log messages::
+
+ # dmesg | tail -40
+
+You will see messages similar to::
+
+ eth3: Neterion Xframe I 10GbE adapter (rev 3), Version 2.0.9.1, Intr type INTA
+ eth4: Neterion Xframe II 10GbE adapter (rev 2), Version 2.0.9.1, Intr type INTA
+ eth4: Device is on 64 bit 133MHz PCIX(M1) bus
+
+The above messages identify the adapter type(Xframe I/II), adapter revision,
+driver version, interface name(eth3, eth4), Interrupt type(INTA, MSI, MSI-X).
+In case of Xframe II, the PCI/PCI-X bus width and frequency are displayed
+as well.
+
+To associate an interface with a physical adapter use "ethtool -p <ethX>".
+The corresponding adapter's LED will blink multiple times.
+
+3. Features supported
+=====================
+a. Jumbo frames. Xframe I/II supports MTU up to 9600 bytes,
+ modifiable using ip command.
+
+b. Offloads. Supports checksum offload(TCP/UDP/IP) on transmit
+ and receive, TSO.
+
+c. Multi-buffer receive mode. Scattering of packet across multiple
+ buffers. Currently driver supports 2-buffer mode which yields
+ significant performance improvement on certain platforms(SGI Altix,
+ IBM xSeries).
+
+d. MSI/MSI-X. Can be enabled on platforms which support this feature
+ (IA64, Xeon) resulting in noticeable performance improvement(up to 7%
+ on certain platforms).
+
+e. Statistics. Comprehensive MAC-level and software statistics displayed
+ using "ethtool -S" option.
+
+f. Multi-FIFO/Ring. Supports up to 8 transmit queues and receive rings,
+ with multiple steering options.
+
+4. Command line parameters
+==========================
+
+a. tx_fifo_num
+ Number of transmit queues
+
+Valid range: 1-8
+
+Default: 1
+
+b. rx_ring_num
+ Number of receive rings
+
+Valid range: 1-8
+
+Default: 1
+
+c. tx_fifo_len
+ Size of each transmit queue
+
+Valid range: Total length of all queues should not exceed 8192
+
+Default: 4096
+
+d. rx_ring_sz
+ Size of each receive ring(in 4K blocks)
+
+Valid range: Limited by memory on system
+
+Default: 30
+
+e. intr_type
+ Specifies interrupt type. Possible values 0(INTA), 2(MSI-X)
+
+Valid values: 0, 2
+
+Default: 2
+
+5. Performance suggestions
+==========================
+
+General:
+
+a. Set MTU to maximum(9000 for switch setup, 9600 in back-to-back configuration)
+b. Set TCP windows size to optimal value.
+
+For instance, for MTU=1500 a value of 210K has been observed to result in
+good performance::
+
+ # sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="210000 210000 210000"
+ # sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="210000 210000 210000"
+
+For MTU=9000, TCP window size of 10 MB is recommended::
+
+ # sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="10000000 10000000 10000000"
+ # sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="10000000 10000000 10000000"
+
+Transmit performance:
+
+a. By default, the driver respects BIOS settings for PCI bus parameters.
+ However, you may want to experiment with PCI bus parameters
+ max-split-transactions(MOST) and MMRBC (use setpci command).
+
+ A MOST value of 2 has been found optimal for Opterons and 3 for Itanium.
+
+ It could be different for your hardware.
+
+ Set MMRBC to 4K**.
+
+ For example you can set
+
+ For opteron::
+
+ #setpci -d 17d5:* 62=1d
+
+ For Itanium::
+
+ #setpci -d 17d5:* 62=3d
+
+ For detailed description of the PCI registers, please see Xframe User Guide.
+
+b. Ensure Transmit Checksum offload is enabled. Use ethtool to set/verify this
+ parameter.
+
+c. Turn on TSO(using "ethtool -K")::
+
+ # ethtool -K <ethX> tso on
+
+Receive performance:
+
+a. By default, the driver respects BIOS settings for PCI bus parameters.
+ However, you may want to set PCI latency timer to 248::
+
+ #setpci -d 17d5:* LATENCY_TIMER=f8
+
+ For detailed description of the PCI registers, please see Xframe User Guide.
+
+b. Use 2-buffer mode. This results in large performance boost on
+ certain platforms(eg. SGI Altix, IBM xSeries).
+
+c. Ensure Receive Checksum offload is enabled. Use "ethtool -K ethX" command to
+ set/verify this option.
+
+d. Enable NAPI feature(in kernel configuration Device Drivers ---> Network
+ device support ---> Ethernet (10000 Mbit) ---> S2IO 10Gbe Xframe NIC) to
+ bring down CPU utilization.
+
+.. note::
+
+ For AMD opteron platforms with 8131 chipset, MMRBC=1 and MOST=1 are
+ recommended as safe parameters.
+
+For more information, please review the AMD8131 errata at
+http://vip.amd.com/us-en/assets/content_type/white_papers_and_tech_docs/
+26310_AMD-8131_HyperTransport_PCI-X_Tunnel_Revision_Guide_rev_3_18.pdf
+
+6. Support
+==========
+
+For further support please contact either your 10GbE Xframe NIC vendor (IBM,
+HP, SGI etc.)
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/netronome/nfp.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/netronome/nfp.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ada611fb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/netronome/nfp.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,249 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+=============================================
+Netronome Flow Processor (NFP) Kernel Drivers
+=============================================
+
+Copyright (c) 2019, Netronome Systems, Inc.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- `Overview`_
+- `Acquiring Firmware`_
+
+Overview
+========
+
+This driver supports Netronome's line of Flow Processor devices,
+including the NFP4000, NFP5000, and NFP6000 models, which are also
+incorporated in the company's family of Agilio SmartNICs. The SR-IOV
+physical and virtual functions for these devices are supported by
+the driver.
+
+Acquiring Firmware
+==================
+
+The NFP4000 and NFP6000 devices require application specific firmware
+to function. Application firmware can be located either on the host file system
+or in the device flash (if supported by management firmware).
+
+Firmware files on the host filesystem contain card type (`AMDA-*` string), media
+config etc. They should be placed in `/lib/firmware/netronome` directory to
+load firmware from the host file system.
+
+Firmware for basic NIC operation is available in the upstream
+`linux-firmware.git` repository.
+
+Firmware in NVRAM
+-----------------
+
+Recent versions of management firmware supports loading application
+firmware from flash when the host driver gets probed. The firmware loading
+policy configuration may be used to configure this feature appropriately.
+
+Devlink or ethtool can be used to update the application firmware on the device
+flash by providing the appropriate `nic_AMDA*.nffw` file to the respective
+command. Users need to take care to write the correct firmware image for the
+card and media configuration to flash.
+
+Available storage space in flash depends on the card being used.
+
+Dealing with multiple projects
+------------------------------
+
+NFP hardware is fully programmable therefore there can be different
+firmware images targeting different applications.
+
+When using application firmware from host, we recommend placing
+actual firmware files in application-named subdirectories in
+`/lib/firmware/netronome` and linking the desired files, e.g.::
+
+ $ tree /lib/firmware/netronome/
+ /lib/firmware/netronome/
+ ├── bpf
+ │   ├── nic_AMDA0081-0001_1x40.nffw
+ │   └── nic_AMDA0081-0001_4x10.nffw
+ ├── flower
+ │   ├── nic_AMDA0081-0001_1x40.nffw
+ │   └── nic_AMDA0081-0001_4x10.nffw
+ ├── nic
+ │   ├── nic_AMDA0081-0001_1x40.nffw
+ │   └── nic_AMDA0081-0001_4x10.nffw
+ ├── nic_AMDA0081-0001_1x40.nffw -> bpf/nic_AMDA0081-0001_1x40.nffw
+ └── nic_AMDA0081-0001_4x10.nffw -> bpf/nic_AMDA0081-0001_4x10.nffw
+
+ 3 directories, 8 files
+
+You may need to use hard instead of symbolic links on distributions
+which use old `mkinitrd` command instead of `dracut` (e.g. Ubuntu).
+
+After changing firmware files you may need to regenerate the initramfs
+image. Initramfs contains drivers and firmware files your system may
+need to boot. Refer to the documentation of your distribution to find
+out how to update initramfs. Good indication of stale initramfs
+is system loading wrong driver or firmware on boot, but when driver is
+later reloaded manually everything works correctly.
+
+Selecting firmware per device
+-----------------------------
+
+Most commonly all cards on the system use the same type of firmware.
+If you want to load specific firmware image for a specific card, you
+can use either the PCI bus address or serial number. Driver will print
+which files it's looking for when it recognizes a NFP device::
+
+ nfp: Looking for firmware file in order of priority:
+ nfp: netronome/serial-00-12-34-aa-bb-cc-10-ff.nffw: not found
+ nfp: netronome/pci-0000:02:00.0.nffw: not found
+ nfp: netronome/nic_AMDA0081-0001_1x40.nffw: found, loading...
+
+In this case if file (or link) called *serial-00-12-34-aa-bb-5d-10-ff.nffw*
+or *pci-0000:02:00.0.nffw* is present in `/lib/firmware/netronome` this
+firmware file will take precedence over `nic_AMDA*` files.
+
+Note that `serial-*` and `pci-*` files are **not** automatically included
+in initramfs, you will have to refer to documentation of appropriate tools
+to find out how to include them.
+
+Firmware loading policy
+-----------------------
+
+Firmware loading policy is controlled via three HWinfo parameters
+stored as key value pairs in the device flash:
+
+app_fw_from_flash
+ Defines which firmware should take precedence, 'Disk' (0), 'Flash' (1) or
+ the 'Preferred' (2) firmware. When 'Preferred' is selected, the management
+ firmware makes the decision over which firmware will be loaded by comparing
+ versions of the flash firmware and the host supplied firmware.
+ This variable is configurable using the 'fw_load_policy'
+ devlink parameter.
+
+abi_drv_reset
+ Defines if the driver should reset the firmware when
+ the driver is probed, either 'Disk' (0) if firmware was found on disk,
+ 'Always' (1) reset or 'Never' (2) reset. Note that the device is always
+ reset on driver unload if firmware was loaded when the driver was probed.
+ This variable is configurable using the 'reset_dev_on_drv_probe'
+ devlink parameter.
+
+abi_drv_load_ifc
+ Defines a list of PF devices allowed to load FW on the device.
+ This variable is not currently user configurable.
+
+Statistics
+==========
+
+Following device statistics are available through the ``ethtool -S`` interface:
+
+.. flat-table:: NFP device statistics
+ :header-rows: 1
+ :widths: 3 1 11
+
+ * - Name
+ - ID
+ - Meaning
+
+ * - dev_rx_discards
+ - 1
+ - Packet can be discarded on the RX path for one of the following reasons:
+
+ * The NIC is not in promisc mode, and the destination MAC address
+ doesn't match the interfaces' MAC address.
+ * The received packet is larger than the max buffer size on the host.
+ I.e. it exceeds the Layer 3 MRU.
+ * There is no freelist descriptor available on the host for the packet.
+ It is likely that the NIC couldn't cache one in time.
+ * A BPF program discarded the packet.
+ * The datapath drop action was executed.
+ * The MAC discarded the packet due to lack of ingress buffer space
+ on the NIC.
+
+ * - dev_rx_errors
+ - 2
+ - A packet can be counted (and dropped) as RX error for the following
+ reasons:
+
+ * A problem with the VEB lookup (only when SR-IOV is used).
+ * A physical layer problem that causes Ethernet errors, like FCS or
+ alignment errors. The cause is usually faulty cables or SFPs.
+
+ * - dev_rx_bytes
+ - 3
+ - Total number of bytes received.
+
+ * - dev_rx_uc_bytes
+ - 4
+ - Unicast bytes received.
+
+ * - dev_rx_mc_bytes
+ - 5
+ - Multicast bytes received.
+
+ * - dev_rx_bc_bytes
+ - 6
+ - Broadcast bytes received.
+
+ * - dev_rx_pkts
+ - 7
+ - Total number of packets received.
+
+ * - dev_rx_mc_pkts
+ - 8
+ - Multicast packets received.
+
+ * - dev_rx_bc_pkts
+ - 9
+ - Broadcast packets received.
+
+ * - dev_tx_discards
+ - 10
+ - A packet can be discarded in the TX direction if the MAC is
+ being flow controlled and the NIC runs out of TX queue space.
+
+ * - dev_tx_errors
+ - 11
+ - A packet can be counted as TX error (and dropped) for one for the
+ following reasons:
+
+ * The packet is an LSO segment, but the Layer 3 or Layer 4 offset
+ could not be determined. Therefore LSO could not continue.
+ * An invalid packet descriptor was received over PCIe.
+ * The packet Layer 3 length exceeds the device MTU.
+ * An error on the MAC/physical layer. Usually due to faulty cables or
+ SFPs.
+ * A CTM buffer could not be allocated.
+ * The packet offset was incorrect and could not be fixed by the NIC.
+
+ * - dev_tx_bytes
+ - 12
+ - Total number of bytes transmitted.
+
+ * - dev_tx_uc_bytes
+ - 13
+ - Unicast bytes transmitted.
+
+ * - dev_tx_mc_bytes
+ - 14
+ - Multicast bytes transmitted.
+
+ * - dev_tx_bc_bytes
+ - 15
+ - Broadcast bytes transmitted.
+
+ * - dev_tx_pkts
+ - 16
+ - Total number of packets transmitted.
+
+ * - dev_tx_mc_pkts
+ - 17
+ - Multicast packets transmitted.
+
+ * - dev_tx_bc_pkts
+ - 18
+ - Broadcast packets transmitted.
+
+Note that statistics unknown to the driver will be displayed as
+``dev_unknown_stat$ID``, where ``$ID`` refers to the second column
+above.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/pensando/ionic.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/pensando/ionic.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0eabbc347
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/pensando/ionic.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,274 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+========================================================
+Linux Driver for the Pensando(R) Ethernet adapter family
+========================================================
+
+Pensando Linux Ethernet driver.
+Copyright(c) 2019 Pensando Systems, Inc
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying the Adapter
+- Enabling the driver
+- Configuring the driver
+- Statistics
+- Support
+
+Identifying the Adapter
+=======================
+
+To find if one or more Pensando PCI Ethernet devices are installed on the
+host, check for the PCI devices::
+
+ $ lspci -d 1dd8:
+ b5:00.0 Ethernet controller: Device 1dd8:1002
+ b6:00.0 Ethernet controller: Device 1dd8:1002
+
+If such devices are listed as above, then the ionic.ko driver should find
+and configure them for use. There should be log entries in the kernel
+messages such as these::
+
+ $ dmesg | grep ionic
+ ionic 0000:b5:00.0: 126.016 Gb/s available PCIe bandwidth (8.0 GT/s PCIe x16 link)
+ ionic 0000:b5:00.0 enp181s0: renamed from eth0
+ ionic 0000:b5:00.0 enp181s0: Link up - 100 Gbps
+ ionic 0000:b6:00.0: 126.016 Gb/s available PCIe bandwidth (8.0 GT/s PCIe x16 link)
+ ionic 0000:b6:00.0 enp182s0: renamed from eth0
+ ionic 0000:b6:00.0 enp182s0: Link up - 100 Gbps
+
+Driver and firmware version information can be gathered with either of
+ethtool or devlink tools::
+
+ $ ethtool -i enp181s0
+ driver: ionic
+ version: 5.7.0
+ firmware-version: 1.8.0-28
+ ...
+
+ $ devlink dev info pci/0000:b5:00.0
+ pci/0000:b5:00.0:
+ driver ionic
+ serial_number FLM18420073
+ versions:
+ fixed:
+ asic.id 0x0
+ asic.rev 0x0
+ running:
+ fw 1.8.0-28
+
+See Documentation/networking/devlink/ionic.rst for more information
+on the devlink dev info data.
+
+Enabling the driver
+===================
+
+The driver is enabled via the standard kernel configuration system,
+using the make command::
+
+ make oldconfig/menuconfig/etc.
+
+The driver is located in the menu structure at:
+
+ -> Device Drivers
+ -> Network device support (NETDEVICES [=y])
+ -> Ethernet driver support
+ -> Pensando devices
+ -> Pensando Ethernet IONIC Support
+
+Configuring the Driver
+======================
+
+MTU
+---
+
+Jumbo frame support is available with a maximim size of 9194 bytes.
+
+Interrupt coalescing
+--------------------
+
+Interrupt coalescing can be configured by changing the rx-usecs value with
+the "ethtool -C" command. The rx-usecs range is 0-190. The tx-usecs value
+reflects the rx-usecs value as they are tied together on the same interrupt.
+
+SR-IOV
+------
+
+Minimal SR-IOV support is currently offered and can be enabled by setting
+the sysfs 'sriov_numvfs' value, if supported by your particular firmware
+configuration.
+
+Statistics
+==========
+
+Basic hardware stats
+--------------------
+
+The commands ``netstat -i``, ``ip -s link show``, and ``ifconfig`` show
+a limited set of statistics taken directly from firmware. For example::
+
+ $ ip -s link show enp181s0
+ 7: enp181s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc mq state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
+ link/ether 00:ae:cd:00:07:68 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
+ RX: bytes packets errors dropped overrun mcast
+ 414 5 0 0 0 0
+ TX: bytes packets errors dropped carrier collsns
+ 1384 18 0 0 0 0
+
+ethtool -S
+----------
+
+The statistics shown from the ``ethtool -S`` command includes a combination of
+driver counters and firmware counters, including port and queue specific values.
+The driver values are counters computed by the driver, and the firmware values
+are gathered by the firmware from the port hardware and passed through the
+driver with no further interpretation.
+
+Driver port specific::
+
+ tx_packets: 12
+ tx_bytes: 964
+ rx_packets: 5
+ rx_bytes: 414
+ tx_tso: 0
+ tx_tso_bytes: 0
+ tx_csum_none: 12
+ tx_csum: 0
+ rx_csum_none: 0
+ rx_csum_complete: 3
+ rx_csum_error: 0
+
+Driver queue specific::
+
+ tx_0_pkts: 3
+ tx_0_bytes: 294
+ tx_0_clean: 3
+ tx_0_dma_map_err: 0
+ tx_0_linearize: 0
+ tx_0_frags: 0
+ tx_0_tso: 0
+ tx_0_tso_bytes: 0
+ tx_0_csum_none: 3
+ tx_0_csum: 0
+ tx_0_vlan_inserted: 0
+ rx_0_pkts: 2
+ rx_0_bytes: 120
+ rx_0_dma_map_err: 0
+ rx_0_alloc_err: 0
+ rx_0_csum_none: 0
+ rx_0_csum_complete: 0
+ rx_0_csum_error: 0
+ rx_0_dropped: 0
+ rx_0_vlan_stripped: 0
+
+Firmware port specific::
+
+ hw_tx_dropped: 0
+ hw_rx_dropped: 0
+ hw_rx_over_errors: 0
+ hw_rx_missed_errors: 0
+ hw_tx_aborted_errors: 0
+ frames_rx_ok: 15
+ frames_rx_all: 15
+ frames_rx_bad_fcs: 0
+ frames_rx_bad_all: 0
+ octets_rx_ok: 1290
+ octets_rx_all: 1290
+ frames_rx_unicast: 10
+ frames_rx_multicast: 5
+ frames_rx_broadcast: 0
+ frames_rx_pause: 0
+ frames_rx_bad_length: 0
+ frames_rx_undersized: 0
+ frames_rx_oversized: 0
+ frames_rx_fragments: 0
+ frames_rx_jabber: 0
+ frames_rx_pripause: 0
+ frames_rx_stomped_crc: 0
+ frames_rx_too_long: 0
+ frames_rx_vlan_good: 3
+ frames_rx_dropped: 0
+ frames_rx_less_than_64b: 0
+ frames_rx_64b: 4
+ frames_rx_65b_127b: 11
+ frames_rx_128b_255b: 0
+ frames_rx_256b_511b: 0
+ frames_rx_512b_1023b: 0
+ frames_rx_1024b_1518b: 0
+ frames_rx_1519b_2047b: 0
+ frames_rx_2048b_4095b: 0
+ frames_rx_4096b_8191b: 0
+ frames_rx_8192b_9215b: 0
+ frames_rx_other: 0
+ frames_tx_ok: 31
+ frames_tx_all: 31
+ frames_tx_bad: 0
+ octets_tx_ok: 2614
+ octets_tx_total: 2614
+ frames_tx_unicast: 8
+ frames_tx_multicast: 21
+ frames_tx_broadcast: 2
+ frames_tx_pause: 0
+ frames_tx_pripause: 0
+ frames_tx_vlan: 0
+ frames_tx_less_than_64b: 0
+ frames_tx_64b: 4
+ frames_tx_65b_127b: 27
+ frames_tx_128b_255b: 0
+ frames_tx_256b_511b: 0
+ frames_tx_512b_1023b: 0
+ frames_tx_1024b_1518b: 0
+ frames_tx_1519b_2047b: 0
+ frames_tx_2048b_4095b: 0
+ frames_tx_4096b_8191b: 0
+ frames_tx_8192b_9215b: 0
+ frames_tx_other: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_0: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_1: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_2: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_3: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_4: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_5: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_6: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_7: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_0: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_1: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_2: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_3: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_4: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_5: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_6: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_7: 0
+ tx_pripause_0_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_1_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_2_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_3_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_4_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_5_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_6_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_7_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_0_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_1_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_2_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_3_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_4_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_5_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_6_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_7_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pause_1us_count: 0
+ frames_tx_truncated: 0
+
+
+Support
+=======
+
+For general Linux networking support, please use the netdev mailing
+list, which is monitored by Pensando personnel::
+
+ netdev@vger.kernel.org
+
+For more specific support needs, please use the Pensando driver support
+email::
+
+ drivers@pensando.io
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/smsc/smc9.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/smsc/smc9.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e5eac896a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/smsc/smc9.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+================
+SMC 9xxxx Driver
+================
+
+Revision 0.12
+
+3/5/96
+
+Copyright 1996 Erik Stahlman
+
+Released under terms of the GNU General Public License.
+
+This file contains the instructions and caveats for my SMC9xxx driver. You
+should not be using the driver without reading this file.
+
+Things to note about installation:
+
+ 1. The driver should work on all kernels from 1.2.13 until 1.3.71.
+ (A kernel patch is supplied for 1.3.71 )
+
+ 2. If you include this into the kernel, you might need to change some
+ options, such as for forcing IRQ.
+
+
+ 3. To compile as a module, run 'make'.
+ Make will give you the appropriate options for various kernel support.
+
+ 4. Loading the driver as a module::
+
+ use: insmod smc9194.o
+ optional parameters:
+ io=xxxx : your base address
+ irq=xx : your irq
+ ifport=x : 0 for whatever is default
+ 1 for twisted pair
+ 2 for AUI ( or BNC on some cards )
+
+How to obtain the latest version?
+
+FTP:
+ ftp://fenris.campus.vt.edu/smc9/smc9-12.tar.gz
+ ftp://sfbox.vt.edu/filebox/F/fenris/smc9/smc9-12.tar.gz
+
+
+Contacting me:
+ erik@mail.vt.edu
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/stmicro/stmmac.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/stmicro/stmmac.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d46e5036
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/stmicro/stmmac.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,700 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+==============================================================
+Linux Driver for the Synopsys(R) Ethernet Controllers "stmmac"
+==============================================================
+
+Authors: Giuseppe Cavallaro <peppe.cavallaro@st.com>,
+Alexandre Torgue <alexandre.torgue@st.com>, Jose Abreu <joabreu@synopsys.com>
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- In This Release
+- Feature List
+- Kernel Configuration
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Driver Information and Notes
+- Debug Information
+- Support
+
+In This Release
+===============
+
+This file describes the stmmac Linux Driver for all the Synopsys(R) Ethernet
+Controllers.
+
+Currently, this network device driver is for all STi embedded MAC/GMAC
+(i.e. 7xxx/5xxx SoCs), SPEAr (arm), Loongson1B (mips) and XILINX XC2V3000
+FF1152AMT0221 D1215994A VIRTEX FPGA board. The Synopsys Ethernet QoS 5.0 IPK
+is also supported.
+
+DesignWare(R) Cores Ethernet MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.70a
+(and older) and DesignWare(R) Cores Ethernet Quality-of-Service version 4.0
+(and upper) have been used for developing this driver as well as
+DesignWare(R) Cores XGMAC - 10G Ethernet MAC and DesignWare(R) Cores
+Enterprise MAC - 100G Ethernet MAC.
+
+This driver supports both the platform bus and PCI.
+
+This driver includes support for the following Synopsys(R) DesignWare(R)
+Cores Ethernet Controllers and corresponding minimum and maximum versions:
+
++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
+| Controller Name | Min. Version | Max. Version | Abbrev. Name |
++===============================+==============+==============+==============+
+| Ethernet MAC Universal | N/A | 3.73a | GMAC |
++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
+| Ethernet Quality-of-Service | 4.00a | N/A | GMAC4+ |
++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
+| XGMAC - 10G Ethernet MAC | 2.10a | N/A | XGMAC2+ |
++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
+| XLGMAC - 100G Ethernet MAC | 2.00a | N/A | XLGMAC2+ |
++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your Ethernet adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply
+to use with Linux.
+
+Feature List
+============
+
+The following features are available in this driver:
+ - GMII/MII/RGMII/SGMII/RMII/XGMII/XLGMII Interface
+ - Half-Duplex / Full-Duplex Operation
+ - Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE)
+ - IEEE 802.3x PAUSE Packets (Flow Control)
+ - RMON/MIB Counters
+ - IEEE 1588 Timestamping (PTP)
+ - Pulse-Per-Second Output (PPS)
+ - MDIO Clause 22 / Clause 45 Interface
+ - MAC Loopback
+ - ARP Offloading
+ - Automatic CRC / PAD Insertion and Checking
+ - Checksum Offload for Received and Transmitted Packets
+ - Standard or Jumbo Ethernet Packets
+ - Source Address Insertion / Replacement
+ - VLAN TAG Insertion / Replacement / Deletion / Filtering (HASH and PERFECT)
+ - Programmable TX and RX Watchdog and Coalesce Settings
+ - Destination Address Filtering (PERFECT)
+ - HASH Filtering (Multicast)
+ - Layer 3 / Layer 4 Filtering
+ - Remote Wake-Up Detection
+ - Receive Side Scaling (RSS)
+ - Frame Preemption for TX and RX
+ - Programmable Burst Length, Threshold, Queue Size
+ - Multiple Queues (up to 8)
+ - Multiple Scheduling Algorithms (TX: WRR, DWRR, WFQ, SP, CBS, EST, TBS;
+ RX: WRR, SP)
+ - Flexible RX Parser
+ - TCP / UDP Segmentation Offload (TSO, USO)
+ - Split Header (SPH)
+ - Safety Features (ECC Protection, Data Parity Protection)
+ - Selftests using Ethtool
+
+Kernel Configuration
+====================
+
+The kernel configuration option is ``CONFIG_STMMAC_ETH``:
+ - ``CONFIG_STMMAC_PLATFORM``: is to enable the platform driver.
+ - ``CONFIG_STMMAC_PCI``: is to enable the pci driver.
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+
+If the driver is built as a module the following optional parameters are used
+by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this
+syntax (e.g. for PCI module)::
+
+ modprobe stmmac_pci [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...]
+
+Driver parameters can be also passed in command line by using::
+
+ stmmaceth=watchdog:100,chain_mode=1
+
+The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
+unless otherwise noted.
+
+watchdog
+--------
+:Valid Range: 5000-None
+:Default Value: 5000
+
+This parameter overrides the transmit timeout in milliseconds.
+
+debug
+-----
+:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This parameter adjusts the level of debug messages displayed in the system
+logs.
+
+phyaddr
+-------
+:Valid Range: 0-31
+:Default Value: -1
+
+This parameter overrides the physical address of the PHY device.
+
+flow_ctrl
+---------
+:Valid Range: 0-3 (0=off,1=rx,2=tx,3=rx/tx)
+:Default Value: 3
+
+This parameter changes the default Flow Control ability.
+
+pause
+-----
+:Valid Range: 0-65535
+:Default Value: 65535
+
+This parameter changes the default Flow Control Pause time.
+
+tc
+--
+:Valid Range: 64-256
+:Default Value: 64
+
+This parameter changes the default HW FIFO Threshold control value.
+
+buf_sz
+------
+:Valid Range: 1536-16384
+:Default Value: 1536
+
+This parameter changes the default RX DMA packet buffer size.
+
+eee_timer
+---------
+:Valid Range: 0-None
+:Default Value: 1000
+
+This parameter changes the default LPI TX Expiration time in milliseconds.
+
+chain_mode
+----------
+:Valid Range: 0-1 (0=off,1=on)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This parameter changes the default mode of operation from Ring Mode to
+Chain Mode.
+
+Driver Information and Notes
+============================
+
+Transmit Process
+----------------
+
+The xmit method is invoked when the kernel needs to transmit a packet; it sets
+the descriptors in the ring and informs the DMA engine that there is a packet
+ready to be transmitted.
+
+By default, the driver sets the ``NETIF_F_SG`` bit in the features field of
+the ``net_device`` structure, enabling the scatter-gather feature. This is
+true on chips and configurations where the checksum can be done in hardware.
+
+Once the controller has finished transmitting the packet, timer will be
+scheduled to release the transmit resources.
+
+Receive Process
+---------------
+
+When one or more packets are received, an interrupt happens. The interrupts
+are not queued, so the driver has to scan all the descriptors in the ring
+during the receive process.
+
+This is based on NAPI, so the interrupt handler signals only if there is work
+to be done, and it exits. Then the poll method will be scheduled at some
+future point.
+
+The incoming packets are stored, by the DMA, in a list of pre-allocated socket
+buffers in order to avoid the memcpy (zero-copy).
+
+Interrupt Mitigation
+--------------------
+
+The driver is able to mitigate the number of its DMA interrupts using NAPI for
+the reception on chips older than the 3.50. New chips have an HW RX Watchdog
+used for this mitigation.
+
+Mitigation parameters can be tuned by ethtool.
+
+WoL
+---
+
+Wake up on Lan feature through Magic and Unicast frames are supported for the
+GMAC, GMAC4/5 and XGMAC core.
+
+DMA Descriptors
+---------------
+
+Driver handles both normal and alternate descriptors. The latter has been only
+tested on DesignWare(R) Cores Ethernet MAC Universal version 3.41a and later.
+
+stmmac supports DMA descriptor to operate both in dual buffer (RING) and
+linked-list(CHAINED) mode. In RING each descriptor points to two data buffer
+pointers whereas in CHAINED mode they point to only one data buffer pointer.
+RING mode is the default.
+
+In CHAINED mode each descriptor will have pointer to next descriptor in the
+list, hence creating the explicit chaining in the descriptor itself, whereas
+such explicit chaining is not possible in RING mode.
+
+Extended Descriptors
+--------------------
+
+The extended descriptors give us information about the Ethernet payload when
+it is carrying PTP packets or TCP/UDP/ICMP over IP. These are not available on
+GMAC Synopsys(R) chips older than the 3.50. At probe time the driver will
+decide if these can be actually used. This support also is mandatory for PTPv2
+because the extra descriptors are used for saving the hardware timestamps and
+Extended Status.
+
+Ethtool Support
+---------------
+
+Ethtool is supported. For example, driver statistics (including RMON),
+internal errors can be taken using::
+
+ ethtool -S ethX
+
+Ethtool selftests are also supported. This allows to do some early sanity
+checks to the HW using MAC and PHY loopback mechanisms::
+
+ ethtool -t ethX
+
+Jumbo and Segmentation Offloading
+---------------------------------
+
+Jumbo frames are supported and tested for the GMAC. The GSO has been also
+added but it's performed in software. LRO is not supported.
+
+TSO Support
+-----------
+
+TSO (TCP Segmentation Offload) feature is supported by GMAC > 4.x and XGMAC
+chip family. When a packet is sent through TCP protocol, the TCP stack ensures
+that the SKB provided to the low level driver (stmmac in our case) matches
+with the maximum frame len (IP header + TCP header + payload <= 1500 bytes
+(for MTU set to 1500)). It means that if an application using TCP want to send
+a packet which will have a length (after adding headers) > 1514 the packet
+will be split in several TCP packets: The data payload is split and headers
+(TCP/IP ..) are added. It is done by software.
+
+When TSO is enabled, the TCP stack doesn't care about the maximum frame length
+and provide SKB packet to stmmac as it is. The GMAC IP will have to perform
+the segmentation by it self to match with maximum frame length.
+
+This feature can be enabled in device tree through ``snps,tso`` entry.
+
+Energy Efficient Ethernet
+-------------------------
+
+Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) enables IEEE 802.3 MAC sublayer along with a
+family of Physical layer to operate in the Low Power Idle (LPI) mode. The EEE
+mode supports the IEEE 802.3 MAC operation at 100Mbps, 1000Mbps and 1Gbps.
+
+The LPI mode allows power saving by switching off parts of the communication
+device functionality when there is no data to be transmitted & received.
+The system on both the side of the link can disable some functionalities and
+save power during the period of low-link utilization. The MAC controls whether
+the system should enter or exit the LPI mode and communicate this to PHY.
+
+As soon as the interface is opened, the driver verifies if the EEE can be
+supported. This is done by looking at both the DMA HW capability register and
+the PHY devices MCD registers.
+
+To enter in TX LPI mode the driver needs to have a software timer that enable
+and disable the LPI mode when there is nothing to be transmitted.
+
+Precision Time Protocol (PTP)
+-----------------------------
+
+The driver supports the IEEE 1588-2002, Precision Time Protocol (PTP), which
+enables precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and control systems
+implemented with technologies such as network communication.
+
+In addition to the basic timestamp features mentioned in IEEE 1588-2002
+Timestamps, new GMAC cores support the advanced timestamp features.
+IEEE 1588-2008 can be enabled when configuring the Kernel.
+
+SGMII/RGMII Support
+-------------------
+
+New GMAC devices provide own way to manage RGMII/SGMII. This information is
+available at run-time by looking at the HW capability register. This means
+that the stmmac can manage auto-negotiation and link status w/o using the
+PHYLIB stuff. In fact, the HW provides a subset of extended registers to
+restart the ANE, verify Full/Half duplex mode and Speed. Thanks to these
+registers, it is possible to look at the Auto-negotiated Link Parter Ability.
+
+Physical
+--------
+
+The driver is compatible with Physical Abstraction Layer to be connected with
+PHY and GPHY devices.
+
+Platform Information
+--------------------
+
+Several information can be passed through the platform and device-tree.
+
+::
+
+ struct plat_stmmacenet_data {
+
+1) Bus identifier::
+
+ int bus_id;
+
+2) PHY Physical Address. If set to -1 the driver will pick the first PHY it
+finds::
+
+ int phy_addr;
+
+3) PHY Device Interface::
+
+ int interface;
+
+4) Specific platform fields for the MDIO bus::
+
+ struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data *mdio_bus_data;
+
+5) Internal DMA parameters::
+
+ struct stmmac_dma_cfg *dma_cfg;
+
+6) Fixed CSR Clock Range selection::
+
+ int clk_csr;
+
+7) HW uses the GMAC core::
+
+ int has_gmac;
+
+8) If set the MAC will use Enhanced Descriptors::
+
+ int enh_desc;
+
+9) Core is able to perform TX Checksum and/or RX Checksum in HW::
+
+ int tx_coe;
+ int rx_coe;
+
+11) Some HWs are not able to perform the csum in HW for over-sized frames due
+to limited buffer sizes. Setting this flag the csum will be done in SW on
+JUMBO frames::
+
+ int bugged_jumbo;
+
+12) Core has the embedded power module::
+
+ int pmt;
+
+13) Force DMA to use the Store and Forward mode or Threshold mode::
+
+ int force_sf_dma_mode;
+ int force_thresh_dma_mode;
+
+15) Force to disable the RX Watchdog feature and switch to NAPI mode::
+
+ int riwt_off;
+
+16) Limit the maximum operating speed and MTU::
+
+ int max_speed;
+ int maxmtu;
+
+18) Number of Multicast/Unicast filters::
+
+ int multicast_filter_bins;
+ int unicast_filter_entries;
+
+20) Limit the maximum TX and RX FIFO size::
+
+ int tx_fifo_size;
+ int rx_fifo_size;
+
+21) Use the specified number of TX and RX Queues::
+
+ u32 rx_queues_to_use;
+ u32 tx_queues_to_use;
+
+22) Use the specified TX and RX scheduling algorithm::
+
+ u8 rx_sched_algorithm;
+ u8 tx_sched_algorithm;
+
+23) Internal TX and RX Queue parameters::
+
+ struct stmmac_rxq_cfg rx_queues_cfg[MTL_MAX_RX_QUEUES];
+ struct stmmac_txq_cfg tx_queues_cfg[MTL_MAX_TX_QUEUES];
+
+24) This callback is used for modifying some syscfg registers (on ST SoCs)
+according to the link speed negotiated by the physical layer::
+
+ void (*fix_mac_speed)(void *priv, unsigned int speed);
+
+25) Callbacks used for calling a custom initialization; This is sometimes
+necessary on some platforms (e.g. ST boxes) where the HW needs to have set
+some PIO lines or system cfg registers. init/exit callbacks should not use
+or modify platform data::
+
+ int (*init)(struct platform_device *pdev, void *priv);
+ void (*exit)(struct platform_device *pdev, void *priv);
+
+26) Perform HW setup of the bus. For example, on some ST platforms this field
+is used to configure the AMBA bridge to generate more efficient STBus traffic::
+
+ struct mac_device_info *(*setup)(void *priv);
+ void *bsp_priv;
+
+27) Internal clocks and rates::
+
+ struct clk *stmmac_clk;
+ struct clk *pclk;
+ struct clk *clk_ptp_ref;
+ unsigned int clk_ptp_rate;
+ unsigned int clk_ref_rate;
+ s32 ptp_max_adj;
+
+28) Main reset::
+
+ struct reset_control *stmmac_rst;
+
+29) AXI Internal Parameters::
+
+ struct stmmac_axi *axi;
+
+30) HW uses GMAC>4 cores::
+
+ int has_gmac4;
+
+31) HW is sun8i based::
+
+ bool has_sun8i;
+
+32) Enables TSO feature::
+
+ bool tso_en;
+
+33) Enables Receive Side Scaling (RSS) feature::
+
+ int rss_en;
+
+34) MAC Port selection::
+
+ int mac_port_sel_speed;
+
+35) Enables TX LPI Clock Gating::
+
+ bool en_tx_lpi_clockgating;
+
+36) HW uses XGMAC>2.10 cores::
+
+ int has_xgmac;
+
+::
+
+ }
+
+For MDIO bus data, we have:
+
+::
+
+ struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data {
+
+1) PHY mask passed when MDIO bus is registered::
+
+ unsigned int phy_mask;
+
+2) List of IRQs, one per PHY::
+
+ int *irqs;
+
+3) If IRQs is NULL, use this for probed PHY::
+
+ int probed_phy_irq;
+
+4) Set to true if PHY needs reset::
+
+ bool needs_reset;
+
+::
+
+ }
+
+For DMA engine configuration, we have:
+
+::
+
+ struct stmmac_dma_cfg {
+
+1) Programmable Burst Length (TX and RX)::
+
+ int pbl;
+
+2) If set, DMA TX / RX will use this value rather than pbl::
+
+ int txpbl;
+ int rxpbl;
+
+3) Enable 8xPBL::
+
+ bool pblx8;
+
+4) Enable Fixed or Mixed burst::
+
+ int fixed_burst;
+ int mixed_burst;
+
+5) Enable Address Aligned Beats::
+
+ bool aal;
+
+6) Enable Enhanced Addressing (> 32 bits)::
+
+ bool eame;
+
+::
+
+ }
+
+For DMA AXI parameters, we have:
+
+::
+
+ struct stmmac_axi {
+
+1) Enable AXI LPI::
+
+ bool axi_lpi_en;
+ bool axi_xit_frm;
+
+2) Set AXI Write / Read maximum outstanding requests::
+
+ u32 axi_wr_osr_lmt;
+ u32 axi_rd_osr_lmt;
+
+3) Set AXI 4KB bursts::
+
+ bool axi_kbbe;
+
+4) Set AXI maximum burst length map::
+
+ u32 axi_blen[AXI_BLEN];
+
+5) Set AXI Fixed burst / mixed burst::
+
+ bool axi_fb;
+ bool axi_mb;
+
+6) Set AXI rebuild incrx mode::
+
+ bool axi_rb;
+
+::
+
+ }
+
+For the RX Queues configuration, we have:
+
+::
+
+ struct stmmac_rxq_cfg {
+
+1) Mode to use (DCB or AVB)::
+
+ u8 mode_to_use;
+
+2) DMA channel to use::
+
+ u32 chan;
+
+3) Packet routing, if applicable::
+
+ u8 pkt_route;
+
+4) Use priority routing, and priority to route::
+
+ bool use_prio;
+ u32 prio;
+
+::
+
+ }
+
+For the TX Queues configuration, we have:
+
+::
+
+ struct stmmac_txq_cfg {
+
+1) Queue weight in scheduler::
+
+ u32 weight;
+
+2) Mode to use (DCB or AVB)::
+
+ u8 mode_to_use;
+
+3) Credit Base Shaper Parameters::
+
+ u32 send_slope;
+ u32 idle_slope;
+ u32 high_credit;
+ u32 low_credit;
+
+4) Use priority scheduling, and priority::
+
+ bool use_prio;
+ u32 prio;
+
+::
+
+ }
+
+Device Tree Information
+-----------------------
+
+Please refer to the following document:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/snps,dwmac.yaml
+
+HW Capabilities
+---------------
+
+Note that, starting from new chips, where it is available the HW capability
+register, many configurations are discovered at run-time for example to
+understand if EEE, HW csum, PTP, enhanced descriptor etc are actually
+available. As strategy adopted in this driver, the information from the HW
+capability register can replace what has been passed from the platform.
+
+Debug Information
+=================
+
+The driver exports many information i.e. internal statistics, debug
+information, MAC and DMA registers etc.
+
+These can be read in several ways depending on the type of the information
+actually needed.
+
+For example a user can be use the ethtool support to get statistics: e.g.
+using: ``ethtool -S ethX`` (that shows the Management counters (MMC) if
+supported) or sees the MAC/DMA registers: e.g. using: ``ethtool -d ethX``
+
+Compiling the Kernel with ``CONFIG_DEBUG_FS`` the driver will export the
+following debugfs entries:
+
+ - ``descriptors_status``: To show the DMA TX/RX descriptor rings
+ - ``dma_cap``: To show the HW Capabilities
+
+Developer can also use the ``debug`` module parameter to get further debug
+information (please see: NETIF Msg Level).
+
+Support
+=======
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the
+issue to netdev@vger.kernel.org
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/am65_nuss_cpsw_switchdev.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/am65_nuss_cpsw_switchdev.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f24adfab6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/am65_nuss_cpsw_switchdev.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===================================================================
+Texas Instruments K3 AM65 CPSW NUSS switchdev based ethernet driver
+===================================================================
+
+:Version: 1.0
+
+Port renaming
+=============
+
+In order to rename via udev::
+
+ ip -d link show dev sw0p1 | grep switchid
+
+ SUBSYSTEM=="net", ACTION=="add", ATTR{phys_switch_id}==<switchid>, \
+ ATTR{phys_port_name}!="", NAME="sw0$attr{phys_port_name}"
+
+
+Multi mac mode
+==============
+
+- The driver is operating in multi-mac mode by default, thus
+ working as N individual network interfaces.
+
+Devlink configuration parameters
+================================
+
+See Documentation/networking/devlink/am65-nuss-cpsw-switch.rst
+
+Enabling "switch"
+=================
+
+The Switch mode can be enabled by configuring devlink driver parameter
+"switch_mode" to 1/true::
+
+ devlink dev param set platform/c000000.ethernet \
+ name switch_mode value true cmode runtime
+
+This can be done regardless of the state of Port's netdev devices - UP/DOWN, but
+Port's netdev devices have to be in UP before joining to the bridge to avoid
+overwriting of bridge configuration as CPSW switch driver completely reloads its
+configuration when first port changes its state to UP.
+
+When the both interfaces joined the bridge - CPSW switch driver will enable
+marking packets with offload_fwd_mark flag.
+
+All configuration is implemented via switchdev API.
+
+Bridge setup
+============
+
+::
+
+ devlink dev param set platform/c000000.ethernet \
+ name switch_mode value true cmode runtime
+
+ ip link add name br0 type bridge
+ ip link set dev br0 type bridge ageing_time 1000
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 up
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 up
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0
+
+ [*] bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self
+
+ [*] if vlan_filtering=1. where default_pvid=1
+
+ Note. Steps [*] are mandatory.
+
+
+On/off STP
+==========
+
+::
+
+ ip link set dev BRDEV type bridge stp_state 1/0
+
+VLAN configuration
+==================
+
+::
+
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self <---- add cpu port to VLAN 1
+
+Note. This step is mandatory for bridge/default_pvid.
+
+Add extra VLANs
+===============
+
+ 1. untagged::
+
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 pvid untagged master
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 pvid untagged master
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 pvid untagged self <---- Add cpu port to VLAN100
+
+ 2. tagged::
+
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 master
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 master
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 pvid tagged self <---- Add cpu port to VLAN100
+
+FDBs
+----
+
+FDBs are automatically added on the appropriate switch port upon detection
+
+Manually adding FDBs::
+
+ bridge fdb add aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff dev sw0p1 master vlan 100
+ bridge fdb add aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:fe dev sw0p2 master <---- Add on all VLANs
+
+MDBs
+----
+
+MDBs are automatically added on the appropriate switch port upon detection
+
+Manually adding MDBs::
+
+ bridge mdb add dev br0 port sw0p1 grp 239.1.1.1 permanent vid 100
+ bridge mdb add dev br0 port sw0p1 grp 239.1.1.1 permanent <---- Add on all VLANs
+
+Multicast flooding
+==================
+CPU port mcast_flooding is always on
+
+Turning flooding on/off on swithch ports:
+bridge link set dev sw0p1 mcast_flood on/off
+
+Access and Trunk port
+=====================
+
+::
+
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 pvid untagged master
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 master
+
+
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 self
+ ip link add link br0 name br0.100 type vlan id 100
+
+Note. Setting PVID on Bridge device itself works only for
+default VLAN (default_pvid).
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a88946bd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,587 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+======================================
+Texas Instruments CPSW ethernet driver
+======================================
+
+Multiqueue & CBS & MQPRIO
+=========================
+
+
+The cpsw has 3 CBS shapers for each external ports. This document
+describes MQPRIO and CBS Qdisc offload configuration for cpsw driver
+based on examples. It potentially can be used in audio video bridging
+(AVB) and time sensitive networking (TSN).
+
+The following examples were tested on AM572x EVM and BBB boards.
+
+Test setup
+==========
+
+Under consideration two examples with AM572x EVM running cpsw driver
+in dual_emac mode.
+
+Several prerequisites:
+
+- TX queues must be rated starting from txq0 that has highest priority
+- Traffic classes are used starting from 0, that has highest priority
+- CBS shapers should be used with rated queues
+- The bandwidth for CBS shapers has to be set a little bit more then
+ potential incoming rate, thus, rate of all incoming tx queues has
+ to be a little less
+- Real rates can differ, due to discreetness
+- Map skb-priority to txq is not enough, also skb-priority to l2 prio
+ map has to be created with ip or vconfig tool
+- Any l2/socket prio (0 - 7) for classes can be used, but for
+ simplicity default values are used: 3 and 2
+- only 2 classes tested: A and B, but checked and can work with more,
+ maximum allowed 4, but only for 3 rate can be set.
+
+Test setup for examples
+=======================
+
+::
+
+ +-------------------------------+
+ |--+ |
+ | | Workstation0 |
+ |E | MAC 18:03:73:66:87:42 |
+ +-----------------------------+ +--|t | |
+ | | 1 | E | | |h |./tsn_listener -d \ |
+ | Target board: | 0 | t |--+ |0 | 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0 \|
+ | AM572x EVM | 0 | h | | | -s 1500 |
+ | | 0 | 0 | |--+ |
+ | Only 2 classes: |Mb +---| +-------------------------------+
+ | class A, class B | |
+ | | +---| +-------------------------------+
+ | | 1 | E | |--+ |
+ | | 0 | t | | | Workstation1 |
+ | | 0 | h |--+ |E | MAC 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd |
+ | |Mb | 1 | +--|t | |
+ +-----------------------------+ |h |./tsn_listener -d \ |
+ |0 | 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth0 \|
+ | | -s 1500 |
+ |--+ |
+ +-------------------------------+
+
+
+Example 1: One port tx AVB configuration scheme for target board
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+(prints and scheme for AM572x evm, applicable for single port boards)
+
+- tc - traffic class
+- txq - transmit queue
+- p - priority
+- f - fifo (cpsw fifo)
+- S - shaper configured
+
+::
+
+ +------------------------------------------------------------------+ u
+ | +---------------+ +---------------+ +------+ +------+ | s
+ | | | | | | | | | | e
+ | | App 1 | | App 2 | | Apps | | Apps | | r
+ | | Class A | | Class B | | Rest | | Rest | |
+ | | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | Eth1 | | s
+ | | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | | | | | | | p
+ | | 40 Mb/s | | 20 Mb/s | | | | | | | | a
+ | | SO_PRIORITY=3 | | SO_PRIORITY=2 | | | | | | | | c
+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | e
+ | +---|-----------+ +---|-----------+ +---|--+ +---|--+ |
+ +-----|------------------|------------------|--------|-------------+
+ +-+ +------------+ | |
+ | | +-----------------+ +--+
+ | | | |
+ +---|-------|-------------|-----------------------|----------------+
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ |
+ | | p3 | | p2 | | p1 | | p0 | | p0 | | k
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | e
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | r
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | n
+ | | | | | | e
+ | | | +-----+ | | l
+ | | | | | |
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | s
+ | |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | |tc0 | | p
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / | a
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / | c
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ | e
+ | | | +-----+ | |
+ | | | | | | |
+ | | | | | | |
+ | | | | | | |
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ |
+ | |txq0| |txq1| |txq2| |txq3| |txq4| |
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / |
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / |
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ |
+ | +-|------|------|------|--+ +--|--------------+ |
+ | | | | | | | Eth0.100 | | Eth1 | |
+ +---|------|------|------|------------------------|----------------+
+ | | | | |
+ p p p p |
+ 3 2 0-1, 4-7 <- L2 priority |
+ | | | | |
+ | | | | |
+ +---|------|------|------|------------------------|----------------+
+ | | | | | |----------+ |
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ |
+ | |dma7| |dma6| |dma5| |dma4| |dma3| |
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c
+ | \S / \S / \ / \ / \ / | p
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | s
+ | | | | +----- | | w
+ | | | | | | |
+ | | | | | | | d
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+p p+----+ | r
+ | | | | | | |o o| | | i
+ | | f3 | | f2 | | f0 |r r| f0 | | v
+ | |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 |t t|tc0 | | e
+ | \CBS / \CBS / \CBS /1 2\CBS / | r
+ | \S / \S / \ / \ / |
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ |
+ +------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+
+1) ::
+
+
+ // Add 4 tx queues, for interface Eth0, and 1 tx queue for Eth1
+ $ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 5
+ rx unmodified, ignoring
+
+2) ::
+
+ // Check if num of queues is set correctly:
+ $ ethtool -l eth0
+ Channel parameters for eth0:
+ Pre-set maximums:
+ RX: 8
+ TX: 8
+ Other: 0
+ Combined: 0
+ Current hardware settings:
+ RX: 1
+ TX: 5
+ Other: 0
+ Combined: 0
+
+3) ::
+
+ // TX queues must be rated starting from 0, so set bws for tx0 and tx1
+ // Set rates 40 and 20 Mb/s appropriately.
+ // Pay attention, real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness.
+ // Leave last 2 tx queues not rated.
+ $ echo 40 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-0/tx_maxrate
+ $ echo 20 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-1/tx_maxrate
+
+4) ::
+
+ // Check maximum rate of tx (cpdma) queues:
+ $ cat /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-*/tx_maxrate
+ 40
+ 20
+ 0
+ 0
+ 0
+
+5) ::
+
+ // Map skb->priority to traffic class:
+ // 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2
+ // Map traffic class to transmit queue:
+ // tc0 -> txq0, tc1 -> txq1, tc2 -> (txq2, txq3)
+ $ tc qdisc replace dev eth0 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \
+ map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@0 1@1 2@2 hw 1
+
+5a) ::
+
+ // As two interface sharing same set of tx queues, assign all traffic
+ // coming to interface Eth1 to separate queue in order to not mix it
+ // with traffic from interface Eth0, so use separate txq to send
+ // packets to Eth1, so all prio -> tc0 and tc0 -> txq4
+ // Here hw 0, so here still default configuration for eth1 in hw
+ $ tc qdisc replace dev eth1 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 1 \
+ map 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 queues 1@4 hw 0
+
+6) ::
+
+ // Check classes settings
+ $ tc -g class show dev eth0
+ +---(100:ffe2) mqprio
+ | +---(100:3) mqprio
+ | +---(100:4) mqprio
+ |
+ +---(100:ffe1) mqprio
+ | +---(100:2) mqprio
+ |
+ +---(100:ffe0) mqprio
+ +---(100:1) mqprio
+
+ $ tc -g class show dev eth1
+ +---(100:ffe0) mqprio
+ +---(100:5) mqprio
+
+7) ::
+
+ // Set rate for class A - 41 Mbit (tc0, txq0) using CBS Qdisc
+ // Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!)
+ // here only idle slope is important, others arg are ignored
+ // Pay attention, real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:1 cbs locredit -1438 \
+ hicredit 62 sendslope -959000 idleslope 41000 offload 1
+ net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 50
+
+8) ::
+
+ // Set rate for class B - 21 Mbit (tc1, txq1) using CBS Qdisc:
+ // Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!)
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:2 cbs locredit -1468 \
+ hicredit 65 sendslope -979000 idleslope 21000 offload 1
+ net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 30
+
+9) ::
+
+ // Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos
+ $ ip link add link eth0 name eth0.100 type vlan id 100
+ 8021q: 802.1Q VLAN Support v1.8
+ 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device eth0
+ 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device eth1
+ net eth0: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter
+
+10) ::
+
+ // Map skb->priority to L2 prio, 1 to 1
+ $ ip link set eth0.100 type vlan \
+ egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7
+
+11) ::
+
+ // Check egress map for vlan 100
+ $ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth0.100
+ [...]
+ INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0
+ EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7
+
+12) ::
+
+ // Run your appropriate tools with socket option "SO_PRIORITY"
+ // to 3 for class A and/or to 2 for class B
+ // (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html)
+ ./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p3 -s 1500&
+ ./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p2 -s 1500&
+
+13) ::
+
+ // run your listener on workstation (should be in same vlan)
+ // (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html)
+ ./tsn_listener -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i enp5s0 -s 1500
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39000 kbps
+
+14) ::
+
+ // Restore default configuration if needed
+ $ ip link del eth0.100
+ $ tc qdisc del dev eth1 root
+ $ tc qdisc del dev eth0 root
+ net eth0: Prev FIFO2 is shaped
+ net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 0
+ net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 0
+ $ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 1
+
+Example 2: Two port tx AVB configuration scheme for target board
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+(prints and scheme for AM572x evm, for dual emac boards only)
+
+::
+
+ +------------------------------------------------------------------+ u
+ | +----------+ +----------+ +------+ +----------+ +----------+ | s
+ | | | | | | | | | | | | e
+ | | App 1 | | App 2 | | Apps | | App 3 | | App 4 | | r
+ | | Class A | | Class B | | Rest | | Class B | | Class A | |
+ | | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | | | | Eth1 | | Eth1 | | s
+ | | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | | | | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | p
+ | | 40 Mb/s | | 20 Mb/s | | | | | 10 Mb/s | | 30 Mb/s | | a
+ | | SO_PRI=3 | | SO_PRI=2 | | | | | SO_PRI=3 | | SO_PRI=2 | | c
+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | e
+ | +---|------+ +---|------+ +---|--+ +---|------+ +---|------+ |
+ +-----|-------------|-------------|---------|-------------|--------+
+ +-+ +-------+ | +----------+ +----+
+ | | +-------+------+ | |
+ | | | | | |
+ +---|-------|-------------|--------------|-------------|-------|---+
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ |
+ | | p3 | | p2 | | p1 | | p0 | | p0 | | p1 | | p2 | | p3 | | k
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | e
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | r
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | n
+ | | | | | | | | e
+ | | | +----+ +----+ | | | l
+ | | | | | | | |
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | s
+ | |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | |tc2 | |tc1 | |tc0 | | p
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | a
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | e
+ | | | +-----+ +-----+ | | |
+ | | | | | | | | | |
+ | | | | | | | | | |
+ | | | | | E E | | | | |
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ t t +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ |
+ | |txq0| |txq1| |txq4| |txq5| h h |txq6| |txq7| |txq3| |txq2| |
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / 0 1 \ / \ / \ / \ / |
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / . . \ / \ / \ / \ / |
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ 1 1 \/ \/ \/ \/ |
+ | +-|------|------|------|--+ 0 0 +-|------|------|------|--+ |
+ | | | | | | | 0 0 | | | | | | |
+ +---|------|------|------|---------------|------|------|------|----+
+ | | | | | | | |
+ p p p p p p p p
+ 3 2 0-1, 4-7 <-L2 pri-> 0-1, 4-7 2 3
+ | | | | | | | |
+ | | | | | | | |
+ +---|------|------|------|---------------|------|------|------|----+
+ | | | | | | | | | |
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ |
+ | |dma7| |dma6| |dma3| |dma2| |dma1| |dma0| |dma4| |dma5| |
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c
+ | \S / \S / \ / \ / \ / \ / \S / \S / | p
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | s
+ | | | | +----- | | | | | w
+ | | | | | +----+ | | | |
+ | | | | | | | | | | d
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+p p+----+ +----+ +----+ | r
+ | | | | | | |o o| | | | | | | i
+ | | f3 | | f2 | | f0 |r CPSW r| f3 | | f2 | | f0 | | v
+ | |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 |t t|tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | | e
+ | \CBS / \CBS / \CBS /1 2\CBS / \CBS / \CBS / | r
+ | \S / \S / \ / \S / \S / \ / |
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ |
+ +------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ ========================================Eth==========================>
+
+1) ::
+
+ // Add 8 tx queues, for interface Eth0, but they are common, so are accessed
+ // by two interfaces Eth0 and Eth1.
+ $ ethtool -L eth1 rx 1 tx 8
+ rx unmodified, ignoring
+
+2) ::
+
+ // Check if num of queues is set correctly:
+ $ ethtool -l eth0
+ Channel parameters for eth0:
+ Pre-set maximums:
+ RX: 8
+ TX: 8
+ Other: 0
+ Combined: 0
+ Current hardware settings:
+ RX: 1
+ TX: 8
+ Other: 0
+ Combined: 0
+
+3) ::
+
+ // TX queues must be rated starting from 0, so set bws for tx0 and tx1 for Eth0
+ // and for tx2 and tx3 for Eth1. That is, rates 40 and 20 Mb/s appropriately
+ // for Eth0 and 30 and 10 Mb/s for Eth1.
+ // Real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness
+ // Leave last 4 tx queues as not rated
+ $ echo 40 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-0/tx_maxrate
+ $ echo 20 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-1/tx_maxrate
+ $ echo 30 > /sys/class/net/eth1/queues/tx-2/tx_maxrate
+ $ echo 10 > /sys/class/net/eth1/queues/tx-3/tx_maxrate
+
+4) ::
+
+ // Check maximum rate of tx (cpdma) queues:
+ $ cat /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-*/tx_maxrate
+ 40
+ 20
+ 30
+ 10
+ 0
+ 0
+ 0
+ 0
+
+5) ::
+
+ // Map skb->priority to traffic class for Eth0:
+ // 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2
+ // Map traffic class to transmit queue:
+ // tc0 -> txq0, tc1 -> txq1, tc2 -> (txq4, txq5)
+ $ tc qdisc replace dev eth0 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \
+ map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@0 1@1 2@4 hw 1
+
+6) ::
+
+ // Check classes settings
+ $ tc -g class show dev eth0
+ +---(100:ffe2) mqprio
+ | +---(100:5) mqprio
+ | +---(100:6) mqprio
+ |
+ +---(100:ffe1) mqprio
+ | +---(100:2) mqprio
+ |
+ +---(100:ffe0) mqprio
+ +---(100:1) mqprio
+
+7) ::
+
+ // Set rate for class A - 41 Mbit (tc0, txq0) using CBS Qdisc for Eth0
+ // here only idle slope is important, others ignored
+ // Real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:1 cbs locredit -1470 \
+ hicredit 62 sendslope -959000 idleslope 41000 offload 1
+ net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 50
+
+8) ::
+
+ // Set rate for class B - 21 Mbit (tc1, txq1) using CBS Qdisc for Eth0
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:2 cbs locredit -1470 \
+ hicredit 65 sendslope -979000 idleslope 21000 offload 1
+ net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 30
+
+9) ::
+
+ // Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos for Eth0
+ $ ip link add link eth0 name eth0.100 type vlan id 100
+ net eth0: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter
+
+10) ::
+
+ // Map skb->priority to L2 prio for Eth0.100, one to one
+ $ ip link set eth0.100 type vlan \
+ egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7
+
+11) ::
+
+ // Check egress map for vlan 100
+ $ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth0.100
+ [...]
+ INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0
+ EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7
+
+12) ::
+
+ // Map skb->priority to traffic class for Eth1:
+ // 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2
+ // Map traffic class to transmit queue:
+ // tc0 -> txq2, tc1 -> txq3, tc2 -> (txq6, txq7)
+ $ tc qdisc replace dev eth1 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \
+ map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@2 1@3 2@6 hw 1
+
+13) ::
+
+ // Check classes settings
+ $ tc -g class show dev eth1
+ +---(100:ffe2) mqprio
+ | +---(100:7) mqprio
+ | +---(100:8) mqprio
+ |
+ +---(100:ffe1) mqprio
+ | +---(100:4) mqprio
+ |
+ +---(100:ffe0) mqprio
+ +---(100:3) mqprio
+
+14) ::
+
+ // Set rate for class A - 31 Mbit (tc0, txq2) using CBS Qdisc for Eth1
+ // here only idle slope is important, others ignored, but calculated
+ // for interface speed - 100Mb for eth1 port.
+ // Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!)
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth1 parent 100:3 cbs locredit -1035 \
+ hicredit 465 sendslope -69000 idleslope 31000 offload 1
+ net eth1: set FIFO3 bw = 31
+
+15) ::
+
+ // Set rate for class B - 11 Mbit (tc1, txq3) using CBS Qdisc for Eth1
+ // Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!)
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth1 parent 100:4 cbs locredit -1335 \
+ hicredit 405 sendslope -89000 idleslope 11000 offload 1
+ net eth1: set FIFO2 bw = 11
+
+16) ::
+
+ // Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos for Eth1
+ $ ip link add link eth1 name eth1.100 type vlan id 100
+ net eth1: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter
+
+17) ::
+
+ // Map skb->priority to L2 prio for Eth1.100, one to one
+ $ ip link set eth1.100 type vlan \
+ egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7
+
+18) ::
+
+ // Check egress map for vlan 100
+ $ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth1.100
+ [...]
+ INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0
+ EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7
+
+19) ::
+
+ // Run appropriate tools with socket option "SO_PRIORITY" to 3
+ // for class A and to 2 for class B. For both interfaces
+ ./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p2 -s 1500&
+ ./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p3 -s 1500&
+ ./tsn_talker -d 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth1.100 -p2 -s 1500&
+ ./tsn_talker -d 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth1.100 -p3 -s 1500&
+
+20) ::
+
+ // run your listener on workstation (should be in same vlan)
+ // (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html)
+ ./tsn_listener -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i enp5s0 -s 1500
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39000 kbps
+
+21) ::
+
+ // Restore default configuration if needed
+ $ ip link del eth1.100
+ $ ip link del eth0.100
+ $ tc qdisc del dev eth1 root
+ net eth1: Prev FIFO2 is shaped
+ net eth1: set FIFO3 bw = 0
+ net eth1: set FIFO2 bw = 0
+ $ tc qdisc del dev eth0 root
+ net eth0: Prev FIFO2 is shaped
+ net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 0
+ net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 0
+ $ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 1
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw_switchdev.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw_switchdev.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1241ecac7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw_switchdev.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,242 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+======================================================
+Texas Instruments CPSW switchdev based ethernet driver
+======================================================
+
+:Version: 2.0
+
+Port renaming
+=============
+
+On older udev versions renaming of ethX to swXpY will not be automatically
+supported
+
+In order to rename via udev::
+
+ ip -d link show dev sw0p1 | grep switchid
+
+ SUBSYSTEM=="net", ACTION=="add", ATTR{phys_switch_id}==<switchid>, \
+ ATTR{phys_port_name}!="", NAME="sw0$attr{phys_port_name}"
+
+
+Dual mac mode
+=============
+
+- The new (cpsw_new.c) driver is operating in dual-emac mode by default, thus
+ working as 2 individual network interfaces. Main differences from legacy CPSW
+ driver are:
+
+ - optimized promiscuous mode: The P0_UNI_FLOOD (both ports) is enabled in
+ addition to ALLMULTI (current port) instead of ALE_BYPASS.
+ So, Ports in promiscuous mode will keep possibility of mcast and vlan
+ filtering, which is provides significant benefits when ports are joined
+ to the same bridge, but without enabling "switch" mode, or to different
+ bridges.
+ - learning disabled on ports as it make not too much sense for
+ segregated ports - no forwarding in HW.
+ - enabled basic support for devlink.
+
+ ::
+
+ devlink dev show
+ platform/48484000.switch
+
+ devlink dev param show
+ platform/48484000.switch:
+ name switch_mode type driver-specific
+ values:
+ cmode runtime value false
+ name ale_bypass type driver-specific
+ values:
+ cmode runtime value false
+
+Devlink configuration parameters
+================================
+
+See Documentation/networking/devlink/ti-cpsw-switch.rst
+
+Bridging in dual mac mode
+=========================
+
+The dual_mac mode requires two vids to be reserved for internal purposes,
+which, by default, equal CPSW Port numbers. As result, bridge has to be
+configured in vlan unaware mode or default_pvid has to be adjusted::
+
+ ip link add name br0 type bridge
+ ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0
+ echo 0 > /sys/class/net/br0/bridge/default_pvid
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0
+
+or::
+
+ ip link add name br0 type bridge
+ ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0
+ echo 100 > /sys/class/net/br0/bridge/default_pvid
+ ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0
+
+Enabling "switch"
+=================
+
+The Switch mode can be enabled by configuring devlink driver parameter
+"switch_mode" to 1/true::
+
+ devlink dev param set platform/48484000.switch \
+ name switch_mode value 1 cmode runtime
+
+This can be done regardless of the state of Port's netdev devices - UP/DOWN, but
+Port's netdev devices have to be in UP before joining to the bridge to avoid
+overwriting of bridge configuration as CPSW switch driver copletly reloads its
+configuration when first Port changes its state to UP.
+
+When the both interfaces joined the bridge - CPSW switch driver will enable
+marking packets with offload_fwd_mark flag unless "ale_bypass=0"
+
+All configuration is implemented via switchdev API.
+
+Bridge setup
+============
+
+::
+
+ devlink dev param set platform/48484000.switch \
+ name switch_mode value 1 cmode runtime
+
+ ip link add name br0 type bridge
+ ip link set dev br0 type bridge ageing_time 1000
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 up
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 up
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0
+
+ [*] bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self
+
+ [*] if vlan_filtering=1. where default_pvid=1
+
+ Note. Steps [*] are mandatory.
+
+
+On/off STP
+==========
+
+::
+
+ ip link set dev BRDEV type bridge stp_state 1/0
+
+VLAN configuration
+==================
+
+::
+
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self <---- add cpu port to VLAN 1
+
+Note. This step is mandatory for bridge/default_pvid.
+
+Add extra VLANs
+===============
+
+ 1. untagged::
+
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 pvid untagged master
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 pvid untagged master
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 pvid untagged self <---- Add cpu port to VLAN100
+
+ 2. tagged::
+
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 master
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 master
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 pvid tagged self <---- Add cpu port to VLAN100
+
+FDBs
+----
+
+FDBs are automatically added on the appropriate switch port upon detection
+
+Manually adding FDBs::
+
+ bridge fdb add aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff dev sw0p1 master vlan 100
+ bridge fdb add aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:fe dev sw0p2 master <---- Add on all VLANs
+
+MDBs
+----
+
+MDBs are automatically added on the appropriate switch port upon detection
+
+Manually adding MDBs::
+
+ bridge mdb add dev br0 port sw0p1 grp 239.1.1.1 permanent vid 100
+ bridge mdb add dev br0 port sw0p1 grp 239.1.1.1 permanent <---- Add on all VLANs
+
+Multicast flooding
+==================
+CPU port mcast_flooding is always on
+
+Turning flooding on/off on swithch ports:
+bridge link set dev sw0p1 mcast_flood on/off
+
+Access and Trunk port
+=====================
+
+::
+
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 pvid untagged master
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 master
+
+
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 self
+ ip link add link br0 name br0.100 type vlan id 100
+
+Note. Setting PVID on Bridge device itself working only for
+default VLAN (default_pvid).
+
+NFS
+===
+
+The only way for NFS to work is by chrooting to a minimal environment when
+switch configuration that will affect connectivity is needed.
+Assuming you are booting NFS with eth1 interface(the script is hacky and
+it's just there to prove NFS is doable).
+
+setup.sh::
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ mkdir proc
+ mount -t proc none /proc
+ ifconfig br0 > /dev/null
+ if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then
+ echo "Setting up bridge"
+ ip link add name br0 type bridge
+ ip link set dev br0 type bridge ageing_time 1000
+ ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1
+
+ ip link set eth1 down
+ ip link set eth1 name sw0p1
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 up
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 up
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self
+ ifconfig sw0p1 0.0.0.0
+ udhchc -i br0
+ fi
+ umount /proc
+
+run_nfs.sh:::
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ mkdir /tmp/root/bin -p
+ mkdir /tmp/root/lib -p
+
+ cp -r /lib/ /tmp/root/
+ cp -r /bin/ /tmp/root/
+ cp /sbin/ip /tmp/root/bin
+ cp /sbin/bridge /tmp/root/bin
+ cp /sbin/ifconfig /tmp/root/bin
+ cp /sbin/udhcpc /tmp/root/bin
+ cp /path/to/setup.sh /tmp/root/bin
+ chroot /tmp/root/ busybox sh /bin/setup.sh
+
+ run ./run_nfs.sh
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/tlan.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/tlan.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4fdc0907f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/tlan.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================
+TLAN driver for Linux
+=====================
+
+:Version: 1.14a
+
+(C) 1997-1998 Caldera, Inc.
+
+(C) 1998 James Banks
+
+(C) 1999-2001 Torben Mathiasen <tmm@image.dk, torben.mathiasen@compaq.com>
+
+For driver information/updates visit http://www.compaq.com
+
+
+
+
+
+I. Supported Devices
+====================
+
+ Only PCI devices will work with this driver.
+
+ Supported:
+
+ ========= ========= ===========================================
+ Vendor ID Device ID Name
+ ========= ========= ===========================================
+ 0e11 ae32 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX PCI UTP
+ 0e11 ae34 Compaq Netelligent 10 T PCI UTP
+ 0e11 ae35 Compaq Integrated NetFlex 3/P
+ 0e11 ae40 Compaq Netelligent Dual 10/100 TX PCI UTP
+ 0e11 ae43 Compaq Netelligent Integrated 10/100 TX UTP
+ 0e11 b011 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX Embedded UTP
+ 0e11 b012 Compaq Netelligent 10 T/2 PCI UTP/Coax
+ 0e11 b030 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX UTP
+ 0e11 f130 Compaq NetFlex 3/P
+ 0e11 f150 Compaq NetFlex 3/P
+ 108d 0012 Olicom OC-2325
+ 108d 0013 Olicom OC-2183
+ 108d 0014 Olicom OC-2326
+ ========= ========= ===========================================
+
+
+ Caveats:
+
+ I am not sure if 100BaseTX daughterboards (for those cards which
+ support such things) will work. I haven't had any solid evidence
+ either way.
+
+ However, if a card supports 100BaseTx without requiring an add
+ on daughterboard, it should work with 100BaseTx.
+
+ The "Netelligent 10 T/2 PCI UTP/Coax" (b012) device is untested,
+ but I do not expect any problems.
+
+
+II. Driver Options
+==================
+
+ 1. You can append debug=x to the end of the insmod line to get
+ debug messages, where x is a bit field where the bits mean
+ the following:
+
+ ==== =====================================
+ 0x01 Turn on general debugging messages.
+ 0x02 Turn on receive debugging messages.
+ 0x04 Turn on transmit debugging messages.
+ 0x08 Turn on list debugging messages.
+ ==== =====================================
+
+ 2. You can append aui=1 to the end of the insmod line to cause
+ the adapter to use the AUI interface instead of the 10 Base T
+ interface. This is also what to do if you want to use the BNC
+ connector on a TLAN based device. (Setting this option on a
+ device that does not have an AUI/BNC connector will probably
+ cause it to not function correctly.)
+
+ 3. You can set duplex=1 to force half duplex, and duplex=2 to
+ force full duplex.
+
+ 4. You can set speed=10 to force 10Mbs operation, and speed=100
+ to force 100Mbs operation. (I'm not sure what will happen
+ if a card which only supports 10Mbs is forced into 100Mbs
+ mode.)
+
+ 5. You have to use speed=X duplex=Y together now. If you just
+ do "insmod tlan.o speed=100" the driver will do Auto-Neg.
+ To force a 10Mbps Half-Duplex link do "insmod tlan.o speed=10
+ duplex=1".
+
+ 6. If the driver is built into the kernel, you can use the 3rd
+ and 4th parameters to set aui and debug respectively. For
+ example::
+
+ ether=0,0,0x1,0x7,eth0
+
+ This sets aui to 0x1 and debug to 0x7, assuming eth0 is a
+ supported TLAN device.
+
+ The bits in the third byte are assigned as follows:
+
+ ==== ===============
+ 0x01 aui
+ 0x02 use half duplex
+ 0x04 use full duplex
+ 0x08 use 10BaseT
+ 0x10 use 100BaseTx
+ ==== ===============
+
+ You also need to set both speed and duplex settings when forcing
+ speeds with kernel-parameters.
+ ether=0,0,0x12,0,eth0 will force link to 100Mbps Half-Duplex.
+
+ 7. If you have more than one tlan adapter in your system, you can
+ use the above options on a per adapter basis. To force a 100Mbit/HD
+ link with your eth1 adapter use::
+
+ insmod tlan speed=0,100 duplex=0,1
+
+ Now eth0 will use auto-neg and eth1 will be forced to 100Mbit/HD.
+ Note that the tlan driver supports a maximum of 8 adapters.
+
+
+III. Things to try if you have problems
+=======================================
+
+ 1. Make sure your card's PCI id is among those listed in
+ section I, above.
+ 2. Make sure routing is correct.
+ 3. Try forcing different speed/duplex settings
+
+
+There is also a tlan mailing list which you can join by sending "subscribe tlan"
+in the body of an email to majordomo@vuser.vu.union.edu.
+
+There is also a tlan website at http://www.compaq.com
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/toshiba/spider_net.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/toshiba/spider_net.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fe5b32be1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/toshiba/spider_net.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===========================
+The Spidernet Device Driver
+===========================
+
+Written by Linas Vepstas <linas@austin.ibm.com>
+
+Version of 7 June 2007
+
+Abstract
+========
+This document sketches the structure of portions of the spidernet
+device driver in the Linux kernel tree. The spidernet is a gigabit
+ethernet device built into the Toshiba southbridge commonly used
+in the SONY Playstation 3 and the IBM QS20 Cell blade.
+
+The Structure of the RX Ring.
+=============================
+The receive (RX) ring is a circular linked list of RX descriptors,
+together with three pointers into the ring that are used to manage its
+contents.
+
+The elements of the ring are called "descriptors" or "descrs"; they
+describe the received data. This includes a pointer to a buffer
+containing the received data, the buffer size, and various status bits.
+
+There are three primary states that a descriptor can be in: "empty",
+"full" and "not-in-use". An "empty" or "ready" descriptor is ready
+to receive data from the hardware. A "full" descriptor has data in it,
+and is waiting to be emptied and processed by the OS. A "not-in-use"
+descriptor is neither empty or full; it is simply not ready. It may
+not even have a data buffer in it, or is otherwise unusable.
+
+During normal operation, on device startup, the OS (specifically, the
+spidernet device driver) allocates a set of RX descriptors and RX
+buffers. These are all marked "empty", ready to receive data. This
+ring is handed off to the hardware, which sequentially fills in the
+buffers, and marks them "full". The OS follows up, taking the full
+buffers, processing them, and re-marking them empty.
+
+This filling and emptying is managed by three pointers, the "head"
+and "tail" pointers, managed by the OS, and a hardware current
+descriptor pointer (GDACTDPA). The GDACTDPA points at the descr
+currently being filled. When this descr is filled, the hardware
+marks it full, and advances the GDACTDPA by one. Thus, when there is
+flowing RX traffic, every descr behind it should be marked "full",
+and everything in front of it should be "empty". If the hardware
+discovers that the current descr is not empty, it will signal an
+interrupt, and halt processing.
+
+The tail pointer tails or trails the hardware pointer. When the
+hardware is ahead, the tail pointer will be pointing at a "full"
+descr. The OS will process this descr, and then mark it "not-in-use",
+and advance the tail pointer. Thus, when there is flowing RX traffic,
+all of the descrs in front of the tail pointer should be "full", and
+all of those behind it should be "not-in-use". When RX traffic is not
+flowing, then the tail pointer can catch up to the hardware pointer.
+The OS will then note that the current tail is "empty", and halt
+processing.
+
+The head pointer (somewhat mis-named) follows after the tail pointer.
+When traffic is flowing, then the head pointer will be pointing at
+a "not-in-use" descr. The OS will perform various housekeeping duties
+on this descr. This includes allocating a new data buffer and
+dma-mapping it so as to make it visible to the hardware. The OS will
+then mark the descr as "empty", ready to receive data. Thus, when there
+is flowing RX traffic, everything in front of the head pointer should
+be "not-in-use", and everything behind it should be "empty". If no
+RX traffic is flowing, then the head pointer can catch up to the tail
+pointer, at which point the OS will notice that the head descr is
+"empty", and it will halt processing.
+
+Thus, in an idle system, the GDACTDPA, tail and head pointers will
+all be pointing at the same descr, which should be "empty". All of the
+other descrs in the ring should be "empty" as well.
+
+The show_rx_chain() routine will print out the locations of the
+GDACTDPA, tail and head pointers. It will also summarize the contents
+of the ring, starting at the tail pointer, and listing the status
+of the descrs that follow.
+
+A typical example of the output, for a nearly idle system, might be::
+
+ net eth1: Total number of descrs=256
+ net eth1: Chain tail located at descr=20
+ net eth1: Chain head is at 20
+ net eth1: HW curr desc (GDACTDPA) is at 21
+ net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=x40800101
+ net eth1: HW next desc (GDACNEXTDA) is at 22
+ net eth1: Last 255 descrs with stat=xa0800000
+
+In the above, the hardware has filled in one descr, number 20. Both
+head and tail are pointing at 20, because it has not yet been emptied.
+Meanwhile, hw is pointing at 21, which is free.
+
+The "Have nnn decrs" refers to the descr starting at the tail: in this
+case, nnn=1 descr, starting at descr 20. The "Last nnn descrs" refers
+to all of the rest of the descrs, from the last status change. The "nnn"
+is a count of how many descrs have exactly the same status.
+
+The status x4... corresponds to "full" and status xa... corresponds
+to "empty". The actual value printed is RXCOMST_A.
+
+In the device driver source code, a different set of names are
+used for these same concepts, so that::
+
+ "empty" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_CARDOWNED == 0xa
+ "full" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_FRAME_END == 0x4
+ "not in use" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_NOT_IN_USE == 0xf
+
+
+The RX RAM full bug/feature
+===========================
+
+As long as the OS can empty out the RX buffers at a rate faster than
+the hardware can fill them, there is no problem. If, for some reason,
+the OS fails to empty the RX ring fast enough, the hardware GDACTDPA
+pointer will catch up to the head, notice the not-empty condition,
+ad stop. However, RX packets may still continue arriving on the wire.
+The spidernet chip can save some limited number of these in local RAM.
+When this local ram fills up, the spider chip will issue an interrupt
+indicating this (GHIINT0STS will show ERRINT, and the GRMFLLINT bit
+will be set in GHIINT1STS). When the RX ram full condition occurs,
+a certain bug/feature is triggered that has to be specially handled.
+This section describes the special handling for this condition.
+
+When the OS finally has a chance to run, it will empty out the RX ring.
+In particular, it will clear the descriptor on which the hardware had
+stopped. However, once the hardware has decided that a certain
+descriptor is invalid, it will not restart at that descriptor; instead
+it will restart at the next descr. This potentially will lead to a
+deadlock condition, as the tail pointer will be pointing at this descr,
+which, from the OS point of view, is empty; the OS will be waiting for
+this descr to be filled. However, the hardware has skipped this descr,
+and is filling the next descrs. Since the OS doesn't see this, there
+is a potential deadlock, with the OS waiting for one descr to fill,
+while the hardware is waiting for a different set of descrs to become
+empty.
+
+A call to show_rx_chain() at this point indicates the nature of the
+problem. A typical print when the network is hung shows the following::
+
+ net eth1: Spider RX RAM full, incoming packets might be discarded!
+ net eth1: Total number of descrs=256
+ net eth1: Chain tail located at descr=255
+ net eth1: Chain head is at 255
+ net eth1: HW curr desc (GDACTDPA) is at 0
+ net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=xa0800000
+ net eth1: HW next desc (GDACNEXTDA) is at 1
+ net eth1: Have 127 descrs with stat=x40800101
+ net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=x40800001
+ net eth1: Have 126 descrs with stat=x40800101
+ net eth1: Last 1 descrs with stat=xa0800000
+
+Both the tail and head pointers are pointing at descr 255, which is
+marked xa... which is "empty". Thus, from the OS point of view, there
+is nothing to be done. In particular, there is the implicit assumption
+that everything in front of the "empty" descr must surely also be empty,
+as explained in the last section. The OS is waiting for descr 255 to
+become non-empty, which, in this case, will never happen.
+
+The HW pointer is at descr 0. This descr is marked 0x4.. or "full".
+Since its already full, the hardware can do nothing more, and thus has
+halted processing. Notice that descrs 0 through 254 are all marked
+"full", while descr 254 and 255 are empty. (The "Last 1 descrs" is
+descr 254, since tail was at 255.) Thus, the system is deadlocked,
+and there can be no forward progress; the OS thinks there's nothing
+to do, and the hardware has nowhere to put incoming data.
+
+This bug/feature is worked around with the spider_net_resync_head_ptr()
+routine. When the driver receives RX interrupts, but an examination
+of the RX chain seems to show it is empty, then it is probable that
+the hardware has skipped a descr or two (sometimes dozens under heavy
+network conditions). The spider_net_resync_head_ptr() subroutine will
+search the ring for the next full descr, and the driver will resume
+operations there. Since this will leave "holes" in the ring, there
+is also a spider_net_resync_tail_ptr() that will skip over such holes.
+
+As of this writing, the spider_net_resync() strategy seems to work very
+well, even under heavy network loads.
+
+
+The TX ring
+===========
+The TX ring uses a low-watermark interrupt scheme to make sure that
+the TX queue is appropriately serviced for large packet sizes.
+
+For packet sizes greater than about 1KBytes, the kernel can fill
+the TX ring quicker than the device can drain it. Once the ring
+is full, the netdev is stopped. When there is room in the ring,
+the netdev needs to be reawakened, so that more TX packets are placed
+in the ring. The hardware can empty the ring about four times per jiffy,
+so its not appropriate to wait for the poll routine to refill, since
+the poll routine runs only once per jiffy. The low-watermark mechanism
+marks a descr about 1/4th of the way from the bottom of the queue, so
+that an interrupt is generated when the descr is processed. This
+interrupt wakes up the netdev, which can then refill the queue.
+For large packets, this mechanism generates a relatively small number
+of interrupts, about 1K/sec. For smaller packets, this will drop to zero
+interrupts, as the hardware can empty the queue faster than the kernel
+can fill it.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/ngbe.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/ngbe.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..43a02f994
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/ngbe.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=============================================================
+Linux Base Driver for WangXun(R) Gigabit PCI Express Adapters
+=============================================================
+
+WangXun Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright (c) 2019 - 2022 Beijing WangXun Technology Co., Ltd.
+
+Support
+=======
+ If you have problems with the software or hardware, please contact our
+ customer support team via email at nic-support@net-swift.com or check our website
+ at https://www.net-swift.com
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/txgbe.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/txgbe.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..eaa87dbe8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/wangxun/txgbe.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+================================================================
+Linux Base Driver for WangXun(R) 10 Gigabit PCI Express Adapters
+================================================================
+
+WangXun 10 Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright (c) 2015 - 2022 Beijing WangXun Technology Co., Ltd.
+
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Support
+
+
+Support
+=======
+If you got any problem, contact Wangxun support team via support@trustnetic.com
+and Cc: netdev.